User Manual

SZGH-CNC1000TDb(series)
Lathe Control System
V4.0

Shenzhen Guanhong Automation CO.,LTD

Website: www.szghauto.com
Add:QingShuiWan Building,No 7-1 Tangkeng Road, Liuyue community, Henggang Street ,
Longgang District, Shenzhen City,Guangdong Province, China
Post code: 518100
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Warnings and Notes as Used in this Publication

Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be
associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.

Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which
are not present in all hardware and software systems. Shenzhen Guanhong Automation assumes no
obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
Shenzhen Guanhong Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or
statutory with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency,
or usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.

©Copyright 2021 Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.

All Rights Reserved.

I
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that
these precautions be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a
CNC unit (all descriptions in this section assume this configuration). Note that some precautions
are related only to specific functions, and thus may not be applicable to certain CNC units.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the
relevant manual supplied by the machine tool builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or
create a program to control the operation of the machine, the operator must become fully familiar
with the contents of this manual and relevant manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
1 Definition of Warning , Caution, and Note
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.

Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place !!!

II
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

2 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

Warning
1. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine.
Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing a trial run
using, for example, the single block, feedrate override, or machine lock function or by operating the machine with
neither a tool nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the correct operation of the machine may result in the
machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
2. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly,
possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
3. Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation.
Generally, for each machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with
the intended operation. Refer to the manual provided with the machine to determine the maximum allowable
feedrate. If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave unexpectedly, possibly causing damage
to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
4. When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and amount of Compensation.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly,
possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
5. The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory-set.
Usually, there is not need to change them. When, however, there is not alternative other than to change a
parameter, ensure that you fully understand the function of the parameter before making any change. Failure to
set a parameter correctly may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the
workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
6. Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch any of the keys on the MDI panel until the position
display or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit. Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated to
maintenance or other special operations. Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit in other than its
normal state. Starting the machine in this state may cause it to behave unexpectedly.
7. The operator’s manual and programming manual supplied with a CNC unit provide an overall description of
the machine’s functions, including any optional functions. Note that the optional functions will vary from one
machine model to another. Therefore, some functions described in the manuals may not actually be available for a
particular model. Check the specification of the machine if in doubt.
8. Some functions may have been implemented at the request of the machine–tool builder. When using such
functions, refer to the manual supplied by the machine–tool builder for details of their use and any related
cautions.

NOTE: Programs,parameters, and macro variables are stored in nonvolatile memory in the CNC unit.
Usually, they are retained even if the power is turned off. Such data may be deleted inadvertently, however, or
it may prove necessary to delete all data from nonvolatile memory as part of error recovery.To guard against
the occurrence of the above, and assure quick restoration of deleted data, backup all vital data, and keep the
backup copy in a safe place.

III
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING

This section covers the major safety precautions related to programming. Before attempting to perform
programming, read the supplied operator’s manual and programming manual carefully such that you are fully
familiar with their contents.

Warning
1.Coordinate system setting
If a coordinate system is established incorrectly, the machine may behave unexpectedly as a result of the
program issuing an otherwise valid move command. Such an unexpected operation may damage the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
2. Positioning by nonlinear interpolation
When performing positioning by nonlinear interpolation (positioning by nonlinear movement between the
start and end points), the tool path must be carefully confirmed before performing programming. Positioning
involves rapid traverse. If the tool collides with the workpiece, it may damage the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
3. Function involving a rotation axis
When programming polar coordinate interpolation or normal–direction (perpendicular) control, pay careful
attention to the speed of the rotation axis. Incorrect programming may result in the rotation axis speed becoming
excessively high, such that centrifugal force causes the chuck to lose its grip on the workpiece if the latter is not
mounted securely. Such mishap is likely to damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to
the user.
4. Inch/metric conversion
Switching between inch and metric inputs does not convert the measurement units of data such as the
workpiece origin offset, parameter, and current position. Before starting the machine, therefore, determine which
measurement units are being used. Attempting to perform an operation with invalid data specified may damage
the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
5. Constant surface speed control
When an axis subject to constant surface speed control approaches the origin of the workpiece coordinate
system, the spindle speed may become excessively high. Therefore, it is necessary to specify a maximum
allowable speed. Specifying the maximum allowable speed incorrectly may damage the tool, the machine itself,
the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
6. Stroke check
After switching on the power, perform a manual reference position return as required. Stroke check is not
possible before manual reference position return is performed. Note that when stroke check is disabled, an alarm
is not issued even if a stroke limit is exceeded, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or
causing injury to the user.
7. Absolute/incremental mode
If a program created with absolute values is run in incremental mode, or vice versa, the machine may behave
unexpectedly.
8. Plane selection
If an incorrect plane is specified for circular interpolation, helical interpolation, or a canned cycle, the
machine may behave unexpectedly. Refer to the descriptions of the respective functions for details.

IV
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

9. Compensation function
If a command based on the machine coordinate system or a reference position return command is issued in
compensation function mode, compensation is temporarily canceled, resulting in the unexpected behavior of the
machine. Before issuing any of the above commands, therefore, always cancel compensation function mode.

4 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING

This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of machine tools. Before attempting to
operate your machine, read the supplied operator’s manual and programming manual carefully, such that you are
fully familiar with their contents.

Warning
1. Manual operation
When operating the machine manually, determine the current position of the tool and workpiece, and ensure
that the movement axis, direction, and feedrate have been specified correctly. Incorrect operation of the machine
may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the operator.
2. Manual reference position return
After switching on the power, perform manual reference position return as required. If the machine is
operated without first performing manual reference position return, it may behave unexpectedly. Stroke check is
not possible before manual reference position return is performed. An unexpected operation of the machine may
damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
3. Manual handle feed
In manual handle feed, rotating the handle with a large scale factor, such as 100, applied causes the tool and
table to move rapidly. Careless handling may damage the tool and/or machine, or cause injury to the user.
4. Disabled override
If override is disabled (according to the specification in a macro variable) during threading or other tapping,
the speed cannot be predicted, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to
the operator.
5. Origin/preset operation
Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation when the machine is operating under the control of a
program. Otherwise, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
tool, or causing injury to the user.
6. Workpiece coordinate system shift
Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may shift the workpiece coordinate system. Before
attempting to operate the machine under the control of a program, confirm the coordinate system carefully. If the
machine is operated under the control of a program without making allowances for any shift in the workpiece
coordinate system, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.
7. Software operator’s panel and menu switches
Using the software operator’s panel and menu switches, in combination with the MDI panel, it is possible to
specify operations not supported by the machine operator’s panel, such as mode change, override value change,
and jog feed commands. Note, however, that if the MDI panel keys are operated inadvertently, the machine may
behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
8. Manual intervention
If manual intervention is performed during programmed operation of the machine, the tool path may vary

V
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

when the machine is restarted. Before restarting the machine after manual intervention, therefore, confirm the
settings of the manual absolute switches, parameters, and absolute/incremental command mode.
9. Feed hold, override, and single block
The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block functions can be disabled using custom macro system
variable #3004. Be careful when operating the machine in this case.
10. Dry run
Usually, a dry run is used to confirm the operation of the machine. During a dry run, the machine operates at
dry run speed, which differs from the corresponding programmed feedrate. Note that the dry run speed may
sometimes be higher than the programmed feed rate.
11. Cutter and tool nose radius compensation in MDI mode
Pay careful attention to a tool path specified by a command in MDI mode, because tool nose radius
compensation is not applied. When a command is entered from the MDI to interrupt in automatic operation in
tool nose radius compensation mode, pay particular attention to the tool path when automatic operation is
subsequently resumed. Refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions for details.
12. Program editing
If the machine is stopped, after which the machining program is edited (modification, insertion, or deletion),
the machine may behave unexpectedly if machining is resumed under the control of that program. Basically, do
not modify, insert, or delete commands from a machining program while it is in use.

5 WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

WARNING
1. Memory backup battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an
emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only
those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an
insulating cover).Touching the uncovered high–voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
NOTE:The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory, because it must retain data such as
programs, offsets, and parameters even while external power is not applied. If the battery voltage drops, a low
battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operator’s panel or screen. When a low battery voltage
alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the contents of the CNC memory will be lost.
Refer to the maintenance section of the operator’s manual for details of the battery replacement procedure.
2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an
emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only
those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this work. When
replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating
cover). Touching the uncovered high–voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.
NOTE:The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its absolute position. If the battery voltage
drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operator’s panel or screen. When a low battery
voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the absolute position data held by
the pulse coder will be lost.

VI
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3. Fuse replacement
For some units, the chapter covering daily maintenance in the operator’s manual or programming manual
describes the fuse replacement procedure.
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the cause of the blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform
this work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked and
fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered high–voltage circuit presents an extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.

Special Attention:
1. All the functions of Y(C) axis & A axis are effective when configure with 3rd & 4th axis system.
2. When use this system for the first time, please read carefully all the details of each chapter so as to make it
work more efficiency and safer.
3. The "Run" button on the panel of system can be used when debugging (P9_D14 in Other parameter to set
"Valid" or "Invalid"), must plus an external "Run" button when fitting system, otherwise it may cause
accident because of the using life of this key!!! The "Start" key of panel on CNC controller are prohibited to
using for long time, otherwise the consequences has nothing to do with my company.
4. The "Pause" button on the panel of system can be used when debugging,P203 on User parameter are set
its function to "valid" or "Invalid"),must plus an external "Pause" button when user using this cnc system at
real processing, otherwise it may cause accident because of the using life of this key!!! The "Pause" key of
panel on CNC controller are prohibited to using for long time,otherwise the consequences has nothing to do
with my company.
5. Don’t plug & insert connectors when system is on power.
6. We will use some short name to stands for parameter number. For example: P -- Parameter , P1 stands for
the No.1 parameter .Example: P9-D6,also No.9 parameter, No.7 bit from right to left side.
7. There are some bit parameters on CNC system, different bit parameters have different means, some bit
parameters are for inner system,don’t change these bits parameter we don’t explain,keep same as ex-factory
set.

VII
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Preface ................................................................................................................................................. - 1 -
1.1 Characteristics .......................................................................................................................................... - 2 -
1.2 Technical Specifications ........................................................................................................................... - 2 -
1.3 G Code List ...............................................................................................................................................- 4 -
1.4 System operation condition ...................................................................................................................... - 5 -
Chapter 2 Programming ...................................................................................................................................... - 6 -
2.1 Basic Concept of Programming ............................................................................................................... - 7 -
2.1.1 Definition of Coordinate System .................................................................................................. - 7 -
2.1.2 Machine Coordinate System and Machine Reference Point ........................................................ - 8 -
2.1.3 Workpiece Coordinate System and Program Reference Point ..................................................... - 8 -
2.1.4 Coordinate System ........................................................................................................................ - 9 -
2.1.5 Interpolation ................................................................................................................................ - 10 -
2.1.6 Absolute Programming & Incremental Programming ................................................................ - 12 -
2.1.7 Diameter Programming & Radius Programming ....................................................................... - 13 -
2.1.8 Cutting Speed & Spindle Speed ..................................................................................................- 14 -
2.1.9 Tool Function ...............................................................................................................................- 15 -
2.1.10 Command For Machine Operations .......................................................................................... - 15 -
2.2 Configuration of Program ...................................................................................................................... - 16 -
2.3 Main Program & Subprogram ................................................................................................................- 19 -
2.4 Program Run ...........................................................................................................................................- 19 -
Chapter 3 G INSTRCUTIONS ......................................................................................................................... - 20 -
3.1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................................- 20 -
3.2 G Code List .............................................................................................................................................- 20 -
3.3 Positioning (Rapid Traverse) (G00) ....................................................................................................... - 22 -
3.4 Linear Interpolation (G01) ..................................................................................................................... - 24 -
3.5 Circular Interpolation (G02/G03) ...........................................................................................................- 24 -
3.6 Thread Cutting (G32) ............................................................................................................................. - 28 -
3.6.1 Constant Lead Threading ............................................................................................................ - 28 -
3.6.2 Continuous Thread Cutting ......................................................................................................... - 29 -
3.6.3 Thread Cutting With Variable Lead ............................................................................................ - 30 -
3.7 Circular Thread Cutting(G332/G333) ....................................................................................................- 30 -
3.8 Canned Cycle(G90,G92,G93,G94) ........................................................................................................ - 30 -
3.8.1 Outer Diameter/Internal Diameter Cutting Cycle (G90) ............................................................ - 31 -
3.8.2 Thread Cutting Cycle (G92) ........................................................................................................- 33 -
3.8.3 Canned Tapping Cycle (G93) ......................................................................................................- 36 -
3.8.4 End Face Turning Cycle G94 ...................................................................................................... - 38 -
3.8.5 Usage for Canned Cycle ..............................................................................................................- 41 -
3.9 Multiple Repetitive Cycle Instructions(G70~G76) ................................................................................- 42 -
3.9.1 Axial Roughing Turning Cycle (G71) .........................................................................................- 42 -
3.9.2 Radial Roughing Facing Cycle (G72) .........................................................................................- 45 -

VIII
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.9.3 Pattern Repeating Cycle (G73) ................................................................................................... - 46 -

3.9.4 Finishing Cycle (G70) .................................................................................................................- 48 -
3.9.5 Usages of G71,G72,G73 & G70 ................................................................................................. - 48 -
3.9.5.1 Example of G71&G70 ..................................................................................................... - 48 -
3.9.5.2 Example of G72 & G70 ................................................................................................... - 49 -
3.9.5.3 Example of G73&G70 ..................................................................................................... - 49 -
3.9.6 End Face Peck Drilling Cycle (G74) .......................................................................................... - 50 -
3.9.7 Outer Diameter/Internal Diameter Drilling Cycle (G75) ........................................................... - 52 -
3.9.8 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle (G76) .........................................................................................- 53 -
3.9.9 Notes On Multiple Repetitive Cycle (G70 ~ G76) ..................................................................... - 57 -
3.10 Skip Function(G31,G311) .................................................................................................................... - 58 -
3.11 Block Cycle (G22,G800) ......................................................................................................................- 59 -
3.12 Return to Starting Point (G26,G261~G264) ........................................................................................ - 59 -
3.13 Save Current Position (G25) ................................................................................................................ - 60 -
3.14 Return to Specified Position (G61,G611~G614) ................................................................................. - 60 -
3.15 Return to Reference Position (G28) ..................................................................................................... - 60 -
3.16 Coordinate System ................................................................................................................................- 61 -
3.16.1 Machine Coordinate System (G53) ...........................................................................................- 62 -
3.16.2 Workpiece Coordinate System .................................................................................................. - 62 -
3.16.3 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System(G50) ......................................................................... - 63 -
3.16.4 Selecting a Workpiece Coordinate System ............................................................................... - 64 -
3.16.5 Changing Workpiece Coordinate System ................................................................................. - 64 -
3.16.6 Workpiece Coordinate System Shift ......................................................................................... - 66 -
3.16.7 Local Coordinate System .......................................................................................................... - 66 -
3.17 Constant Surface Speed Control (G96/G97) ........................................................................................- 68 -
3.18 Cutting Feed (G98,G99) .......................................................................................................................- 70 -
3.19 Pole Coordinate Interpolation (G15/G16) ............................................................................................- 70 -
3.20 Absolute and Incremental Programming (G990,G991) ....................................................................... - 72 -
3.21 Inch/Metric Conversion (G20/G21) .....................................................................................................- 73 -
3.22 Dwell (G04) ..........................................................................................................................................- 74 -
3.23 Positioning/Continuous Path Processing(G60/G64) ............................................................................- 74 -
3.24 Workpiece Position and Move Command ............................................................................................- 75 -
3.25 Details of Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G40/G41/G42) ..............................................................- 78 -
3.26 Tool Nose Radius Compensation of Offset C ...................................................................................... - 79 -
3.27 Automatic beveling (I) and smoothing(R) ........................................................................................... - 84 -
3.28 3D Space Arc Interpolation G06 .......................................................................................................... - 85 -
3.29 Macro program instruction(G65/G66/G67) ......................................................................................... - 86 -
3.29.1 Non-Mode Macro Command G65 ............................................................................................ - 86 -
3.29.2 Mode Macro Command G66/G67 ............................................................................................ - 86 -
3.29.3 Macro Program Instruction ....................................................................................................... - 87 -
3.29.4 Operators’ meaning ................................................................................................................... - 89 -
3.29.5 Arithmetic & Logic Operation .................................................................................................. - 89 -
3.29.6 Local Variable ............................................................................................................................- 89 -
3.29.7 Global Variable ..........................................................................................................................- 90 -

IX
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.29.8 System Variable ......................................................................................................................... - 90 -

3.29.9 System Parameter Variable ........................................................................................................- 90 -
3.29.10 I/O variable ..............................................................................................................................- 90 -
3.29.11 Message Hint Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... - 90 -
3.29.12 Build Processing Program Automatically ............................................................................... - 91 -
3.30 Complex function for Turning & Milling ............................................................................................ - 92 -
3.31 Polar Coordinate Interpolation(G12.1/G13.1) ..................................................................................... - 92 -
3.32 Turning Side Cycle(G809) ................................................................................................................... - 95 -
Chapter 4 M INSTRCUTIONS .........................................................................................................................- 97 -
4.1 M Function (Auxiliary Function) ...........................................................................................................- 97 -
4.1.1 Program Stop(M00) .....................................................................................................................- 97 -
4.1.2 Optional Stop (M01) ................................................................................................................... - 97 -
4.1.3 End of Program (M02,M30) ........................................................................................................- 97 -
4.1.4 Cycle of Program (M20) ............................................................................................................. - 97 -
4.1.5 Account of Workpiece(M87) .......................................................................................................- 97 -
4.1.6 Unconditional Jump (M97) ......................................................................................................... - 97 -
4.2 Subprogram Configuration .....................................................................................................................- 98 -
4.2.1 Calling of Subprogram (M98) .....................................................................................................- 98 -
4.2.2 End of Subprogram (M99) .......................................................................................................... - 98 -
4.3 Standard PLC M Command List ............................................................................................................- 99 -
4.3.1 M Output Command List ............................................................................................................ - 99 -
4.3.1.1 Spindle Control (M03/M04/M05) ..................................................................................- 100 -
4.3.1.2 Spindle Gear Shifting(M41/M42/M43/M44) ................................................................ - 101 -
4.3.1.3 Coolant(M08/M09) ........................................................................................................ - 101 -
4.3.1.4 Lubricate(M32/M33) ......................................................................................................- 102 -
4.3.1.5 Chuck(M10/M11) ...........................................................................................................- 102 -
4.3.1.6 Tailstock(M79/M78) ...................................................................................................... - 102 -
4.3.1.7 Status Output of Machine Tool(M65/M67/M69) .......................................................... - 103 -
4.3.2 M Input Command List ............................................................................................................. - 103 -
4.3.3 M Special Command List ..........................................................................................................- 104 -
4.4 Analog Speed of Spindle(S , SS) ..........................................................................................................- 104 -
4.5 T Tool Function Command ...................................................................................................................- 105 -
4.6 User-defined macro instruction(G120-G160,M880-M889) ................................................................ - 105 -
4.7 Synthetic instance for programming .................................................................................................... - 106 -
4.8 Apply to High Speed Punch machine ...................................................................................................- 108 -
4.9 Usage of Following Function of Axes ................................................................................................. - 108 -
Chapter 5 Operation ........................................................................................................................................ - 109 -
5.1 Operational Panel ................................................................................................................................. - 109 -
5.2 Function Menu ......................................................................................................................................- 109 -
5.3 Editing Keyboard ..................................................................................................................................- 110 -
5.4 Machine Control Panel ......................................................................................................................... - 110 -
5.5 Manual Operation ................................................................................................................................. - 114 -
5.5.1 Manual Continuous ................................................................................................................... - 114 -
5.5.2 Manual Increment ......................................................................................................................- 114 -

X
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

5.5.3 Manual Pulse Generator (Handwheel) ...................................................................................... - 114 -

5.5.4 Manual Reference Position Return ........................................................................................... - 115 -
5.5.5 Alignment Tool(Posit Tool) ....................................................................................................... - 116 -
5.6 Auto Operation ......................................................................................................................................- 118 -
5.6.1 Automatic Processing Mode ......................................................................................................- 118 -
5.6.2 Processing at arbitrary program line or with arbitrary tool .......................................................- 119 -
5.6.2.1 Start from "nth" line(block) ............................................................................................- 119 -
5.6.2.2 Start from "N**" line ..................................................................................................... - 119 -
5.6.2.3 Start from "nth" tool ....................................................................................................... - 119 -
5.6.3 Start Program .............................................................................................................................- 120 -
5.6.4 Halt Program ............................................................................................................................. - 120 -
5.6.5 Emergency Stop .........................................................................................................................- 120 -
5.6.6 Alarm ......................................................................................................................................... - 120 -
5.6.7 Indicator Light Output ...............................................................................................................- 121 -
5.6.8 DNC function ............................................................................................................................ - 121 -
5.6.8.1 RS232-DNC ................................................................................................................... - 121 -
5.6.8.2 USB-DNC ...................................................................................................................... - 122 -
5.7 External Electrical Connection .............................................................................................................- 122 -
5.7.1 Limitation .................................................................................................................................. - 122 -
5.7.1.1 Software limitation .........................................................................................................- 122 -
5.7.1.2 External Switch for limitation ........................................................................................- 123 -
5.7.1.3 Suggestion Usage ........................................................................................................... - 123 -
5.7.1.4 External Switch for Power ON/OFF ..............................................................................- 123 -
5.8 Diagnosis .............................................................................................................................................. - 124 -
5.9 Programming Operation ....................................................................................................................... - 126 -
5.9.1 Editing ....................................................................................................................................... - 127 -
5.9.2 Copy ...........................................................................................................................................- 129 -
5.9.3 Delete .........................................................................................................................................- 129 -
5.9.4 Rename ...................................................................................................................................... - 129 -
5.9.5 Information ................................................................................................................................ - 129 -
5.9.6 Compile ..................................................................................................................................... - 129 -
5.9.7 Folder management ................................................................................................................... - 129 -
5.9.8 Execute Program ....................................................................................................................... - 129 -
5.9.9 Communication ......................................................................................................................... - 129 -
5.9.10 U-disk management .................................................................................................................- 130 -
5.9.10.1 Function Keys of USB-disk ......................................................................................... - 131 -
5.9.10.2 Management of Processing Program ........................................................................... - 131 -
5.9.10.3 Management of Parameters & Software ...................................................................... - 132 -
Chapter 6 Parameter List ................................................................................................................................ - 133 -
6.1 User Parameter ..................................................................................................................................... - 134 -
6.2 Speed parameter ................................................................................................................................... - 140 -
6.3 Axis parameter ......................................................................................................................................- 150 -
6.4 Tool parameter ...................................................................................................................................... - 163 -
6.5 Other Parameter ....................................................................................................................................- 165 -

XI
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

6.6 Workpiece Coordinate Parameter .........................................................................................................- 174 -

6.6.1 How to set up the workpiece coordinate system? .....................................................................- 175 -
6.6.2 How to adjust the offset value after set well? ........................................................................... - 175 -
6.7 Password ...............................................................................................................................................- 176 -
6.8 Redeem ................................................................................................................................................. - 177 -
6.8.1 Radius Compensation ................................................................................................................- 177 -
6.8.2 Length of redeem .......................................................................................................................- 178 -
6.8.3 Tool Sets List ............................................................................................................................. - 179 -
6.8.4 Set quantity ................................................................................................................................- 179 -
6.9 Screw Compensation ............................................................................................................................ - 180 -
Chapter 7 Installation & Connection ............................................................................................................. - 183 -
7.1 System installation and connection ...................................................................................................... - 183 -
7.2 System installation dimension ..............................................................................................................- 183 -
7.3 System Rear View ................................................................................................................................ - 184 -
7.4 Interface Connection Graph ................................................................................................................. - 185 -
7.4.1 CN4 Turret Socket (Female/DB15) .......................................................................................... - 185 -
7.4.2 CN9 Spindle Encoder Socket (Female/DB9) ........................................................................... - 186 -
7.4.3 CN3 IO1 Control Socket (Female/DB25) .................................................................................- 187 -
7.4.4 CN10 IO2 Socket (Female/DB25) ............................................................................................ - 188 -
7.4.5 CN16 IO3 Socket (Female/DB26) ............................................................................................ - 189 -
7.4.6 CN5 XYZ Drive Socket (Male/DB25) ..................................................................................... - 190 -
7.4.7 CN6 AB Drive Socket (Male/DB15) ........................................................................................ - 191 -
7.4.8 CN11 MPG/Handhold Box Socket (Male/DB15) .................................................................... - 192 -
7.4.8.1 Electrical handwheel (Manual pulse generator) ............................................................ - 192 -
7.4.8.2 Using for Band Switch ................................................................................................... - 193 -
7.4.8.3 External Switch for Run/Halt .........................................................................................- 193 -
7.4.8.4 Using for External Emergency Stop .............................................................................. - 193 -
7.5 SZGH-CNC-IO-12 IO Relay Board .....................................................................................................- 194 -
7.6 Daily Maintenance and Repair .............................................................................................................- 196 -
7.6.1 Maintain .....................................................................................................................................- 196 -
7.6.2 Ordinary Problem ...................................................................................................................... - 196 -
Appendix I Wiring Diagram of CN4 Turret .................................................................................................. - 198 -
Appendix II Wiring Diagram of CN3 Plug .................................................................................................... - 199 -
Appendix III Wiring Diagram of CN10 Plug ................................................................................................ - 200 -
Appendix IV Operational Panel ......................................................................................................................- 201 -

XII
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Chapter 1 Preface
CNC machine tool is an electron-mechanical integrated product, composed of Numerical
Control Systems of Machine Tools, machines, electric control components, hydraulic components,
pneumatic components, lubricant, coolant and other subsystems (components), and CNC systems
of machine tools are control cores of CNC machine tools. CNC systems of machine tools are
made up of computerized numerical control(CNC), servo (stepper) motor drive devices, servo (or
stepper) motor and etc.
Operational principles of CNC machine tools: according to requirements of machining
technology, edit user programs and input them to CNC, then CNC outputs motion control
instructions to the servo (stepper) motor drive devices, and last the servo (or stepper) motor
completes the cutting feed of machine tool by mechanical driving device; logic control
instructions in user programs to control spindle start/stop, tool selections, coolant ON/OFF,
lubricant ON/OFF are output to electric control systems of machine tools from CNC, and then the
electric control systems control output components including buttons, switches, indicators, relays,
contactors and so on. Presently, the electric control systems are employed with Programmable
Logic Controller (PLC) with characteristics of compact,convenience and high reliance. Thereof,
the motion control systems and logic control systems are the main of CNC machine tools.
SZGH-CNC1000TDb series CNC control system is standard type CNC control system for
lathe machine , which is developed by Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd. And we have
already made updates basic original CNC1000TDb CNC Controller.

Fig1.1 SZGH-CNC1000TDb

-1-
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

1.1 Characteristics
 1) 800*600 8.4 inch real color LCD Display
 2) Support ATC function , Macro function and PLC function
 3) Electric Turret & Binary code Turret & Special Turret, Max: 99 pieces of tools
 4) 128MB Memory , 100Mb user store room
 5) 2MHz Pulse Output Frequency, Default Pulse equivalent is 1um.
 6) PLC On-line Display,Monitor & Design
 7) High anti-jamming switch power(220VAC -> 24VDC & 5VDC)
 8) With USB interface, for upgrade & copy programs
 9) Fully English Display & keys,easy to operate
 10) Analog voltage output of 0~10V in two channels, support double spindles
 11) Adapted servo spindle can realize position,rigid tapping,threading of spindle
 12) Basic I/Os : 56*32
 13) Built-in screw compensation,Reverse backlash compensation
 14) English menu, program and interface, full screen edition
 15) Support macro variable dialog box & Running program by input points
1.2 Technical Specifications
Max Number of control axes
• Number of control axes: 5 axes (X Z Y(C) A B)
• Number of linkage axes: 5 axes
• Number of PLC control axes: 5 axes
Feeding axes function
• Minimum command unit: 0.001mm
• Position command range: +/- 99999.999
• Max speed: 300m/min , Feeding speed:0.001-15m/min
• G00 rapid override: Total 8 levels: 0~150%,real-time adjusting
• Feeding override: Total 16 levels: 0~150%,real-time adjusting
• Spindle override: Total 16 levels: 5%~150%,real-time adjusting
• Interpolation mode: Interpolation of linear ,arc ,thread and rigid tapping
• Auto chamfering
Thread
• Acceleration and deceleration function
• Common thread(follow the spindle) / Rigid thread
• Single-headed/Multi thread of straight ,taper and end surface in metric system/inch system,equal
and variable pitch thread
• Thread retracting length ,angle and speed characteristics can be set
• Thread pitch:0.1~1000.000mm or 0.1~99 tooth/inch
• Rapid traverse: linear type or S type
• The starting speed,finishing speed and time of acceleration and deceleration are set by parameter
Spindle function
• Analog voltage 0~10V output in two channels ,support speed control for two spindles
• Spindle encoder feedback in one channel,resolution of spindle encoder can be set

-2-
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

• Spindle speed: It is set by speed parameter,max spindle speed also corresponding to 10V
• Spindle override: Total 16 levels: 5%~150%,real-time adjusting
• Spindle constant surface speed control
• Rigid tapping
Tool Function
•Tool length compensation
• tool nose radius compensation (C type)
• Tool wearing compensation
• Method of setting tools: Tool-setting in fixed position ,trial cutting tool -setting,auto tool setting
• Tool offset executing mode: Rewriting coordinate mode,tool traverse mode
Precision compensation
• Backlash compensation/Pitch error compensation in memory type
• Built-in Thread Compensation
PLC function
• Refresh cycle: 8ms
• PLC program can be altered on PC , download by USB interface
• I/Os : 56*32 I/Os
• Support On-line display,monitor & alter ladder
Man-machine interface
• 8.4'' large screen real-color LCD , the resolution is 480 000
• Display in Chinese or English
• Display in two-dimensional tool path
• Real-time clock
• Operation management
• Operate mode:Auto, Manual, MDI, mechanical zero return, MPG/single step
• Operation authority of multiple-level management
• Alarm record
Edit program
• Program capacity: 128M
• Editing function: program/block/characters research ,rewriting and deleting
• Program format: ISO-840 code,support Macro command programming, programming of relative
coordinate ,absolute coordinate and hybrid coordinate,fit to ISO-841.
• Calling program: Support macro program ,subprogram
Community function
• RS232: Files of part program can be transmitted
• USB: File operation file directly processing in flash disk,support PLC programs,flash disk of
software upgrade.
Safety function
• Emergency stop
• Hardware travel limit
• Software travel limit
• Data restoring and recovering
• User-defined alarm hint

-3-
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

1.3 G Code List

CODE Description CODE Description
G00 Rapid Positioning G17 XY plane selection
G01 Linear Interpolation G18 ZX plane selection
G02 Circular Interpolation CW G19 YZ plane selection
G03 Circular Interpolation CCW G65 Macro command non-mode calling
G32 Threading Cutting G66 Macro command mode calling
G31 Jumping function G67 Macro program mode calling calling
G311 Jumping function G40 Tool nose radius compensation cancel
G70 Finishing Cycle G41 Tool nose radius left compensation
G71 Axial Roughing in Cycle G42 Tool nose radius right compensation
G72 Radial Roughing in cycle G26 Return to starting point of program
G73 Close Cutting Cycle G261 X-axis Return to starting point of program
G74 Axial Grooving Cycle G262 Y-axis Return to starting point of program
G75 Radial Grooving Cycle G263 Z-axis Return to starting point of program
G76 Multiple Thread cutting cycle G264 A-axis Return to starting point of program
G90 Axial Cutting cycle G265 B-axis Return to starting point of program
G92 Thread cutting cycle G25 Save curret coordinate value
G93 Canned Tapping Cycle G61 Return to position of G25
G94 Radial Cutting Cycle G611 X-axis return to position of G25
G22 Program Cycle G612 Y-axis return to position of G25
G800 Program Cycle Cancel G613 Z-axis return to position of G25
G15 Polar coordinate command cancel G614 A-axis return to position of G25
G16 Polar coordinate command G615 B-axis return to position of G25
G990 Absolute value programming G28 Return to home of machine
G991 Incremental value programming G281 X-axis return to home of machine
G20 Inch input G282 Y-axis return to home of machine
G21 Millimeter input G283 Z-axis return to home of machine
G04 Dwell G284 A-axis return to home of machine
G60 Exact stop & position G285 B-axis return to home of machine
G64 Continuous track processing M800 C-axis return to zero position of SP-encoder
G50 Set max speed of spindle M801 C-axis ready to stop
G52 Set local coordinate system G53 Machine coordinate system
G184 Setup/Offset current coordinate value G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1
G185 Set/Offset all coordinate value G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2
G96 Constant surface speed control G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3
G97 Constant surface speed control cancel G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4
G98 Feeding/min G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5
G99 Feeding/rev G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6
G06 3D Space Arc Interpolation Note: System also includes M codes&Other codes.
-4-
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

1.4 System operation condition

1) Power supplying
AC 220V(+10%/-15%), Frequency 50Hz±2%. Power:≤ 200W.
Note: it must use isolation transform to supply power if 380VAC power input.
2) Climate condition
Item Working Conditions Storage&Delivery Conditions
Ambient Temperature 0℃~45℃ -40℃~+70℃
Ambient Humidity ≤95%(no freezing) ≤95%(40℃)
Atmosphere Pressure 86kPa~106kPa 86kPa~106kPa
Altitude ≤1000m ≤1000m
3) operation environment :
No excessive flour dust, no acid, no alkali gas and explosive gas, no strong electromagnetic
interference.

1.5 Wiring Sketch

Fig1.2 Wiring Sketch for Total CNC Lathe System

Note: User can select any one kind of operate panel for CNC controller,please check appendix IV.

-5-
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Chapter 2 Programming
CNC machine tool is an electron-mechanical integrated product, composed of Numerical
Control Systems of Machine Tools, machines, electric control components, hydraulic components,
pneumatic components, lubricant, coolant and other subsystems (components), and CNC systems
of machine tools are control cores of CNC machine tools. CNC systems of machine tools are made
up of computerized numerical control(CNC), servo (stepper) motor drive devices, servo (or stepper)
motor and etc.
Software used for controlling SZGH-CNC1000TDb Turning Machine CNC system is divided
into system software (NC for short) and PLC software (PLC for short). NC system is used for
controlling display, communication, edit, decoding, interpolation and acceleration/deceleration, and
PLC system for controlling explanations, executions, inputs and outputs of ladder diagrams.
Programming is a course of workpiece contours, machining technologies, technology
parameters and tool parameters being edit into part programs according to special CNC
programming instructions.CNC machining is a course of CNC controlling a machine tool to
complete machining of workpiece according requirements of part programs. Technology flow of
CNC machining is as following:

Confirm machining technologies

after analyzing workpiece drawings
O001
G00 X3.76 Z0
Edit part programs and copy into
G01 Z-1.28 F50
CNC system
...
M30;
Test part programs and execute trial %
running

Execute tool setting and set tool

offsets and coordinates

Run part program and machine

workpiece

Check part dimension and modify

part program and compensation

End of machining and workpiece is

formed

Fig2.1 Flow Chart of Programming

-6-
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

2.1 Basic Concept of Programming

2.1.1 Definition of Coordinate System
Sketch map of CNC turning machine is as following:

Fig2.2 Sketch Map of CNC Lathe Machine

Operational principles of CNC machine tools: according to requirements of machining

technology, edit user programs and input them to CNC, then CNC outputs motion control
instructions to the servo (stepper) motor drive devices, and last the servo (or stepper) motor
completes the cutting feed of machine tool by mechanical driving device; logic control instructions
in user programs to control spindle start/stop, tool selections, coolant ON/OFF, lubricant ON/OFF
are output to electric control systems of machine tools from CNC, and then the electric control
systems control output components including buttons, switches, indicators, relays, contactors and
so on. Presently, the electric control systems are employed with Programmable Logic Controller
(PLC) with characteristics of compact, convenience and high reliance. Thereof, the motion control
systems and logic control systems are the main of CNC machine tools.
CNC system is employed with a rectangular coordinate system composed of X, Z axis. X axis
is perpendicular with axes of spindle and Z axis is parallel with axes of spindle; direction of
approach to the workpiece is negative direction and direction are away from workpiece is positive
direction.
According to their relative position between the toolpost and spindle, there are 2 kinds of
turning coordinate system; one is Front toolpost coordinate system(Fig2.3) , the other is Rear
toolpost coordinate system(Fig2.4).It shows exactly the opposite direction in X direction but the
same direction in Z direction from figures. In the manual, following figures and examples are based
on Front toolpost coordinate system. Type of CNC Lathe Machine: P3 in Tool parameter.

Fig2.3 Front toolpost coordinate system Fig2.4 Rear toolpost coordinate system

-7-
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

2.1.2 Machine Coordinate System and Machine Reference Point

Machine tool coordinate system is a benchmark one used for CNC counting coordinates and
a fixed point on the machine tool.
Machine tool origin is named machine reference point , machine zero or home, which is
specified by a reference point return switch on the machine tool. Usually, the reference point return
switch is installed on max stroke in X, Z positive direction. The system considers the current
coordinates of machine tool as zeroes and sets the machine tool coordinate system according to the
current position as the coordinate origin after having executed the machine reference point return.
Machine Reference position is offset point based on machine zero.Offset value is set by
P32(X-axis) & P33(Z-axis) in Axis parameter. If P32&P33=0, machine zero & reference position is
same. Normally, tool change and programming of absolute zero point as described later are
performed at this position.

Fig2.5 Reference Position

The system considers the current coordinates of machine tool as zeroes and sets the machine
tool coordinate system according to the current position as the coordinate origin after having
executed return of machine reference point.
Note: Do not execute the machine reference point return without the reference point switch installed on the
machine tool , otherwise movement over limitation of stroke , and broke machine.

2.1.3 Workpiece Coordinate System and Program Reference Point

Workpiece coordinate system is set to a rectangular coordinate system according to part
drawings , also named floating coordinate system. After the workpiece is clamped on the machine
tool, G50 is executed to set an absolute coordinates of tool’s current position according to the
relative position of tool and workpiece, and so the workpiece system has been created. The current
position of tool is named program reference point and the tool returns to the position after
executing the program reference point return. Usually, Z axis is consistent with the axes of spindle
and X axis is placed on the heading or the ending of workpiece. The workpiece will be valid until it
is replaced by a new one.
The current position of workpiece coordinate system set by G50 is named the program
reference point and the system returns to it after executing the program reference point return.
Note: Do not execute the program reference point return when without using G50 to set the workpiece
coordinate system after power on.

-8-
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

2.1.4 Coordinate System

Coordinate system on part drawing and coordinate specified by CNC coordinate system.

Fig2.6 Coordinate system

The following two coordinate systems are specified at different locations:
1. Coordinate system on part drawing
The coordinate system is written on the part drawing. As the program data, the coordinate values
on this coordinate system are used.
2. Coordinate system specified by the CNC
The coordinate system is prepared on the actual machine tool. This can be achieved by
programming the distance from the current position of the tool to the zero point of the coordinate
system to be set.

Fig2.7 Coordinate system specified by the CNC

The tool moves on the coordinate system specified by the CNC in accordance with the command
program generated with respect to the coordinate system on the part drawing, and cuts a workpiece into a
shape on the drawing.
Therefore, in order to correctly cut the workpiece as specified on the drawing, the two coordinate
systems must be set at the same position.
The following method is usually used to define two coordinate systems at the same location.

-9-
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

1. When coordinate zero point is set at chuck face

Fig2.9 Coordinate system on lathe as

Fig2.8 Coordinates and dimensions on part
specified by CNC (made to coincide with
drawing
the coordinate system on part drawing)

2. When coordinate zero point is set at work end face.

Fig2.11 Coordinates system on lathe as specified by

CNC (made to coincide with the coordinate system
Fig2.10 Coordinates and dimensions on part drawing on part drawing)

2.1.5 Interpolation
The tool moves along straight lines and arcs constituting the workpiece parts figure.
Interpolation is defined as a planar or three dimensional contour formed by path of 2 or
multiple axes moving at the same time, also called Contour control. The controlled moving axis is
called link axis when the interpolation is executed. The moving distance, direction and speed of it
are controlled synchronously in the course of running to form the required complex motion path.
Fixed point control is defined that the motion path in the course of running are not controlled but
end point of one axis or multiple axes moving.
Linear Interpolation: Tool movement alone a straight line

Fig2.12 Tool movement along the straight line which is parallel to Z–axis

- 10 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Fig2.13 Tool movement along the taper line

Arc Interpolation: Tool movement along an arc

Fig2.14 Tool movement along an arc

Thread Interpolation(Thread Cutting): Threads can be cut by moving the tool in
synchronization with spindle rotation. In a program, specify the thread cutting function by G32.

Fig2.15 Straight thread cutting

Fig2.16 Taper thread cutting

Feed: Movement of the tool at a specified speed for cutting a workpiece is called the feed.

- 11 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Fig2.17 Feed Function

Feed Rates can be specified by using actual numeric. Eg.: F2.0 , which can be used to feed the
tool 2 mm while the workpiece makes one turn.
The function of deciding the feed rate is called the feed function.
2.1.6 Absolute Programming & Incremental Programming
Methods of command for moving the tool can be indicated by absolute or incremental
designation
Absolute command: The tool moves to a point at "the distance from zero point of the coordinate
system" that is to the position of the coordinate values.

Fig2.18 Absolute Command

Incremental command: Specify the distance from previous tool position to the next tool position.

Fig2.19 Incremental command

- 12 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

2.1.7 Diameter Programming & Radius Programming

Since the work cross section is usually circular in CNC lathe control programming, its
dimensions can be specified in two ways :
Diameter and Radius
When the diameter is specified, it is called diameter programming and when the radius is
specified, it is called radius programming.

Fig 2.20 Diameter Programming & Radius Programming

Dimensions of the X axis can be set in diameter or in radius. Diameter programming or radius
programming is employed independently in each machine. P16 in User parameter is set for
diameter command&radius command.
1. Diameter Programming
In diameter programming, specify the diameter value indicated on the drawing as the value of
the X axis.

Fig2.21 Diameter Programming

2. Radius Programming
In radius programming, specify the distance from the center of the workpiece, i.e. the radius
value as the value of the X axis.

- 13 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Fig2.22 Radius Programming

When using diameter programming, note the conditions listed in the table in the following,
Item Notes
X axis command Specified with a diameter value
Incremental command Specified with a diameter value
In the above figure, specifies D2 minus D1 for tool
path B to A of Fig2.14.
Coordinate system setting (G50) Specifies a coordinate value with a diameter value
Component of tool offset value P16 in User Parameter determines either diameter
or radius value
Parameters in canned cycle, such Specifies a radius value
as cutting depth along X axis. (R)
Radius designation in circular interpolation Specifies a radius value
(R, I, K, and etc.)
Feedrate along axis Specifies change of radius/rev. or change
of radius/min.
Display of axis position Displayed as diameter value
2.1.8 Cutting Speed & Spindle Speed
The speed of the tool with respect to the workpiece when the workpiece is cut is called the
cutting speed.
As for the CNC Machine, the cutting speed can be specified by the spindle speed in min – 1
unit.

Fig2.23 Cutting Speed

Eg.: <When a workpiece 200 mm in diameter should be machined at a cutting speed of 300
- 14 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

m/min. >
The spindle speed is approximately 478 min – 1, which is obtained from N=1000v/ π D.
Hence the following command is required:
S478 ;
Commands related to the spindle speed are called the spindle speed function.
The cutting speed v (m/min) can also be specified directly by the speed value. Even when the
workpiece diameter is changed, the CNC changes the spindle speed so that the cutting speed
remains constant.
This function is called the constant surface speed control function.
2.1.9 Tool Function
Selection of tool used for various machining.
When drilling, tapping, boring, milling or the like, is performed, it is necessary to select a
suitable tool. When a number is assigned to each tool and the number is specified in the program,
the corresponding tool is selected.

Fig2.24 Tool used for various machining

Example: <When No.01 is assigned to a roughing tool>
When the tool is stored at location 01 of the tool post, the tool can be
selected by specifying T0101.This is called the tool function
2.1.10 Command For Machine Operations
When machining is actually started, it is necessary to rotate the spindle, and feed coolant. For this
purpose, on–off operations of spindle motor and coolant valve should be controlled

Fig2.25 Command for machine Operations

The function of specifying the on–off operations of the components of the machine is called
the miscellaneous function. In general, the function is specified by an M code.
For example, when M03 is specified, the spindle is rotated clockwise at the specified spindle
speed.

- 15 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

2.2 Configuration of Program

A group of commands given to the CNC for operating the machine is called the program. User
needs to compile part programs according to instruction formats of CNC system.By specifying the
commands, the tool is moved along a straight line or an arc, or the spindle motor is turned on and
off.
In the program, specify the commands in the sequence of actual tool movements.

Fig2.26 Configuration of Program

Fig2.27 Program Configuration

Normally, a program number is specified after the end–of–block (;) code at the beginning of
the program, and a program end code (M02 or M30) is specified at the end of the program.
See the general structure of program as follows:
Explanation of
Program Name program

Skipping character Word

of block
Block
Sequence
Number
Ending character
of block
Ending character
of program
Fig2.28 General Structure of Program

- 16 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Program Name: consist of alphabet & number (Eg.: O0001). There are countless programs
stored in the system.To identify it, each program has only one program name(there is no the same
program name).
Note: It doesn’t allow exist blank on program name.

Word is the basic instruction unit to command CNC system to complete the control
function,composed of an English letter (called instruction address) and the following number
(operation instruction with/without sign). The instruction address describes the meaning of its
following operation instruction and there may be different meaning in the same instruction address
when the different words are combined together. Table 2-1 is Word List of SZGH-CNC1000TDb
system.
Table 2-1 Word List
Address Data range Functions
N 00000~9999 Block number
G 00~99 Preparatory function
100~150 User-defined G macro function
M 00~99 Auxiliary function output
T 01-99 Tool function
S 0-99999(rpm) Specify Speed of 1st Spindle
SS 0-99999(rpm) Specify Speed of 2nd Spindle
0.01-15000mm/min Feedrate per minute
F 0.001-500mm/r Feedrate per rev
0.1~1000mm Thread Lead in Metric
X ±99999.999mm Coordinates in X direction
0～9999.999(s) Dwell time
±99999.999mm Increment in X direction
U Finish allowance in X direction in G71,G72,G73
Cutting depth in G71
Moving distance of tool retraction in X direction in G73
Z ±99999.999mm Coordinates in Z direction
±99999.999mm Increment in Z direction
W Finish allowance in Z direction in G71,G72,G73
Cutting depth in G72
Moving distance of tool retraction in Z direction in G73
I 00-99 teeth/inch Thread Lead in Inch
±99999.999mm Vector of arc center relative to starting point I in X direction
K ±99999.999mm Vector of arc center relative to starting point in Z direction
0.001-99999.999mm Arc radius
Moving distance of cycle tool retraction in G71,G72
Cycle times of roughing in G73
R Moving distance of tool retraction after Cutting in G74, G75
Moving distance of tool retraction after cutting to the end point in G74, G75
Finishing allowance in G76
Taper in G90, G92, G94, G96
0.001-65s Dwell time
0000-99999 Calling subprogram number
P Circular moving distance in X direction in G74, G75
- 17 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Thread cutting parameter in G76

Initial block number of finishing in the compound cycle instruction
1~9999 Cycle times
L 1~9999 Cycle times of calling subprogram
1-99 Heads of multi-head thread
T 0000-9999 Tool function
00-99 Auxiliary function output, program executed
M flow, subprogram call
880-889 User-defined M Macro Function
/ Program skip

Block: a group of commands at each step of the sequence.

The program consists of a group of blocks for a series of machining. The number for
discriminating each block is called the sequence number, and the number for discriminating each
program is called the program number.
The block and the program have the following configurations.

Fig2.29 Block Configuration

A block begins with a sequence number that identifies that block and ends with an end–of–
block code.
This manual indicates the end–of–block code by ; (LF in the ISO code and CR in the EIA
code).
The contents of the dimension word depend on the preparatory function.
In this manual, the portion of the dimension word may be represent as IP_.
There is only one for other addresses except for N, G, S, T, H, L in one block, otherwise the
system alarms. The last word in the same address is valid when there are more N, G, S, T, H, L in
the same block. The last G instruction is valid when there are more G instructions which are in the
same group in one block.

- 18 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

2.3 Main Program & Subprogram

When machining of the same pattern appears at many portions of a program, a program for the
pattern is created. This is called the subprogram. On the other hand, the original program is called
the main program. When a subprogram execution command appears during execution of the main
program, commands of the subprogram are executed. When execution of the subprogram is
finished, the sequence returns to the main program.

2.4 Program Run

Press "Program" key, Select Processing Program

Execute: Press "F7" key : "Execute",system will jump to main screen.

Switch to Auto Mode:Press "AUTO" Key

Run Program: Press "Start" Button

Suggestion:Before running program,please compile program ,and ensure program is right.

- 19 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Chapter 3 G INSTRCUTIONS

3.1 INTRODUCTION
G instruction consists of instruction address G and its following 1～2 bits instruction value,
used for defining the motion mode of tool relative to the workpiece, defining the coordinates and so
on. Refer to G instructions as Table 3.
G
Instruction value(00~99,the leading zero can be omitted)
Instruction address G
A number of following address G determines the meaning of the command for the concerned
block.
G codes are divided into the following two types
Type Meaning
One-shot G code The G code is effective only in the block in which it is specified
Modal G code The G code is effective until another G code of the same group
is specified.
Eg.: G01 and G00 are modal G codes.

3.2 G Code List

1. If CNC enters the clear state ,also when the power is turned on or CNC is reset, the modal G
codes change as follows.
1) G codes marked with " " in Table 3 are enabled ,which is initial modal codes.
2) When system is cleared due to power-on or reset,which ever specified, either G20 or G21 ,
remains effective.
2. G codes of group 00 are single-shot G codes.
3. G codes of different groups can be specified in the same block.
If G codes of the same group are specified in the same block,the G code specified last is valid.
4. G codes of different groups can be specified in the same block.
If G codes of the same group are specified in the same block, the G code specified last is
valid.
5. If a G code of group 01 is specified in a canned cycle, the canned cycle is canceled in the
same way as when a G80 command is specified. G codes of group 01 are not affected by G codes
for specifying a canned cycle.
6. G codes are displayed for each group number.
7. When a G code not listed in the G code list is specified or a G code that corresponding
function is disabled.

- 20 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Table 3 G Code List

Word Ground Functions Page
G00 Positioning(Rapid Traverse)
G01 01 Linear Interpolation(Cutting feed)
G02 Circular Interpolation CW
G03 Circular Interpolation CCW
G32 Thread Cutting
G332 01 Thread Interpolation with Circular CW
G333 Thread Interpolation with Circular CCW
G70 Finishing Cycle
G71 Axial Roughing Turning Cycle
G72 Radial Roughing Facing Cycle
G73 00 Pattern Repeating Cycle
G74 End Face Peck Drilling
G75 Outer diameter/Internal diameter Grooving Cycle
G76 Multi Threading Cycle
G90 Outer diameter/internal diameter cutting cycle
G92 Thread Cutting Cycle
01
G93 Canned Tapping Cycle
G94 Endface turning cycle
G31 Skip function (No alarm)
00
G311 Skip function (alarm)
G22 Program Block Cycle
08
G800 Program Block Cycle Cancel
G26 ALL-Axis go starting point
G261 X-Axis go starting point
G262 03 Y-Axis go starting point
G263 Z-Axis go starting point
G264 A-Axis go starting point
G61 Return G25 coordinate of G25
G611 Return the coordinate position of X-Axis in G25
G612 04 Return the coordinate position of Y(C)-Axis in G25
G613 Return the coordinate position of Z-Axis in G25
G614 Return the coordinate position of A-Axis in G25
G25 00 Save value of current coordinate
G28 Return to reference position
G281 X-Axis return to reference position
G282 00 Y(C)-Axis Return to reference position
G283 Z-Axis Return to reference position
G284 A-Axis Return to reference position
G50 Coordinate system setting or max. spindle speed setting
G52 00 Local coordinate system setting
G53 Machine Coordinate System
G54 Workpiece Coordinate System-1 Selection
G55 Workpiece Coordinate System-2 Selection
G56 14 Workpiece Coordinate System-3 Selection
G57 Workpiece Coordinate System-4 Selection
G58 Workpiece Coordinate System-5 Selection

- 21 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

G59 Workpiece Coordinate System-6 Selection

G184 Setup/offset coordinate of current tool
00
G185 Setup/offset coordinate of all tools
G96 Constant surface speed control
02
G97 Constant surface speed control cancel
G98 Feeding per minute
05
G99 Feeding per revolution
G15 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
21
G16 Polar coordinate interpolation mode
G990 Absolute programming
12
G991 Incremental programming
G20 Input in Inch
06
G21 Input in mm
G65 00 Macro calling
G66 Macro modal call
12
G67 Macro modal call cancel
G04 00 Dwell
G60 Exact Stop & Positioning
04
G64 Continuous Path Processing
G40 Tool nose radius compensation cancel
G41 07 Tool nose radius compensation left
G42 Tool nose radius compensation right
G17 XpYp plane selection
G18 16 ZpXp plane selection
G19 YpZp plane selection
3.3 Positioning (Rapid Traverse) (G00)
G00 command moves a tool to the position in the workpiece system specified with an absolute
or an incremental command at a rapid traverse rate.
In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end point is programmed.
In the incremental command the distance the tool moves is programmed.

Fig3.1 Coordinate Code of G00

Format: G00 X(U)_ Z(W)_ Y/C(V)_ A_ ;
Either of the following tool paths can be selected according to P9_D6 (Bit 6 of No.9 parameter)
in Other parameter.
Non-linear interpolation positioning

- 22 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

The tool is positioned with the rapid traverse rate for each axis separately. The tool path is
normally straight.
Linear interpolation positioning
The tool path is the same as in linear interpolation (G01). The tool is positioned within the
shortest possible time at a speed that is not more than the rapid traverse rate for each axis. However,
the tool path is not the same as in linear interpolation (G01).

Fig3.2 Mode of Tool Path

P1 & P2 in Speed parameter is set for rapid traverse rate in the G00 command for X & Z axis
independently.
The speed rate of G00 can be divided into 5%～100%, total six gears, it can be selected by the
key on panel.
G00 is mode instruction, when the next instruction is G00 too, it can be omitted.G00 can be
written G0.
In the positioning mode actuated by G00, the tool is accelerated to a predetermined speed at the
start of a block and is decelerated at the end of a block.
Note: 1. When Rotary Axis positioning in absolute programming, G00 is actuated with nearest path ; when in
incremental programming, G00 is actuated with arithmetic path.
2. The rapid traverse rate cannot be specified in the address F.
3. Even if linear interpolation positioning is specified, nonlinear interpolation positioning is used in the
following cases. Therefore, be careful to ensure that the tool does not foul the workpiece.

Example:

<Diameter Programming>
G00 X40.0 Z56.0 ; (Absolute command)
G00 U-60.0 W-30.5 ; (Incremental command)
G00 U-60.0 Z56.0 ; (Compound programming)
G00 X40.0 W-30.5 ; (Compound programming)

Fig3.3 Positioning of G00

- 23 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.4 Linear Interpolation (G01)

A tools move along a line to the specified position at the feedrate specified in F.
Format: G01 X/U_ Z/W_ Y(C)/V_ A_ F_ ;
X,Z,Y(C), A means motion axis.For an absolute command, the coordinates of an end point ,
and for an incremental command, the distance the tool moves.
F: Speed of tool feed(Feedrate)
The feedrate specified in F is effective until a new value is specified. It need not be specified
for each block.
The feedrate commanded by the F code is measured along the tool path.
If the F code is not commanded, the feedrate is regarded as zero.
For feed–per–minute mode under 2–axis simultaneous control, the feedrate for a movement
along each axis as follows :

Example: <Diameter Programming>

Fig3.4 Linear Interpolation of G01

G01 X40.0 Z20.1 F20 ; (Absolute command)
G01 U20.0 W-25.9 F20 ; (Incremental command)
G01 instruction can also specify movement of either X-axis or Z-axis separately.
G01 is F feed rate can be motivated by the panel to override keys or Feed-Rate knob adjusted up or
down to adjust the range (0% -150%).
G01 instruction can also be directly written with G1.
3.5 Circular Interpolation (G02/G03)
These commands will move a tool along a circular arc.
Format: Arc in the ZpXp plane (Default)

- 24 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Code Description
G17 Specification of arc on XpYp plane
G18 Specification of arc on ZpXp plane(Default)
G19 Specification of arc on YpZp plane
G02 Circular Interpolation Clockwise direction (CW)
G03 Circular Interpolation Counterclockwise direction (CCW)
X/Z/Y Position of end point in workpiece coordinate
U/W/V Distance from start point to end point
I X axis distance from start point to center of an arc with sign(radius value)
K Z axis distance from start point to center of an arc with sign(radius value)
J Y axis distance from start point to center of an arc with sign(radius value)
R Arc radius without sign (always with radius value)
F Feedrate along the arc
Note: G18 is default set , which can be omitted.
Direction of circular interpolation: When turret in different position of lathe machine, Front
toolpost system & Rear toolpost system , the direction of G02&G03 is opposite in these two
system.

Fig3.5.1 Direction of G02&G03 at different toolpost system

"Clockwise"(G02) and "counterclockwise"(G03) on the ZpXp plane are defined when the XpYp
plane is viewed in the positive–to–negative direction of the Yp axis in the Cartesian coordinate
system.
Distance moved on an arc: The end point of an arc is specified by address X(U) , Z(W) or
Y(V), and is expressed as an absolute or incremental value according to G990 or G991. For the
incremental value, the distance of the end point which is viewed from the start point of the arc is
specified.
Distance from the start point to the center of arc: The arc center is specified by addresses
I and K for the Xp and Zp axes, respectively. The numerical value following I or K, however, is a
vector component in which the arc center is seen from the start point, and is always specified as
an incremental value irrespective of G990 and G991, as shown below.
I, and K must be signed according to the direction.

Fig3.5.2 Define & Direction of I & K

- 25 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

I0 and K0 can be omitted.

If the distance is from the end point to the center of arc , which exceeds by the value in a
parameter of P41 in Speed parameter(Original value+4).
Full–circle programming: When Xp and Zp are omitted (the end point is the same as the
start point) and the center is specified with I and K, a 360° arc (circle) is specified.
Arc radius: The distance between an arc and the center of a circle that contains the arc can be
specified using the radius, R, of the circle instead of I and K. In this case, one arc is less than 180°,
and the other is more than 180° are considered. If Xp and Zp are all omitted, if the end point is
located at the same position as the start point and when R is used, an arc of 0° is programmed.
G02R ; (The cutter does not move.)
Note: 1.When I = 0 or K = 0, they can be omitted; one of I, K or R must be input, otherwise the system alarms.
2.If I, K, and R addresses are specified simultaneously, the arc specified by address R takes precedence
and the other are ignored.
3.Processing arc workpiece usually use ball tool(arc tool) in the actual process, it must use function of
tool radius compensation in programming, that's G41 G42 instruction.
4.Arc path can be more than and less than 180° when R is commanded, the arc is more than180° when R
is negative, and it is less than or equal to 180°when R is positive.

Example 1 : Command of circular interpolation X,Z

Fig3.5.3 Command of circular interpolation

Example 2: Processing same path with different command.

<Diameter Programming>
 G02 X50.0 Z30.0 I25.0 F0.3
 G02 U20.0 W-20.0 I25.0 F0.3
 G02 X50.0 Z30.0 R25.0 F0.3
 G02 U20.0 W-20.0 R25.0 F0.3

Fig3.5.4 Processing same path with different command

- 26 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Example 3: Application of Circular Interpolation

<Program>
N20 G50 S2000 T0300
G96 S200 M03
G42 G00 X35.0 Z5.0 T0303 M08
G01 Z-20.0 F0.2
G02 X67.0 Z-36.0 R16.0
G01 X68.0
G03 X100.0 Z-52.0 R16.0
G01 Z-82.0
G40 G00 X200.0 Z200.0 M09 T03.00
M30
Fig3.5.5 Example 3

SZGH-CNC1000TDb CNC system support many kinds of thread cutting, which includes
straight thread,tapered thread,scroll thread,thread cutting with variable lead, Continuous thread
cutting, multiple-thread cutting, metric/inch single.Length and angle of thread run-out can be
changed,multiple-thread is machined by single side to protect tool and improve smooth finish of its
surface.
When machine tool needs to do thread cutting, spindle must fix encoder.When transmission of
spindle and encoder is not 1:1, we need to set transmission ratio by set P412&P413 in Axis
parameter.
P10 in Axis parameter is set for pulses of per rev of spindle(Resolution*Poles).
P412 in Axis parameter is set for teeth of spindle motor.
P413 in Axis parameter is set for teeth of spindle encoder.
X or Z axis traverses to start machine after the system receives spindle signal per rev in thread
cutting, and so one thread is machined by multiple roughing, finishing without changing spindle
speed.
There is a big error in the thread pitch because there are the acceleration and the deceleration at
the starting and ending of thread cutting in X, Z direction, and so there is length of thread lead-in
and distance of tool retraction at the actual starting and ending of thread cutting.
The traverse speed of tool in X, Z direction is defined by spindle speed instead of cutting
feedrate override in thread cutting when the pitch is defined. The spindle override control is valid
in thread cutting. When the spindle speed is changed, there is error in pitch caused by
acceleration/deceleration in X, Z direction, and so the spindle speed cannot be changed.
Note:
1. When spindle encoder can’t feedback real position of spindle chuck(also not 1:1), teeth of spindle motor
is more than teeth of spindle encoder , it must match with key-sets of our company ;
2. In the process of thread cutting, Feeding speed and override is invalid.
3. In the process of thread cutting, spindle will not stop whatever you operate, if the user operate
suspend,the system will suspend after processed this segment.
4. The spindle speed must remain constant from rough cutting through finish cutting. If not, incorrect
thread lead will occur.

- 27 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.6 Thread Cutting (G32)

Tapered screws and scroll threads in addition to equal lead straight threads can be cut by using
a G32 command.
The spindle speed is read from the position coder on the spindle in real time and converted to a
cutting feedrate for feed–per minute mode, which is used to move the tool.
3.6.1 Constant Lead Threading

Fig3.6.1 Straight thread Fig3.6.2 Tapered Screw Fig3.6.3 Scroll Thread

Straight thread: only input the direction and length of Z-axis;
Tapper thread: must input the direction and length of X-axis and Z-axis;
Scroll thread(head face thread): only input the direction and length of X-axis;
Format: G32 Z(W)_X(U)_ F(I)_ SP(Q)_ P_
G32 is the spiral interpolation machining instruction.it is modal.
X(U)_ , Z(W)_ is end point in absolutely/correspond coordinate system.
F_: metric lead(pitch) of long axis, is moving distance of long axis when the spindle rotates one
rev: 0.1-1000.000, unit:mm; Max Lead=Lines (Resolution) of Spindle encoder /10 mm. After F is
executed, it is valid until F with specified pitch is executed again.
I_: teeth per inch,is ones per inch(25.4 mm) in long axis, and also is circles of spindle rotation
when the long axis traverses one inch(25.4 mm):0.1~99 tooth/inch. After I is executed, it is valid
until I with specified pitch is executed again.
SP_: Initial angle(offset angle)between spindle rotation one rev and starting point of thread
cutting: 0~360000(unit: 0.001 degree). SP is non-modal parameter, must be defined every time,
otherwise it is 0°.
P: Turning sides,1~12. use A-axis to control driver motor of flying tool plate.

Fig3.6.4 Example of Thread Cutting

In general, thread cutting is repeated along the same tool path in rough cutting through finish
cutting for a screw. Since thread cutting starts when the position coder mounted on the spindle
outputs a 1–turn signal, threading is started at a fixed point and the tool path on the workpiece is

- 28 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

unchanged for repeated thread cutting.

α≥ 45º , lead is LZ , Z-axis is long axis

α≤ 45º , lead is LX , X-axis is long axis

Fig3.6.5 LZ & LX of a tapered thread

In general, the lag of the servo system, etc. will produce somewhat incorrect leads at the
starting and ending points of a thread cut. To compensate for this, a threading length somewhat
longer than required should be specified.
Example1: Straight Thread Cutting
Requirement: (Metric input, Diameter programming)
Thread Lead:4mm , δ1=3mm ;δ2=3mm ; Depth of
cut:1mm(cut twice)
G00 U-62.0 ;
G32 W-74.5 F4.0 ;
G00 U62.0 ;
W74.5 ;
U-64.0 ;
(For the second cut,cut 1mm)
G32 W-74.5 ;
G00 U64.0 ;
Fig3.6.6 Example of Straight Thread Cutting
W74.5 ;
Example2: Tapered Thread Cutting
Requirement: (Metric input, Diameter programming)
Thread Lead:3.5mm in the direction of Z-axis,
δ1=2mm ;δ2=1mm; Depth Cut(X):1mm (cut twice)
G00 X12.0 Z72.0 ;
G32 X-41.0 Z29.0 F3.5 ;
G00 X50.0 ;
Z72.0 ;
X10.0 ;
(For the second cut,cut 1mm)
G32 X39.0 Z29.0 ;
G00 X50.0 ;

Fig3.6.7 Example of Tapered Thread Cutting Z72.0 ;

3.6.2 Continuous Thread Cutting

This function for continuous thread cutting is such that fractional pulses output to a joint
between move blocks are overlapped with the next move for pulse processing and output (block
overlap) .
Therefore, discontinuous machining sections caused by the interruption of move during
continuously block machining are eliminated, thus making it possible to continuously direct the

- 29 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

block for thread cutting instructions.

Since the system is controlled in such a manner that the synchronous with the spindle does not
deviate in the joint between blocks wherever possible, it is possible to performed special thread
cutting operation in which the lead and shape change midway.

G32 G32
G32

Fig3.6.8 Continuous Thread Cutting

Even when the same section is repeated for thread cutting while changing the depth of cut, this
system allows a correct machining without impairing the threads.
3.6.3 Thread Cutting With Variable Lead
Variable-lead thread cutting is finished by continuous input G32 command, input a thread
length of each program, lead of thread(F) is different. At the second cycle , CNC system will not
detect the encoder synchronization signal.
The start angle (Q) increment is 0.001 degrees. Note that no decimal point can be specified.
Example: For a shift angle of 180 degrees, specify SP180000.
SP180.000 cannot be specified, because it contains a decimal point.
Special Note: 1. When the transmission ratio between Spindle and Encoder is not 1:1, it must be configured
with SZGH Transfer Board & modify P412 & P413 in Axis parameter;
2.F code & rate are invalid during threading cycle
3.During threading cycle,spindle wont stop with any actions, if user do stop spindle,system will pause
after finish this block.

3.7 Circular Thread Cutting(G332/G333)

Format: G332 Z(W)_ X(U)_ R_ F(I)_ SP_;
G332: Clockwise circular thread cutting
Format: G333 Z(W)_ X(U)_ R_ F(I)_ SP_
G333: Counter-Clockwise circular thread cutting
Z(W)_X(U)_: end point of thread cutting
R: radius of circular(negative number means degree over 180º)
F(I)_: lead(pitch) of thread ;
SP_ : start angle.The start angle is not a continuous–state (modal) value. It must be specified
each time it is used. If a value is not specified, 0 is assumed.
Using method refer to G02, G03, G32 instructions.

3.8 Canned Cycle(G90,G92,G93,G94)

To simplify programming, the system defines G instruction of single machining cycle with one
block to complete the rapid traverse to position, linear/thread cutting and rapid traverse to return to
the starting point.
There are three canned cycles : Outer diameter/internal diameter cutting canned cycle (G90),
Thread cutting canned cycle (G92), Canned tapping cycle (G93) , and End face turning canned
cycle (G94).
Note: 1. Explanatory diagrams in this chapter uses diameter programming in X axis.
2. In radius programming, changes U/2 with U and X/2 with X.
- 30 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.8.1 Outer Diameter/Internal Diameter Cutting Cycle (G90)

From starting point, the cutting cycle of cylindrical surface or taper surface is completed by
radial feeding(X axis) and axial(Z axis or X and Z) cutting.
a) Straight Cutting Cycle : Format: G90 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ ;
X: absolute coordinates of cutting end point in X direction
U: Increment coordinate value between end point and starting point of cutting in X direction
Z: absolute coordinates of cutting end point in Z direction
W: Increment coordinate value between end point and starting point of cutting in Z direction

Fig3.8.1 Straight Cutting Cycle

In incremental programming, the sign of the numbers following address U and W depends on
the direction of paths 1 and 2. In the Fig3.8.1, the signs of U and W are negative.
In single block mode, operations 1, 2, 3 and 4 are performed step by step.
b) Taper Cutting Cycle: Format: G90 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;
R:increment coordinate value (radius) between end point and start point of cutting in X direction.

Fig3.8.2 Taper Cutting Cycle

c) Signs of numbers specified in the taper cutting cycle
In incremental programming, the relationship between the signs of the numbers following
address U, W, and R, and the tool paths are as follows:
1. U<0 , W<0 , R<0 2. U>0,W<0, R>0

- 31 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3. U<0, W<0, R>0 4. U>0, W<0, R<0

at |R| ≤ |U/2| at |R| ≤ |U/2|

d) Cycle Process & examples

① The tool rapidly traverses from starting point to cutting starting point in X direction;
② Cutting feed(linear interpolation) from the cutting starting point to cutting end point;
③ Retract the tool at feedrate in X direction (opposite direction to the above-mentioned ①),
and return to the position which the absolute coordinates and the starting point are the same;
④ The tool rapidly traverses to return to the starting point and the cycle is completed.
Example1: Use G90 to Process Cylinder Surface
N10 T0101 ;
N20 G00 X55 Z4 M03 ;
N30 G01 Z2 F100 M08 ;
N40 G90 X45 Z-25 ;
N50 X40 ;
N60 X35 ;
N70 G00 X100 Z100 ;
N80 T0100 M09 ;
N90 M05 ;
N100 M30 ;

Fig3.8.3 Usage of G90

Example: Use G90 to Process Taper Surface
N10 M03 S1000 ;
N20 T0101 ;
N30 G00 X65 Z5 ;
N50 G96 S120 ;
N60 G99 G01 Z2 F1 M08 ;
N70 G90 X60 Z-35 R-5 F0.2 ;
N80 X50 ;
N90 G00 G98 X100 Z100 M09 ;
N100 G97 S1000 T0100 ;
N110 M05 ;
N120 M30 ;

Fig3.8.4 Usage of G90

- 32 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.8.2 Thread Cutting Cycle (G92)

Tool infeed in radial(X axis) direction and cuts in axial(Z axis or X, Z axis) direction from
starting point of cutting to realize straight thread, taper thread cutting cycle with constant thread
pitch. Thread run-out in G92: at the fixed distance from end point of thread cutting, the tool
executes thread interpolation in Z direction and retracts with exponential or linear acceleration in X
direction, and retracts at rapidly traverse speed in X direction after it reaches to end point of cutting
in Z direction.
(1) Straight Thread Cutting: G92 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F/I_ ;
X: absolute coordinate of end point of cutting in X direction, unit:mm;
U: different value of absolute coordinate from end point to starting point of cutting in X
direction, unit:mm;
Z: absolute coordinate of end point of cutting in Z direction, unit:mm;
W: different value of absolute coordinate from end point to starting point of cutting in X
direction, unit:mm;
F=0.001~1000 mm, metric thread pitch. After F value is executed, it is reserved and can be
omitted; I=0.1~99 toots/inch, metric thread teeth per inch.

Fig3.8.5 Straight Thread Cutting

In incremental programming, the sign of numbers following addresses U and W depends on
the direction of paths 1 and 2. That is , if the direction of path 1 is the negative along the X axis, the
value of U is negative. The range of thread leads, limitation of spindle speed, etc. are the same as in
G32 (thread cutting).

- 33 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Program:
N10 M03 S1000;
N20 T0101;
N30 G00 X45 Z5;
N40 G92 X29.2 Z-45 F1.5;
N50 X28.6;
N60 X28.2;
N70 X28.04;
N80 G00 X100 Z50;
N90 T0100 M05;
N100 M30;
Fig3.8.6 Example of Straight Thread Cutting
(2)Taper Thread Cutting : G92 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ F/I_ ;
R: different value(R value) of absolute coordinate from end point to starting point of cutting
in X direction. unit:mm.

Program:
N10 M03 S1000;
Fig3.8.7 Taper Thread Cutting N20 T0101;
Example: Process of taper screw of inner hole, N30 G00 X55 Z10;
pitch is 11 tooth/inch,(coning is 1:32) N40 G01 X60 Z5 F100;
N50 G90 X66.25 Z-60 R1.875;
N60 G92 X66.88 Z-50 R1.4 I11;
N70 X66.9 I11;
N80 X67 I11;
N90 X67.4 I11;
N100 X67.6 I11;
N110 X67.8 I11;
N120 G00 X100 Z50;
N130 T0100 M05;
Fig3.8.8 Example of Taper Thread Cutting N140 M30;
- 34 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Note:
1.When processing inch thread, pitch I is non-mode,just be effective in one sentence, so every segments
should plus I in thread cycle.
2.Speed of processing thread ,which should be less than 3000mm/min, is Pitch (F) multi Speed of
spindle (S).
3.The retract speed of X axis ,which should be less than 5000mm/min, is F*S*P24 (Speed
parameter)*0.1 . Eg.:When processing F2, S1200,this value of P24 parameter should be less than 20.
(3) Deceleration or acceleration control in thread cutting cycle:
At the end of thread, because of the index of deceleration control,cause the distance of pitch is
inhomogeneous,the higher speed of spindle the longer of inhomogeneous pitch. To reduce the
error,should reduce the index of deceleration or acceleration time, but it will cause the motor stuck
if match the step motor. In order to solve this problem:
● could choose Z axis according to linear acceleration or deceleration speed constant;
● could choose the X axis with the rapid speed G00 to back tail.
The relevant parameter is as follows (see the chapter 6 Parameter List):
In Speed parameter
P22: the acceleration or deceleration constant of Z axis in thread processing
P23: the acceleration or deceleration constant of Y axis in thread processing
P24: The backing tail speed rate of servo motor in thread cycle
P25: The starting speed of servo motor in thread cycle
P26: The maximum backing tail speed of servo motor in thread cycle
(4) Multi Thread Cutting : G92 X_ Z_ F_ L_ [or SP];
L_: Multi threads: 1~100 and it is modal parameter. ( the system defaults it is single thread
when L is omitted); repeat times of G92 is L.
SP_: Initial angle(offset angle)between spindle rotation one rev and starting point of thread
cutting: 0~360000(unit: 0.001 degree). SP is non-modal parameter, must be defined every time,
otherwise it is 0°.
Note: Cannot use SP to specify when processing multi threads.
Such as: L03, 3 threads, continuous executing 3 times G92. First time,processing at once when
spindle rotate one rev; Second time,after offset of 120 degrees ,begin cutting thread; Third time,
after 240º offset, begin cutting thread,
Example:
G92 X50.Z-100 F5 L5 ; at X50, process 5 threads.
X48.5 ; at X48.5, processing 5 threads.
X45 ; at X45, processing 5 threads.
G00 X100 Z100 ;
......
(5) Back Tail of Thread : G92 X_ Z_ F/I_ P_;
P: volume of backing tail: the default value of P could be set by P20 in User parameter (Default
when powering on).
Set unit: P1 means 0.1 pitch ; P10 means 1 pitch .
Scope: 1--225, when the set value beyond to the range is invalid.
(6) Back tail at any angle
When cutting thread without backing fuller, the system must have the function of automatic

- 35 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

backing tail in thread processing to produce a qualified section of thread. Including the program
format of backing tail in thread:
G92 X_ Z_ F_ J_ K_P_;
● J, K set the ratio of back tail X, Z. When J2 K1, X is twice faster than Z.
● P: back tail volume. Setting: 0.1 pitch. Set range: 1~255 (beyond to this range is invalid). The
default value can be set by No.20 parameter in process parameter (Default when powering on).
● J, K, P are mode value.
● When executing J0 or K0 in G92, cancel any angle specify, fixed 45 degrees.The default value is
45 degrees when powering on.
● When J K are set to be negative number, or beyond to 65535,it's invalid setting. The range:
1~65535.
(7) Path of G92 Instruction
Relative position between thread cutting end point and starting point with U, W, R and tool path
and thread run-out direction with different U, W, R signs.
1) U>0 , W>0 , R>0 2) U<0 , W<0 , R<0

3) U>0 , W>0 , R<0 & |R| ≤ |U/2| 4) U<0 , W>0 , R>0 & |R| ≤ |U/2|

3.8.3 Canned Tapping Cycle (G93)

Tool path is from starting point to end point and then from end point to starting point. The tool
traverses one pitch when the spindle rotates one rev, the pitch is consistent with pitch of tool and
there is spiral grooving in internal hole of workpiece and the internal machining can be
completed one time.
Canned Tapping Cycle in Z direction Format: G93 Z(W)_ F/I_ ;
Z(W): starting point and end point in Z direction are the same one not to execute the thread
cutting when Z or W is not input;

- 36 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

G93 is modal instruction.

F: metric thread pitch
I: teeth per inch thread
Tapping has two kinds of method:
1 Tracking the spindle encoder: In Axis parameter: P411=0
Note: spindle must fix with spindle encoder(CN9 plug is connected to Sp-encoder).
2 Interpolation between spindle servo & Z axis: In Axis Parameter: P405=0, P410=92,
P411=4.
Cycle process:
1) Tool infeed in Z negative direction ;
2) Stop spindle (output M05 signal) after the tool reaches the specified end point in Z direction in
programming ;
3) Test spindle after completely stopping ;
4) Spindle rotation with reverse direction automatically ;
5) The tool retracts to starting point in Z direction ;
6) Stop spindle (output M05 signal) ;
7) Spindle recover rotation as before G93.
Example: Tapping M10 * 1.5

Fig3.8.9 Example of Canned Tapping Cycle

Program: O0011
G00 Z90 X0 M03 ;
G93 Z50 F1.5 ;
M03
G00 X60 Z100
M30
Example2:
G93 Z-100 F5 ; tapping cycle to Z-100;
Z-101 ; tapping cycle to Z-101;
G00 X50 ; G00
Solution of Canned Tapping Cycle in X direction:
1) P41 in Speed parameter : "compensation mode of arc reverse backlash " , set to 2 , canned
tapping cycle in X direction ;
2) Add G19 into this segment when tapping in X direction ; Add G17 into this segment when
tapping in Z axis ; Add G18 into next segment after finish tapping.

- 37 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Example:
G93 G19 X-100 F2 ; Canned Tapping Cycle in X direction
G93 G17 Z-100 F2 ; Canned Tapping Cycle in Z direction
G18 G0 X30 ; Cancel Canned Tapping Cycle
Note:
1. If execute G93 after Z moving in positive direction,due to opposite direction, system will make reverse
backlash compensation firstly. We should set P13, reverse backlash parameter in Axis parameter . If
configured with stepper motor & stuck , we could set the smaller speed value of reverse backlash
compensation , also P41-1 & P41-2. Or input the instruction that let Z axis moves with negative direction
before executing G93.
2. The parameters of spindle breaking time will affect the start rotating time after stop. Please pay attention
to setting these parameters
3. Z-axis must move in negative direction when tapping.
4. Must start spindle rotating before executing G93.
5. The breaking time of spindle should be short.
6. The rotating speed of spindle should be not too high.
7. For specifying inch thread when specifying I is the same as G32 & G92.
8. When choosing the acceleration and deceleration control mode, if the spindle speed change, there is some
delay when making the thread change. So choose the non-speed up or down if require the accuracy.
However, configured with stepper motor, the speed of spindle cannot be too high, otherwise it will cause
the stuck.

3.8.4 End Face Turning Cycle G94

From starting point, the cutting cycle of cylindrical surface or taper surface is completed by
radial feeding(X axis) and axial(Z axis or X and Z) cutting.
a) Face Cutting Cycle : G94 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ ;
X: absolute coordinates of end point of cutting in X direction Unit:mm;
U: different value of absolute coordinates from end point to starting point of cutting in X direction,
Unit:mm;
Z: absolute coordinates of end point of cutting in Z direction, Unit:mm;
W: different value of absolute coordinates from end point to starting point of cutting in X
direction, Unit:mm;

Fig3.8.10 End face loop cutting

- 38 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

In incremental programming, the sign of numbers following addresses U and W depends on the
direction of paths 1 and 2. That is, if the direction of the path is in the negative direction of the Z
axis, the value of W is negative.
In single block mode, operations 1, 2, 3, and 4 are performed by pressing the cycle start button
once.
Example: Program:
N10 M03 S1000;
N20 T0101;
N30 G00 X85 Z10 M08;
N40 G01 Z5 F200;
N50 G94 X30 Z-5 F100;
N60 Z－10;
N70 Z－15;
N80 G00 X100 Z60 M09;
N90 T0100 M05;
Fig3.8.11 Usage of G94 N100 M30;
b)Taper Face Cutting Cycle : G94 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_;
R_: different value(R value) of absolute coordinates from end point to starting point of cutting
in X direction. When the sign of R is not the same that of U, R.

Fig3.8.12 Taper Face Cutting Cycle

c) Signs of numbers specified in the taper cutting cycle
In incremental programming, the relationship between the signs of the numbers following
address U, W, and R, and the tool paths are as follows:
1. U<0 , W<0 , R<0 2. U>0 , W<0 , R

- 39 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3. U<0 , W<0 , R>0 at |R| ≤ |W| 4. U>0 , W<0 , R<0 at |R| ≤ |W|

d) Process of Cycle
1) The tool rapidly traverses from starting point to cutting starting point in Z direction;
2) Cutting feed (linear interpolation) from the cutting starting point to cutting end point;
3) Retract the tool at the cutting feedrate in Z direction (opposite direction to the
above-mentioned 1), and return to the position which the absolute coordinates and the starting
point are the same;
4) The tool rapidly traverses to return to the starting point and the cycle is completed.
e) Example of Taper Face Cutting Cycle
Program
……
N40 G01 X55 Z2 F200;
N50 G94 X20 Z0 R-5 F100;
N60 Z-5;
N70 Z-10;
N80 G00 X Z;
……
(R in N50 program:
R-5=-15-(-10)=-5mm)

Fig3.8.13 Example of Taper Face Cutting Cycle

Note:
1. Since data values of X (U), Z (W) and R during canned cycle are modal, if X (U), Z (W), or R is not
newly commanded, the previously specified data is effective , except that lead I in Inch thread processing.
Thus, when the Z axis movement amount does not vary as in the example below, a canned cycle can be
repeated only by specifying the movement commands for the X–axis.
However, these data are cleared, if a one–shot G code expect for G04 (dwell) or a G code in the group 01
except for G90, G92, G94 is commanded.
2. The following two applications can be performed.
(1) If an EOB(;) or zero movement commands are specified for the block following that specified with a
canned cycle, the same canned cycle is repeated.
(2) Only use "Start" button to run program when input codes in MDI
(3) If the M, S, T function is commanded during the canned cycle mode, both the canned cycle and M, S,
or T function can be performed simultaneously. If this is inconvenient, cancel the canned cycle once as in the
program examples below (specify G00 or G01) and execute the M, S, or T command. After the execution of M,
S, or T terminates, command the canned cycle again.
- 40 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Example1:

The Cycle in the above figure is executed by the following program.

N030 G90 U-8 .0 W-66.0 F0.4 ;
N031 U-16.0 ;
N032 U-24.0 ;
N033 U-32.0 ;
Example2:
N003 T0101 ;
...
N010 G90 X20.0 Z10.0 F0.2
N011 G00 T0202
N012 G90 X20.5 Z10.0
3.8.5 Usage for Canned Cycle
An appropriate canned cycle is selected according to the shape of the material and the shape of
the product.
1) Straight Cutting Cycle (G90):

2) Taper Cutting Cycle (G90):

- 41 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3) Face Cutting Cycle (G94):

4) Taper Face Cutting Cycle (G94):

3.9 Multiple Repetitive Cycle Instructions(G70~G76)

Several types of canned cycles are provided to make programming easier. For instance, the data
of the finish work shape describes the tool path for rough machining. And also, a canned cycles for
the thread cutting is available.
Multiple cycle instructions of the system includes: Axial roughing turning cycle G71, Radial
roughing facing cycle G72, Pattern Repeating Cycle G73, Finishing cycle G70, End face peck
drilling cycle G74, Outer/Internal diameter grooving cycle G75 and Multiple thread cutting cycle
G76.
When the system executes these instructions, it automatically counts the cutting times and the
cutting path according to the programmed path, travels of tool infeed and tool retraction, executes
multiple machining cycle (tool infeed → cutting → retract tool → tool infeed), automatically
completes the roughing, finishing workpiece and the starting point and the end point of instruction
are the same one.
3.9.1 Axial Roughing Turning Cycle (G71)
According to the finishing path, the finishing allowance, the path of tool infeed and tool retract,
the system automatically counts the path of roughing，the tool cuts the workpiece in paralleling
with Z axis, and the roughing is completed by multiple executing the cutting cycle tool infeed →
cutting→tool retraction. The starting point and the end point are the same one. The instruction is

- 42 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

applied to the formed roughing of non-formed rod.

Format: G71 U(△d) R(e);
G71 P(ns) Q(nf) U(△u) W(△w) F(f) S(s) T(t) ;
N(ns) ...... ;
......
F___ The move command between A and B is
S___ specified in the block from sequence
T___ number ns to nf .
N(nf) ...... ;
△d: Depth of cut (radius designation)
Designate without sign. The cutting direction depends on the direction AA’. This designation
is modal and is not changed until the other value is designated. Also this value can be specified by
the parameter (P1 in User parameter), and the parameter is changed by the program command.
e : Escaping amount
This designation is modal and is not changed until the other value is designated. Also this
value can be specified by the parameter (P2 in User parameter), and the parameter is changed by
the program command.
ns : Sequence number of the first block for the program of finishing shape.
nf : Sequence number of the last block for the program of finishing shape.
△u: Distance and direction of finishing allowance in X direction (diameter designation).
Also this value can be specified by the parameter (P4 in User parameter). Input negative number
when processing inner hole.
△w: Distance and direction of finishing allowance in Z direction. Also this value can be
specified by the parameter (P5 in User parameter).
F: Feedrate; S: Spindle speed; T: Tool number, tool offset number.
f,s,t : Any F , S, or T function contained in blocks ns to nf in the cycle is ignored, and the F, S,
or T function in this G71 block is effective.
If a finished shape of A to A’ to B is given by a program as in the figure below, the specified
area is removed by Δd (depth of cut), with finishing allowance Δu/2 and Δw left.

Fig3.9.1 Cutting Path in Axial Roughing Turning Cycle

Execution process:(reference as Fig3.9.1)
1 Rapid traverse from A point to A’ point , the travel in X direction is Δu, and the travel in
Z direction is Δw;
2 The travel in X direction from A’ point is Δd( tool infeed), ns block is for tool infeed at

- 43 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

rapid traverse speed with G0, is for tool infeed at feedrate F with G71, and its direction of tool
infeed is that of A→ C point;
3 Cutting feeds to the roughing path in Z direction, and its direction is the same that of
coordinates in Z direction C→B point;
4 The travel of tool retraction is e (45°straight line)at feedrate in X, Z direction, the
directions of tool retraction is opposite to that of too infeed;
5 Rapid retract at rapid traverse speed in Z direction to the position which is the same that
of the coordinates in Z direction of A’ -C’ point;
6 After executing the tool infeed (Δd+e)again in X direction, the end point of traversing
tool is still on the middle point of straight line between A’ and C’(the tool does not reach or exceed
C’), and after executing the tool infeed (Δd+e)again, execute ③;after executing the tool infeed
(Δd+e)again, the end point of tool traversing reaches C’ point or exceeds the straight line between
A’ →C’ point and execute the tool infeed to C’ point in X direction and the execute the next step;
7 Cutting feed from C’ to B’ point along the roughing path;
8 Rapid traverse to B’ from A point and the program jumps to the next clock following nf
block after G71 cycle is ended.
Note:
1. G71 in the use of rough machining cycle,The cycle machining is performed by G71 command with P
and Q specification. F, S, and T functions which are specified in the move command between points A and B
are ineffective and those specified in G71 block or the previous block are effective. But F S T in program of
ns→nf is effectively to fine machining , invalid in rough machining cycle.
2. The tool path between A’ and B must be steadily increasing or decreasing pattern in both X and Z axis.
When the tool path between A and A’ is programmed by G00/G01, cutting along AA’ is performed in G00/G01
mode respectively.
3. When the constant surface speed control function is enabled, G96 or G97 command specified in the
move command between points A and B are ineffective, and that specified in G71 block or the previous block
is effective.
4. The tool path between A and A’ is specified in the block with sequence number "ns" including G00 or
G01, and in this block, a move command in the Z axis cannot be specified.
5. The subprogram cannot be called from the block between sequence number "ns" and "nf".
6. The following four cutting patterns are considered in G71 instruction. All of these cutting cycles are
made paralleled to Z axis and the sign of Δu and Δw are as follows:

Fig3.9.2 Sign of Δu and Δw in G71

- 44 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.9.2 Radial Roughing Facing Cycle (G72)

As shown in the figure below, this cycle is the same as G71 except that cutting is made by a
operation parallel to X axis.
According to the finishing path, the finishing allowance, the path of tool infeed and retract
tool, the system automatically counts the path of roughing, the tool cuts the workpiece in
paralleling with Z axis, and the roughing is completed by multiple executing the cutting cycle tool
infeed→cutting feed→tool retraction. The starting point and the end point of G72 are the same one.
The instruction is applied to the formed roughing of non-formed rod.
Format: G72 W(△d) R(e) ;
G72 P(ns) Q(ns) U(△u) W(△w) F(f) S(s) T(t) ;
N(ns) ...... ;
......
F___ The move command between A and B is
S___ specified in the block from sequence
T___ number ns to nf .
N(nf) ...... ;
The meanings of △d、e、ns、nf、△u、△w、f、s、t are same as those in G71.

Fig3.9.3 Cutting Path in Radial Roughing Facing Cycle

Execution Process: (reference as Fig3.9.3)
1 Rapid traverse from A point to A’ point, the travel in X direction is Δu, and the travel in
Z direction is Δw;
2 The travel in Z direction from A’ is Δd( tool infeed), ns block is for tool infeed at rapid
traverse speed with G0, is for tool infeed at G72feedrate F in G1, and its direction of tool infeed is
that of A→C point;
3 Cutting feeds to the roughing path in X direction, and its direction is the same that of
coordinates in X direction C→B point;
4 The travel of tool retraction is e (45º straight line)at feedrate in X, Z direction, the
directions of tool retraction is opposite to that of tool infeed ;

- 45 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

5 Rapidly retract at rapid traverse speed in X direction to the position which is the same
that of the coordinates in Z direction ;
6 After executing the tool infeed (Δd+e)again in Z direction, the end point of traversing
tool is still on the middle point of straight line between A’ and C’(the tool does not reach or exceed
C’), and after executing the tool infeed (Δd+e)again, execute ③; after executing the tool infeed
(Δd+e)again, the end point of tool traversing reaches C’ point or exceeds the straight line between
A’→C’ point and
execute the tool infeed to C’ point in Z direction and the execute the next step;
7 Cutting feed from C’ to B’ point along the roughing path;
8 Rapidly traverse from B’ to A point and the program jumps to the next clock following nf
block after G71 cycle is completed.
Use G72 to cut the shape, there are four situation. No matter what kind of is the tool parallel
the X axis to cut again. △ u, △ w symbols are as follow

Fig3.9.4 Signs of numbers specified with u and W in G72

The tool path between A and C is specified in the block with sequence number "ns" including
G00 or G01, and in this block, a move command in the X axis cannot be specified. The tool path
between C and B must be steadily increasing and decreasing pattern in both X and Z axes. Whether
the cutting along AC is G00 or G01 mode is determined by the command between A and C.

3.9.3 Pattern Repeating Cycle (G73)

This function permits cutting a fixed pattern repeatedly, with a pattern being displaced bit by
bit. By this cutting cycle, it is possible to efficiently cut work whose rough shape has already been
made by a rough machining, forging or casting method,etc.The pattern commanded in the program
should be as follows:A→A’→B.

Fig3.9.5 Cutting Path in Pattern Repeating Cycle

- 46 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Format: G73 U(△i) W(△k) R(d) ;

G73 P(ns) Q (nf) U(△u) W(△w) F(f) S(s) T(t) ;
N(ns) …… ;
…… ;
F_ The move command between A and B is
S_ specified in the blocks from sequence
T_ number ns to nf.
N(nf) ……;
△i: Distance and direction of relief in the X axis direction (Radius designation).
This designation is modal and is not changed until the other value is designated. Also this
value can be specified by P7 in User parameter, and the parameter is changed by the program
command.
△k: Distance and direction of relief in the Z axis direction.
This designation is modal and is not changed until the other value is designated. Also this
value can be specified by P8 in User parameter, and the parameter is changed by the program
command.
d: The number of division.
This value is the same as the repetitive count for rough cutting. This designation is modal and is
not changed until the other value is designated. Also, this value can be specified by P6 in User
parameter, and the parameter is changed by the program command.
ns : Sequence number of the first block for the program of finishing shape.
nf : Sequence number of the last block for the program of finishing shape.
u : Distance and direction of finishing allowance in X direction (diameter/radius designation)
w : Distance and direction of finishing allowance in Z direction
f,s,t : Any F, S, and T function contained in the blocks between sequence number "ns" and "nf"
are ignored, and the F, S, and T functions in this G73 block are effective. Others is same as G71.
Note: 1. The cycle is according to the program which is between P and Q in G73.The tool backs to A point
automatically after finish cycle.
2. Increase or decrease X or Z axis is invalid when using G73.
3. While the values Δi and Δk, or Δu and Δw are specified by address U and W respectively, the
meanings of them are determined by the presence of addresses P and Q in G73 block. When P and Q are not
specified in a same block, addresses U and W indicates Δi and Δk respectively. When P and Q are specified
in a same block, address U and W indicates Δu and Δw respectively.
4. The cycle machining is performed by G73 command with P and Q specification.The four cutting patterns
are considered. Take care of the sign of Δu, Δw, Δk, and Δi.When the machining cycle is terminated, the
tool returns to point A.
1) Δi<0 Δk>0 , △u<0 Δw>0 ; 2) Δi>0 Δk>0 , △u>0 Δw>0 ;

- 47 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3) Δi<0 Δk<0 , △u<0 Δw<0 ; 4) Δi>0 Δk<0 , △u>0 Δw<0 ;

3.9.4 Finishing Cycle (G70)

After rough cutting by G71, G72 or G73, the following command permits finishing.
Format: G70 P(ns) Q(nf) ;
(ns) : Sequence number of the first block for the program of finishing shape.
(nf) : Sequence number of the last block for the program of finishing shape.
Note:
1 F, S, and T functions specified in the block G71, G72, G73 are not effective but those specified between
sequence numbers "ns" and "nf" are effective in G70.
2 When the cycle machining by G70 is terminated, the tool is returned to the start point and the next block
is read.
3 In blocks between "ns" and "nf" referred in G70 through G73, the subprogram cannot be called.

3.9.5 Usages of G71,G72,G73 & G70

3.9.5.1 Example of G71&G70
N10 M03 S1500;
N20 T0101;
N30 G00 X160 Z10;
N40 G71 U2 R1;
N50 G71 P60 Q120 U2 W1 F100 S2000
N60 G00 X40;
N70 G01 Z-30 F80;
N80 X60 W-30;
N90 W-20;
N100 X100 W-10;
N110 W-20;
N120 X140 W-20;
N130 G70 P60 Q120;
N140 G00 X200 Z50;
N150 T0100 M05;
Fig3.9.6 Using of G71&G70 N160 M30 ;

- 48 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.9.5.2 Example of G72 & G70

N10 M03 S2000;
N20 T0202;
N30 G00 X176 Z2;
N40 G72 W2 R1;
N50 G72 P60 Q120 U2 W1 F100 ;
N60 G00 Z-72;
N70 G01 X160 Z-70 F80;
N80 X120 W10;
N90 W10;
N100 X80 W10;
N110 W20;
N120 X36 W22.08;
N130 G70 P60 Q120;
N140 G00 X200 Z50;
N150 T0200 M05;
N160 M30;
Fig3.9.7 Using of G72&G70

(Diameter designation, metric input)

N010 G50 X220.0 Z190.0 ;
N011 G00 X176.0 Z132.0 ;
N012 G72 W7.0 R1.0 ;
N013 G72 P014 Q019 U4.0 W2.0
F0.3 S550 ;
N014 G00 Z58.0 S700 ;
N015 G01 X120.0 W12.0 F0.15 ;
N016 W10.0 ;
N017 X80.0 W10.0 ;
N018 W20.0 ;
N019 X36.0 W22.0 ;
Fig3.9.8 Using of G72&G70 N020 G70 P014 Q019 ;

3.9.5.3 Example of G73&G70 N10 M03 S3000;

N20 T0303;
N30 G00 X220 Z40;
N40 G73 U14 W14 R0.010;
N50 G73 P60 Q110 U４ W2 F100;
N60 G00 X80 Z2;
N70 G01 Z-20 F80;
N80 X120 W-10;
N90 W-20;
N100 G02 X160 W-20 R20;
N110 G01 X180 W-10;
Fig3.9.9 Using of G73&G70 N120 G70 P60 Q110;
N130 G00 X250 Z50;
- 49 - N140 T0300 M05;
N150 M30;
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

(b)

(Diameter designation, metric

input)
N010 G50 X260.0 Z220.0;
N011 G00 X220.0 Z160.0 ;
N012 G73 U14.0 W14.0 R3 ;
N013 G73 P014 Q019 U4.0
W2.0 F0.3 S0180 ;
N014 G00 X80.0 W–40.0 ;
N015 G01 W–20.0 F0.15
S0600 ;
N017 W–20.0 S0400 ;
N018 G02 X160.0 W–20.0
R20.0;
N019 G01 X180.0 W–10.0
S280;
Fig3.9.10 Using of G73 & G70 N020 G70 P014 Q019 ;

3.9.6 End Face Peck Drilling Cycle (G74)

The following program generates the cutting path shown in Fig3.9.11. Chip breaking is
possible in this cycle as shown below. If X (U) and Pare omitted, operation only in the Z axis
results, to be used for drilling.

Fig3.9.11 Cutting Path in End Face Peck Drilling Cycle

Format: G74 R(e) ;
G74 X(u) P(△i) Z(w) Q(△k) R(△d) F(f) ;
e: Return amount;
This designation is modal and is not changed until the other value is designated. Also this
value can be specified by P10 in User parameter, and the parameter is changed by the program
command.

- 50 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

X : X component of point B
U : Incremental amount from A to B
Z : Z component of point C
W : Increment amount from A to C
Δi : Movement amount in X direction (without sign).
Δk : Depth of cut in Z direction (without sign),also can be set by P9 in User parameter. (Unit:
um)
Δd : Relief amount of the tool at the cutting bottom. The sign of Δd is always plus(+). However,
if address X (U) and Δi are omitted, the relief direction can be specified by the desired sign.
f : Feed rate
NOTE
1. While both e and d are specified by address R, the meanings of them are determined by the present of
address X (U). When X(U) is specified, d is used.
2. The cycle machining is performed by G74 command with X(U) specification.
Execution process:(Fig3.9.11)
① Axial (Z axis) cutting feed △k from the starting point of G74, feed in Z negative direction
when the coordinates of cutting end point is less than that of starting point in Z direction, otherwise,
feed in Z positive direction;
②Axial(Z axis) rapid tool retraction e and its direction is opposite to feeding direction;
③ Cutting feed(Δk+e) again in Z direction, the end point of cutting feed is still in it between
starting point An of axial cutting cycle and end point of axial tool infeed, cutting feed (Δk+e)again
in Z direction and execute ②; after cutting feed (Δk+e)again in Z direction, the end point of cutting
feed is on Bn or is not on it between An and Bn cutting feed to Bn in Z direction, then execute ④;
④ Radial(X axis) rapid tool retraction △d（radius value）to Cn , when the coordinates of Bf
(cutting end point) is less than that of A (starting point) in X direction, retract tool in X positive,
otherwise, retract tool in X negative direction;
⑤ Axial(Z axial) rapid retract tool to Dn, No. n axial cutting cycle is completed. If the current
axial cutting cycle is not the last one, execute ⑥ ; if it is the previous one before the last axial
cutting cycle, execute ⑦;
⑥ Radial(X axial)rapid tool infeed, and it direction is opposite to ④ retract tool. If the end point
of tool infeed is still on it between A and Af (starting point of last axial cutting cycle) after tool
infeed(△d+△i) (radius value) in X direction, i.e. n→An+1 and then execute ① (start the next
axial cutting cycle); if the end point of tool infeed is not on it between Dn and Af after tool infeed
(△d+△i) (radius value) in X direction, rapidly traverse to Af and execute ① to start the first axial
cutting cycle;
⑦ Rapidly traverse to return to A in X direction, and G74 is completed.
Example:
N10 G00 X0 Z10;
N20 G74 R2;
N30 G74 Z-80 Q10000
F800;
N40 G00 X50 Z50;
N50 M30;
Fig3.9.12 Example of G74

- 51 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.9.7 Outer Diameter/Internal Diameter Drilling Cycle (G75)

The following program generates the cutting path shown in Fig3.9.13.
This is equivalent to G74 except that X is replaced by Z. Chip breaking is possible in this
cycle, and grooving in X axis and peck drilling in X axis (in this case, Z, W, and Q are omitted) are
possible.

Fig3.9.13 Cutting Path in Outer/Internal Diameter Drilling Cycle

Format: G75 R(e) ;

G75 X(U) P(Δi) Z(w) Q(△k) R(Δd) F(f) ;

X : X component of point B
U : Incremental amount from A to B
Z : Z component of point C
W : Increment amount from A to C

Δi : Movement amount in X direction (without sign),also can be set by P9 in User parameter.

(Unit: um)
Δk : Depth of cut in Z direction (without sign),
Δd : Relief amount of the tool at the cutting bottom. The sign of Δd is always plus(+). However,
if address X (U) and Δi are omitted, the relief direction can be specified by the desired sign.
f : Feed rate
Both G74 and G75 are used for grooving and drilling, and permit the tool to relief
automatically. Four symmetrical patterns are considered,respectively.
Execution process:(Fig3.9.14)
① Radial (X axis) cutting feed △i from the starting point of radial cutting cycle, feed in X
negative direction when the coordinates of cutting end point is less than that of starting point in X
direction,otherwise, feed in X positive direction;
② Radial(X axis) rapid tool retraction e and its direction is opposite to the feed direction of
①;
③ Cutting feed(Δk+e) again in X direction, the end point of cutting feed is still in it between
starting point An of radial cutting cycle and end point of radial tool infeed, cutting feed ( Δ
i+e)again in X direction and execute ② ; after cutting feed ( Δ i+e)again in X direction, the end
point of cutting feed is on Bn or is not on it between An and Bn cutting feed to Bn in X direction
and then execute ④ ;
④ Axial(Z axis) rapid tool retraction △d（radius value）to Cn , when the coordinates of Bf
(cutting end point) is less than that of A (starting point) in Z direction, retract tool in Z positive,
otherwise, retract tool in Z negative direction;
⑤ Radial(Z axis) rapid retract tool to Dn, No. n radial cutting cycle is completed. The current
radial cutting cycle is not the last one, execute ⑥ ; if it is the previous one before the last radial
cutting cycle, execute ⑦;

- 52 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

⑥ Axial(X axis)rapid tool infeed, and it direction is opposite to ④ retract tool. If the end
point of tool infeed is still on it between A and Af (starting point of last radial cutting cycle) after
tool infeed (△d+△k) (radius value) in Z direction, i.e. Dn→An+1 and then execute ① (start the
next radial cutting cycle); if the end point of tool infeed is not on it between Dn and Af after tool
infeed ( △ d+ △ k) in Z direction, rapidly traverse to Af and execute ① to start the first radial
cutting cycle;
⑦ Rapidly traverse to return to A in Z direction, and G75 is completed.
Example:
N10 M03 S1000;
N20 T0101;
N30 G00 X35 Z-50;
N40 G75 R1;
N50 G75 X-1 P5000 F60;
N60 G00 X100 Z50 M09;
N70 M05;
N80 T0100;
N90 M30;

Fig3.9.14 Example of G75

3.9.8 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle (G76)

Fig3.9.15 Details of Cutting

Format: G76 P(b)(c)(m)(r)(a) Q(Δdmin) R(d) ;
G76 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R(i) P(k) Q(Δd) F(I)_ L(L)[or SP];
P actually consists of multiple values which control the thread behavior.
b: 0———Infeed decrements;
1———Equidistant infeed;
2———If the fist feed is too long in digression feed,so divide into two infeed.
c: 0———right enter;
1———left enter;
2———middle enter
3———right and left enter, the first feed is middle.
m: Repetitive count in finishing (1 to 99)
This designation is modal and is not changed until the other value is designated. Also this value
can be specified by P11 in User parameter, and the parameter is changed by the program command.
r: Chamfering amount.

- 53 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

When the thread lead is expressed by L, the value of L can be set from 0.0L to 9.9L in 0.1L
increment (2–digit number from 00 to 90). This designation is modal and is not changed until the
other value is designated. Also this value can be specified by P12 in User parameter, and the
parameter is changed by the program command.
a: Angle of tool tip
One of six kinds of angle, 80°, 60°, 55°, 30°, 29°, and 0°, can be selected,and specified by
2–digit number. This designation is modal and is not changed until the other value is designated.
Also this value can be specified by P13 in User Parameter, and the parameter is changed by the
program command.
b ,c,m, r, and a are specified by address P at the same time.
Example: When b=2, c=3, m=1, r=1.2K, a=60°, specify as shown below (K is lead of thread).
2 3 01 12 60
P , coding instruction is : P23011260
bc m r a
Q(Δdmin): Minimum cutting depth. (specified by the radius value)

When the cutting depth of one cycle operation (Δd* n – Δd* n  1 ) becomes smaller than
this limit, the cutting depth is clamped at this value. This designation is modal and is not changed
until the other value is designated. Also this value can be specified by P14 in User Parameter, and
the parameter is changed by the program command. Unit: um.
R(d): Finishing allowance.
This designation is modal and is not changed until the other value is designated. Also this value
can be specified by P15 in User parameter, and the parameter is changed by the program command.
X: Absolute coordinates (unit: mm) of thread end point in X direction;
U: Different value (unit: mm) of absolute coordinates between thread end point and starting point
in X direction;
Z: Absolute coordinates (unit: mm) of thread end point in Z direction;
W: Different value (unit: mm) of absolute coordinates between thread end point and starting point
in Z direction;
R(i): Difference of thread radius.
If i = 0, ordinary straight thread cutting can be made.
P(k): Height of thread. This value is specified by the radius value.
F: metric thread pitch. (same as G32).0.1~500.000mm.
I: Thread teeth per inch for inch thread. 0.1~99 teeth.
L: multiple thread head numbers.
SP: starting angle: 0-360°, unit is 0.001 degree. No specify means 0 degree.
Δd: Depth of cut in 1st cut (radius value) .Or infeed times.
First cut amount (with G32 threading) in microns; or feed times.
P24 in User parameter is set for meaning of Q (Δd) of G76. [P24 = 8 ,times of roughing infeed ].
When P24 = 8, Q (Δd) means times that needed to complete the roughing cycle, the default is 1;
otherwise Q (Δd) means that depth of cut in 1st cut. Q (Δd) , times of infeed, also there are modes
of equidistant infeed and decrements infeed.
The infeed amount and infeed times of roughing in all case are as follows:

1) b = 0, P24 ≠ 8, every infeed depth: d n ;

- 54 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

2) b = 0, P24 = 8, each infeed depth is: the same way as a) according to Δd calculated
（k  d）
as: n , infeed times is Δd;
d
3) b=1, P24≠8, amount of each infeed:Δd,times of roughing infeed is (k-d)/Δd;
4) b=1, P24=8,the amount of each infeed: (k-d)/Δd,roughing feed times for Δd;
The thread cutting cycle as shown in Fig3.9.16 is programmed by G76 command.

Fig3.9.16 Cutting path in multiple thread cut

Execution process:
① The tool rapidly traverses to B(1st),and the thread cutting depth is △d. The tool only
traverses in X direction when a=0; the tool traverses in X and Z direction and its direction is the
same that of A→D when a≠0；
② The tool cuts threads paralleling with C→D to the intersection of D→E (r≠0: thread
run-out)；
③ The tool rapidly traverses to E point in X direction；
④ The tool rapidly traverses to A point in Z direction and the single roughing cycle is
completed；
⑤ The tool rapidly traverses again to tool infeed to B(nth) ( is the roughing times), the cutting
depth is the bigger value of ( n  △d),( n 1  △d+△dmin) and execute ② if the cutting depth
is less than（k-d）; if the cutting depth is more than or equal to（k-d）, the tool infeed（k-d）to
B((n+1)th) ,and then,execute ⑥ to complete the last thread roughing；
⑥ The tool cuts threads paralleling with C→D to the intersection of D→E (r≠0: thread
run-out)；
⑦ The tool rapidly traverses to E point in X direction；
⑧ The tool rapidly traverses to A point in Z direction and the thread roughing cycle is
completed to execute the finishing；
⑨ After the tool rapidly traverses to B(the cutting depth is k and the cutting travel is d), execute
the thread finishing, at last the tool returns to A point and so the thread finishing cycle is
completed；
⑩ If the finishing cycle times is less than m, execute ⑨ to perform the finishing cycle, the
thread cutting depth is k and the cutting travel is 0; if the finishing cycle times is equal to m, G76
compound thread machining cycle is completed.
Thread Cutting Cycle Retract:
When feed hold is applied during threading in the multiple thread cutting cycle (G76), the tool
quickly retracts in the same way as in chamfering performed at the end of the thread cutting cycle.
The tool goes back to the start point of the cycle. When cycle start is triggered, the multiple thread
- 55 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

cutting cycle resumes.

Note: 1. The meanings of data specified by address P, Q, and R determined by the presence of X(U) and X (W).
2. The cycle machining is performed by G76 command with X (U) and Z (W) specification. By using this
cycle , one edge cutting is performed and the load on the tool tip is reduced.Making the cutting depth d for the
first path, and dn for the nth path, cutting amount per one cycle is held constant.Four symmetrical patterns
are considered corresponding to the sign of each address. The internal thread cutting is available. In the above
figure, the feed rate between C and D is specified by address F, and in the other path, at rapid traverse. The
sign of incremental dimensions for the above figure is as follows:
U, W : minus (determined by the direction of the tool path AC and CD.)
R(i) : minus (determined by the direction of the tool path AC.)
P(k) : plus (always)
Q(△d) : plus (always)
3. Notes on thread cutting are the same as those on G32 thread cutting and G92 thread cutting cycle.
4. The designation of chamfering is also effective for G92 thread cutting cycle.
5. The tool returns to the cycle start point (cutting depth dn) as soon as the feed hold status is entered
during thread cutting. (dn : cutting depth in nth cut)

6. If start point of thread cutting cycle is close to a workpiece, tool may interfere with the workpiece
during retract cycle because of passing along the retract cycle route described at Note 5. Therefore start point
of thread cutting cycle must be at least k(height of thread) away from the top of thread.
7. pay attention to cut thread, use G32 to cut is the same as using G92.
8. specify the chamfering amount of thread, it's also effective to the G92 thread cutting circle.
9. when matching step motor, because of the acceleration or deceleration the thread in tail will be
inhomogeneous. So choose the linear acceleration or deceleration to control X axis with G00 to back tail fast.
Example: Multiple Repetitive Cycle G76

Fig3.9.16 Example of G76

- 56 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.9.9 Notes On Multiple Repetitive Cycle (G70 ~ G76)

1. In the blocks where the multiple repetitive cycle are commanded, the addresses P, Q, X, Z, U,
W, and R should be specified correctly for each block.
2. In the block which is specified by address P of G71, G72 or G73, G00 or G01 group should be
commanded.
3. In MDI mode, G70, G71, G72, or G73 cannot be commanded.G74, G75, and G76 can be
commanded in MDI mode.
4. In the blocks in which G70, G71, G72, or G73 are commanded and between the sequence
number specified by P and Q, M98 (subprogram call) and M99 (subprogram end) cannot be
commanded.
5. In the blocks between the sequence number specified by P and Q, the following commands
cannot be specified.
 One shot G code except for G04 (dwell)
 01 group G code except for G00, G01, G02, and G03
 06 group G code
 M98 / M99
6. While a multiple repetitive cycle (G70~G76) is being executed, it is possible to stop the cycle
and to perform manual operation. But, when the cycle operation is restarted, the tool should be
returned to the position where the cycle operation is stopped. If the cycle operation is restarted
without returning to the stop position, the movement in manual operation is added to the absolute
value, and the tool path is shifted by the movement amount in manual operation.
7. When G70, G71, G72, or G73 is executed, the sequence number specified by address P and Q
should not be specified twice or more in the same program.
8. The blocks between the sequence number specified by P and Q on the multiple repetitive cycle
must not be programmed by using "Direct Drawing Dimensions Programming" or
"Chamfering/Corner R".
9. G74, G75, and G76 also do not support the input of a decimal point for P or Q. The least input
increments are used as the units in which the amount of travel and depth of cut are specified.
10. When #1 = 2500 is executed using a custom macro, 2500.000 is assigned to #1. In such a
case, P#1 is equivalent to P2500.
11. Tool nose radius compensation cannot be applied to G71, G72, G73, G74, G75, or G76.
12. The multiple repetitive cycle cannot be executing during DNC operation.
13. Interruption type custom macro cannot be executed during executing the multiple repetitive
cycle.

- 57 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.10 Skip Function(G31,G311)

Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move following the G31
command, like G01. If an external skip signal is input during the execution of this command,
execution of the command is interrupted and the next block is executed.
The skip function is used when the end of machining is not programmed but specified with a
signal from the machine, for example, in grinding. It is used also for measuring the dimensions of a
workpiece.
For details of how to use this function, refer to the manual supplied by the
machine tool builder.
Format: G31 IP_ P_ ;
G311 IP_ P_ ;
G31&G311 are One-shot G code.(It is effective only in the block in which
it is specified).
IP_: coordinate value ;
P_ : Specify jumping line number & detecting if input point is valid;
P(a)(b)(c)
a: Jumping line number specified by " N**" ;when missed, stop running current line, and
jump to next block and run;
b: 10 or 20 ; 10 means that when input point is valid, skip to specified line, when input point is
invalid, don’t skip, keep on running or alarm hint; 20 means that when input point is invalid, skip
to specified line ; when input point is valid, don’t skip , keep on running or alarm hint;
c: Specify detecting input point. address of input point, X00~X39
P 56 10 24 when Input point X24 is valid, stop running current
a b c line, jump to N56 block and run.
Difference between G31 & G311: When system don’t detect signal of specified input point,
G31 don’t hint alarm & keep on running program; G311 will hint that don’t input is valid & stop
running, after Press "Enter", it will go on run program ;
The coordinate values when the skip signal is turned on can be used in a custom macro
because they are stored in the custom macro system variable as follows:
#5021 : X axis coordinate value
#5022 : Third axis (Cs axis) coordinate value
#5023 : Z axis coordinate value
#5024 : 4th axis (A axis) coordinate value
#5025 : 5th axis (B axis) machine coordinate value

Example: G31 X50 Z100 F100 P331022 ;if X22 is valid then go to N33(line no.).
G311 X50 Z100 F100 P2021 ;if X21 is invalid then go to next line.
If X21 is always valid, CNC will hints alarm.
Note: 1.User can check X00~X39 input points on Input Point of Diagnosis screen.
2.User can use this G31 for scanning function.

- 58 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.11 Block Cycle (G22,G800)

G22 is a program loop instruction, G800 is the end of the cycle instruction. Both must be
paired for parts machining process requires repeated occasions. L is the number of cycles, ranging
from 1-99999. Cycle instructions can be nested.
Format:
G22 L_
.
. Block Cycle
.
G800 ;End
Example:
N0000 M03 M08
N0001 G0 X200 Z200
N0002 G01 W-100 F300
N0003 G22 L6 ; 6 times cycle
N0004 G01 U-22 F100
N0005 W－11 U6
N0006 W-30
N0007 W-10 U5
N0008 G0 U10
N0009 W51
N0010 G800 ;loop end
N0011 G26
N0012 M30

3.12 Return to Starting Point (G26,G261~G264)

These instructions are used for return back to the starting point of the program.Starting point is
coordinate position of N0000 block. The returning speed is same to G00 speed.
Format:
G26 ; All Feeding axes return to starting point.
G261 ; X-axis return to starting point
G262 ; Y(C)-axis return to starting point
G263 ; Z-axis return to starting point
G264 ; A-axis return to starting point
G265 ; B-axis return to starting point
Example: N0000 G00 X120 Z300; Rapid move to surface of workpiece
N0001 G01 X150 Z50 F160; move & feed to point(X150,Z50)
N0002 G26; X & Z-axis return to starting point at same time
N0003 M02; End of program

- 59 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.13 Save Current Position (G25)

G25 is used for memory current coordinate position of all axes(XZYAB), save current
position as specified point.
Format: G25 ; Save current coordinate
3.14 Return to Specified Position (G61,G611~G614)
These instructions are used for return to point specified by G25.
G61 ; all axes return to specified point ;
G611 ; X-axis returns to specified point ;
G612 ; Y(C)-axis returns to specified point ;
G613 ; Z-axis returns to specified point ;
G614 ; A-axis returns to specified point ;
G615 ; B-axis returns to specified point ;
Note: If user don’t use G25 to save current position, CNC will return to starting point as G26.
Example: N0000 G0 X20 Z80 ;
N0001 G01 U5 W－16 F200 ;
N0002 W－100 ;
N0003 G00 U10 ;
N0004 Z80 ;
N0005 G25 ; save current position (X35,Z80)
N0006 G01 U10 W-30 ;
N0007 G0 X100 Z200 ;
N0008 G61 ; return to (X35,Z80)
N0009 M2 ; End of program
3.15 Return to Reference Position (G28)
The reference position is a fixed position on a machine tool to which the tool can easily be
moved by the reference position return function.For example, the reference position is used as a
position at which tools are automatically changed.
Tools are automatically moved to the reference position via an intermediate position along a
specified axis.

Fig3.15.1 Reference Position Return

If there is machine zero point(hardware switch),it is also reference point; when user set float
zero point(software switch) as home and system will take float zero point as reference point.

- 60 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Format: G28 IP_;

IP_:Command specifying the intermediate position of all feeding axes (Absolute/incremental
command)
G281 ; Only X-axis return to reference position
G282 ; Only Y(C)-axis return to reference position,
G283 ; Only Z-axis return to reference position,
G284 ; Only A-axis return to reference position,
G285 ; Only B-axis return to reference position
Reference Position offset of axes to home can be set by parameters.
X-axis offset: P32 in Axis parameters , unit: 0.01mm.
Z-axis offset: P33 in Axis parameters, unit: 0.01mm.
C-axis offset: P116 in Axis parameters, unit: 0.01mm.
A-axis offset: P214 in Axis parameters, unit: 0.01mm.
B-axis offset: P314 in Axis parameters, unit: 0.01mm.
User could return reference point in Manual (Press "Return" key) or in Auto (Use G28
instruction).
Note: 1.M800, C-axis return to zero position(Z0) of spindle encoder(CN9). When C-axis is as rotary axis,
CNC output M75(shift to position mode of spindle servo),M3/M4 will reset M75.
2. M881: Orientation of 1st Spindle axis(C-axis), M882: orientation for 2nd spindle (A-axis)
3. When the G28 instruction is specified when manual return to the reference position has not been
performed after the power has been turned on, the movement from the intermediate point is the same as in
manual return to the reference position.In this case, the tool moves in the direction for reference position
return specified by P28 in Axis parameter. Therefore the specified intermediate position must be a position to
which reference position return is possible.
4. When use G28 instruction to return to reference position, if just specify intermediate position of some
axes, which can return to reference position, the others axes that don’t be specified cannot return to home.
5. Before run these codes, reference position must be set well.
6. After return to reference position, system will cancel tool compensation automatically.

3.16 Coordinate System

By teaching the CNC a desired tool position, the tool can be moved to the position. Such a
tool position is represented by coordinates in a coordinate system. Coordinates are specified using
program axes.

Fig3.16.1 Tool Position Specified by XαZβ

- 61 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

When two program axes, the X–axis and Z–axis, are used, coordinates are specified as follows:
X_Z_
This command is referred to as a dimension word.
Coordinates are specified in one of following three coordinate systems:
(1) Machine coordinate system
(2) Workpiece coordinate system
(3) Local coordinate system
The number of the axes of a coordinate system varies from one machine to another. So, in this
manual, a dimension word is represented as IP_.
3.16.1 Machine Coordinate System (G53)
The point that is specific to a machine and serves as the reference of the machine is referred
to as the machine zero point. A machine tool builder sets a machine zero point for each machine.
A coordinate system with a machine zero point set as its origin is referred to as a machine
coordinate system.
A machine coordinate system is set by performing manual reference position return after
power–on. A machine coordinate system, once set, remains unchanged until the power is turned off.
G53 IP_ ;
IP_ : absolute dimension word
When a position has been specified as a set of machine coordinates, the tool moves to that
position by means of rapid traverse. G53, used for selecting the machine coordinate system, is a
one–shot G code. Any commands based on the selected machine coordinate system are thus
effective only in the block containing G53. The G53 command must be specified using absolute
values. If incremental values are specified, the G53 command is ignored. When the tool is to be
moved to a machine–specific position such as a tool change position, program the movement in a
machine coordinate system based on G53.
Note: 1. When the G53 command is specified, cancel the tool nose radius compensation and tool offset.
2. Since the machine coordinate system must be set before the G53 command is specified, at least one
manual reference position return or automatic reference position return by the G28 command must be
performed after the power is turned on. This is not necessary when an absolute–position detector is attached.
When manual reference position return is performed after power–on, a machine coordinate
system is set so that the reference position is at the coordinate values of (α, β) set by P32 & P33 in
Axis parameter .

3.16.2 Workpiece Coordinate System

A coordinate system used for machining a workpiece is referred to as a workpiece coordinate

- 62 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

system. A workpiece coordinate system is to be set with the NC beforehand (setting a workpiece
coordinate system). A machining program sets a workpiece coordinate system (selecting a
workpiece coordinate system).
A set workpiece coordinate system can be changed by shifting its origin (changing a
workpiece coordinate system).
A workpiece coordinate system can be set using one of three methods:
(1)Method using G50
A workpiece coordinate system is set by specifying a value after G50 in the program.
(2) Automatic setting
A workpiece coordinate system is automatically set when manual reference position return is
performed .
(3) Method of using G54 to G59
Make settings on the MDI panel to preset six workpiece coordinate systems. Then, use
program commands G54 toG59 to select which workpiece coordinate system to use.
When an absolute command is used, a workpiece coordinate system must be established in
any of the ways described above.
3.16.3 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System(G50)
Format: G50 IP_ ;
A workpiece coordinate system is set so that a point on the tool, such as the tool tip, is at
specified coordinates. If IP is an incremental command value, the work coordinate system is
defined so that the current tool position coincides with the result of adding the specified
incremental value to the coordinates of the previous tool position. If a coordinate system is set
using G50 during offset, a coordinate system in which the position before offset matches the
position specified in G50 is set. And after workpiece coordinate system set well, absolute
coordinate position of following commands are based on this coordinate system. Setting solution of
G50 workpiece coordinate system(See Chapter of coordinate system set)
Example1: Example2: Base Point
Setting the coordinate system by the Setting the coordinate system by the
G50X128.7Z375.1; command (Diameter designation) G50X1200.0Z700.0; command (Diameter designation)

Note: In the status of compensation, if use G50 to set the workpiece coordinate system, position before
make tool compensation is based on G50 workpiece coordinate system. Usually cancel the tool compensation
first of all before starting program. After return to reference position, system will cancel tool compensation
automatically.

- 63 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.16.4 Selecting a Workpiece Coordinate System

The user can choose from set workpiece coordinate systems as described below.
(1)G50 or automatic workpiece coordinate system setting
Once a workpiece coordinate system is selected, absolute commands work with the workpiece
coordinate system.
(2)Choosing from six workpiece coordinate systems set in the MDI
By specifying a G code from G54 to G59, one of the workpiece coordinate systems 1 to 6 can
be selected.
(3)Press F7 to select workpiece coordinate system on coordinate screen
G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1
G54.1~G54.48 workpiece coordinate system G54.1~G54.48
G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2
G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3
G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4
G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5
G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6
Workpiece coordinate system 1 to 6 are established after reference position return after the
power is turned on.

Fig3.16.2 Example of Workpiece Coordinate System

3.16.5 Changing Workpiece Coordinate System

The six workpiece coordinate systems specified with G54 to G59 can be changed by changing
an external workpiece zero point offset value or workpiece zero point offset value.
Three methods are available to change an external workpiece zero point offset value or
workpiece zero point offset value.
(1) Set workpiece coordinate system by F8/F7 on main screen
(2) Programming by G50
(3) Using the external data input function
An external workpiece origin offset can be changed by using a signal input to the CNC,also
alter coordinate system in Coor parameter.
Format: Changing by G50 : G50 IP_ ;
By specifying G50IP_;, a workpiece coordinate system (selected with a code from G54 to G59)
is shifted to set a new workpiece coordinate system so that the current tool position matches the
specified coordinates (IP_).

- 64 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

If IP is an incremental command value, the work coordinate system is defined so that the
current tool position coincides with the result of adding the specified incremental value to the
coordinates of the previous tool position. (Coordinate system shift)
Then, the amount of coordinate system shift is added to all the workpiece zero point offset
values. This means that all the workpiece coordinate systems are shifted by the same amount.

Fig3.16.3 Workpiece Zero Point Offset

Examples:

Fig3.16.4 Example1 of Workpiece coordinate System

Fig3.16.5 Example2 of Workpiece Coordinate System

- 65 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.16.6 Workpiece Coordinate System Shift

When the coordinate system actually set by the G50 command or the automatic system setting
deviates from the programmed work system, the set coordinate system can be shifted .
Set the desired shift amount in the work coordinate system shift memory.

Fig3.16.6 Workpiece Coordinate System Shift

3.16.7 Local Coordinate System

When a program is created in a workpiece coordinate system, a child workpiece coordinate
system may be set for easier programming. Such a child coordinate system is referred to as a local
coordinate system.
Format: G52 IP_; Setting the local coordinate system
G52 IP 0 ; Canceling of the local coordinate system
IP_: Origin of the local coordinate system
By specifying G52IP_;, a local coordinate system can be set in all the workpiece coordinate
systems (G54 to G59). The origin of each local coordinate system is set at the position specified by
IP_ in the workpiece coordinate system.
Once a local coordinate system is established, the coordinates in the local coordinate system
are used in an axis shift command. The local coordinate system can be changed by specifying the
G52 command with zero point of a new local coordinate system in workpiece coordinate system.
To cancel local coordinate system and specify coordinate value in workpiece coordinate
system, match the zero point of local coordinate system with that of workpiece coordinate system.

Fig3.16.7 Setting the Local Coordinate System

- 66 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Note:1.The local coordinate system setting does not change the workpiece and machine coordinate systems.
2. When G50 is used to define a work coordinate system, if coordinates are not specified for all axes of a
local coordinate system, the local coordinate system remains unchanged. If coordinates are specified for any
axis of a local coordinate system, the local coordinate system is canceled.
3. G52 cancels the offset temporarily in tool nose radius compensation.
4. Command a move command immediately after the G52 block in the absolute mode.
Example1:

N1 G00 X60 Z20

N2 G52 X0 Z-236
N3 T0101
N4 M03 S800 M08
N5 G01 Z35 F100
N6 X-1
N7 X70
N8 G71 U2 R1
N8 G71 P10 Q15 U0.5 W0.5 F150
N10 G01 X30
N11 X40 Z25
N12 Z20
N13 G02 X50 Z15 R5
N14 G03 X60 Z10 R5
N15 G01 Z0
N16 G00 X70
N17 G52 X0 Z0
N18 M05
N19 M30
Example2:Processing 5pieces same workpieces on one workpiece.
G22 L5
X50 Z60; workpiece
......
G52 W-50; each Z-axis relative offset 50mm
G800
G52 X0 Z0; cancel the local coordinate system
G0 X100 Z100
M02

- 67 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.17 Constant Surface Speed Control (G96/G97)

Specify the surface speed (relative speed between the tool and workpiece) following S. The
spindle is rotated so that the surface speed is constant regardless of the position of the tool.
Format: G96 SOOOO ; Constant surface speed control command
Surface Speed (m/min or feet/min)
G97 SOOOO ; Constant surface speed control cancel command
Spindle Speed (min-1)
G50 S_ ; The maximum spindle speed (min–1) follows S.
G96 (constant surface speed control command) is a modal G code. After a G96 command is
specified, the program enters the constant surface speed control mode (G96 mode) and specified S
values are assumed as a surface speed. A G96 command must specify the axis along which constant
surface speed control is applied. A G97 command cancels the G96 mode.When constant surface
speed control is applied, a spindle speed higher than the value specified in G50S_; (maximum
spindle speed) is clamped at the maximum spindle speed. When the power is turned on, the
maximum spindle speed is not yet set and the speed is not clamped. S (surface speed) commands in
the G96 mode are assumed as S = 0 (the surface speed is 0) until M03 (rotating the spindle in the
positive direction) or M04 (rotating the spindle in the negative direction) appears in the program.
Spindle Speed(min-1)
The spindle speed (min-1) almost
coincides with the surface speed
(m/min) at approx. 160 mm (radius).

Fig3.17.1 Relation between workpiece radius, spindle speed and surface speed
To execute the constant surface speed control, it is necessary to set a workpiece coordinate
system , Z axis, (axis to which the constant surface speed control applies) becomes zero.

Fig3.17.2 Example of the workpiece coordinate system for constant surface speed control
The constant surface speed control is also effective during threading. Accordingly, it is

- 68 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

recommended that the constant surface speed control be invalidated with G97 command before
starting the scroll threading and taper threading, because the response problem in the servo system
may not be considered when the spindle speed changes.
In a rapid traverse block specified by G00, the constant surface speed control is not made by
calculating the surface speed to a transient change of the tool position, but is made by calculating
the surface speed based on the position at the end point of the rapid traverse block, on the condition
that cutting is not executed at rapid traverse.

Example1:
N8 G00 X1000.0Z1400.0 ;
N9 T33;
N11 X400.0Z1050.0;
N12 G50S3000 ;
(Designation of max. spindle speed)
N13 G96S200 ;
(Surface speed 200m/min)
N14 G01 Z 700.0F1000 ;
N15 X600.0Z 400.0;
N16 Z … ;

Fig3.17.3 Example of Constant surface speed Control for G00

The CNC calculates the spindle speed which is proportional to the specified surface speed at
the position of the programmed coordinate value on the X axis. This is not the value calculated
according to the X axis coordinate after offset when offset is valid. At the end point N15 in the
example above, the speed at 600 rpm. (Which is not the turret center but the tool nose) is 200
m/min. If X axis coordinate value is negative, the CNC uses the absolute value.
Press "absolute coordinate" to change the spindle speed in the status of constant linear speed G96.
Note: 1. use constant linear speed, the spindle must be able to change speed automatically. (such as: Servo
Spindle,Inverter Spindle).Max SP-speed is set by parameter.
2. Min SP-speed in condition of G96 can be set by P35 in Speed parameter.
3. Spindle override don't work when processing with constant surface speed.

N1 T0102 X40 Z5
Example2:
N2 M03 S400
N3 G96 S80
N4 G00 X0
N5 G01 Z0 F60
N6 G03 U24 W-24 R15
N7 G02 X26 Z-31 R5
N8 G01 Z-40
N9 X40 Z5
N10 G97 S300
N11 M30
Fig3.17.4 Example2

- 69 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.18 Cutting Feed (G98,G99)

Feedrate of linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03), etc. are commanded
with numbers after the F code.
In cutting feed, the next block is executed so that the feedrate change from the previous block
is minimized.
Two modes of specification are available:
1. Feed per minute (G98) ; After F, specify the amount of feeding per minute.
2. Feed per revolution (G99) ; After F, specify amount of feeding per spindle revolution.
Format: G98 ; Feed per minute instruction
F_; Feedrate command (mm/min or inch/min)
G99 ; Feed per revolution instruction
F_ ; Feedrate command (mm/rev or inch/rev)
Cutting feed is controlled so that the tangential feedrate is always set at a specified feedrate.
After specifying G98 (in the feed per minute mode), the amount of feed of the tool per minute
is to be directly specified by setting a number after F. G98 is a modal code. Once a G98 is specified,
it is valid until G99 (feed per revolution) is specified. At power–on, the feed per revolution mode
is set.

Fig3.18.1 Tangential feedrate (F) Fig3.18.2 Feed Per Minute

After specifying G99 (in the feed per revolution mode), the amount of feed of the tool per
spindle revolution is to be directly specified by setting a number after F. G99 is a modal code. Once
a G99 is specified, it is valid until G98 (feed per minute) is specified.

Fig3.18.2 Feed Per Revolution

Note: 1. When using G99 instruction, Spindle must configured with encoder,otherwise system will stay on.
2.When the speed of the spindle is low, feedrate fluctuation may occur. The slower the spindle rotates, the
more frequently feedrate fluctuation occurs.

3.19 Pole Coordinate Interpolation (G15/G16)

Polar coordinate interpolation is a function that exercises contour control in converting a
command programmed in a Cartesian coordinate system to the movement of a linear axis

- 70 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

(movement of a tool) and the movement of a rotary axis (rotation of a workpiece). This method is
useful in cutting a front surface and grinding a cam shaft on a lathe.
Polar coordinates input directive allows radius and angle in polar coordinates, the angle of the
positive Z direction is counterclockwise turned, while the negative direction is a clockwise turn.
Radius with absolute command value instruction (Z), the angle with absolute command (X).
G16 IP_ ; Starts polar coordinate interpolation mode (enables polar
coordinate interpolation)
... Specify linear or circular interpolation using coordinates
... in a Cartesian coordinate system consisting of a linear
... axis and rotary axis (virtual axis).
G15 ; Polar coordinate interpolation mode is canceled (for
not performing polar coordinate interpolation)
Explanations:
1. Z specify zero as the origin of the polar coordinate system from the point of measuring the
radius of the workpiece coordinate system.
2. IP_: Plane selection & home of polar coordinate system
Z_ : Radius of polar coordinate system
X_ : Angle of polar coordinate system
3. Z set to zero as the origin of the polar coordinate system workpiece coordinate system:
By absolute programming instructions a specified radius (distance between the zero point and
programming). Zero set workpiece coordinate system for the origin of the polar coordinate system
G16 starts the polar coordinate interpolation mode and selects a polar coordinate interpolation
plane(Fig3.19.1).Polar coordinate interpolation is performed on this plane.

Fig3.19.1 Polar Coordinate Interpolation Plane

When the power is turned on or the system is reset, polar coordinate interpolation is canceled
(G15).

Fig3.19.2 Example of Polar coordinate System

Example: N1 G16 X0 Z0 ; setup polar coordinate

- 71 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

N2 G01 X30.0 Z100.0 F200.0

N3 X150.0
N4 X270.0
N5 G15 ；cancel polar coordinate system
N6 M02
3.20 Absolute and Incremental Programming (G990,G991)
There are two ways to command travels of the tool; the absolute command, and the
incremental command. In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end position is
programmed; in the incremental command, move distance of the position itself is programmed.
G90 and G91 are used to command absolute or incremental command, respectively.
Absolute programming or incremental programming is used depending on the command used.
See following tables.
G code System A B or C
Command method Address word G990,G991
G code system A
Absolute command Increment command
X axis move command X U
Z axis move command Z W
C axis move command C V
G code system B or C
Absolute command G990 IP_ ;
Incremental command G991 IP_ ;
Example: Tool movement from point P to point Q (diameter programming is used for the
X-axis)

Fig3.20.1 Example of Absolute and Incremental Programming

G code system A G code system B or C
Absolute command X400.0 Z50.0 G90 X400.0 Z50.0
Incremental command U200.0 W-400.0 G91 X200.0 Z-400.0
Note: 1. Absolute and incremental commands can be used together in a block. In the above example, the
following command can be specified : X400.0 W–400.0 ;
2. When both X and U or W and Z are used together in a block, the one specified later is valid.
3. Incremental commands cannot be used when names of the axes are A and B during G code system A is
selected.

- 72 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.21 Inch/Metric Conversion (G20/G21)

Either inch or metric input can be selected by G code.
Format: G20 ; Inch input
G21 ; mm input
This G code must be specified in an independent block before setting the coordinate system at
the beginning of the program. After the G code for inch/metric conversion is specified, the unit of
input data is switched to the least inch or metric input increment of increment system IS–B or IS
–C. The unit of data input for degrees remains unchanged.
The unit systems for the following values are changed after inch/metric conversion:
 Feedrate commanded by F code
 Positional command
 Work zero point offset value
 Tool compensation value
 Unit of scale for manual pulse generator
 Movement distance in incremental feed
Unit explanations for G20/G21
1.Min unit: 0.0001inch(G20/INCH); 0.001mm(G21/Metric)
2.Command unit of G20/INCH for Position command is inch.
3.Command unit of G20/INCH for Feeding Speed (F) command is inch/min.
4.Unit of G20/INCH for Tool Offset(Redeem)/G54-G59 offset value is inch.
5.Unit of G20/INCH for distance type parameter(like max travel,compensation value,...) will be
to 0.1inch from mm(G21/Metric) ; & change um(G21/Metric) to 0.0001inch(G20/INCH)
6.Unit of G20/INCH for speed type parameters will be to 0.1inch/min from mm/min(Metric).
7.INCH Unit for accelerate type parameters will be 0.1inch/min/s from mm/min/s(Metric)
8.Handwheel Increment(Rate) will be 0.0001inch(*1), 0.001inch(*10), 0.01inch(*100).
9.Pulse equivalent will be changed when G20/INCH,system will adjust automatically.Electric
Ratio is figured out with G21/Metric.
10.Coordinate display of G20/INCH is with 4bits data after dot.
11.Degree unit of G20/INCH is display with 0.1, also 1degree display with 0.1inch.
12.Shift mode between INCH/Metric: run G20/G21 on MDI,reboot CNC.
13. It needs to posit tool again after shift INCH/Metric mode.
When the power is turned on, the G code is the same as that held before the power was turned
off.
Note: 1. G20 and G21 must not be switched during a program.
2. Movement from the intermediate point is the same as that for manual reference position return.The
direction in which the tool moves from the intermediate point is the same as the reference position return
direction.
3. When the least input increment and the least command increment systems are different, the maximum
error is half of the least command increment. This error is not accumulated.
4. The inch and metric input can also be switched using setting of data setting.
5. User can ask SZGH or agent/distributor for parameter display unit on CNC with INCH mode before
order.
6. Suggestion that keep one processing mode(Metric/INCH) on one CNC control system.

- 73 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.22 Dwell (G04)

By specifying a dwell, the execution of the next block is delayed by the specified time.
Format: G04 P_ ; or G04 X_; or G04 U_;
P_: Specify a time (decimal point not permitted) , unit: ms (millisecond)
X_: Specify a time (decimal point permitted) , unit: s (second)
U_: Specify a time (decimal point permitted) , unit: s (second)
Example 1:
G04 X1; delay 1s.
G04 P1000; delay 1s.
G04 U1; delay 1s.
Special application:G04 can be accurate stop instruction, such as processing corner kinds of
workpiece, it appears over cutting sometimes, if use G04 instruction around the corner, it will clear
the over cutting.
Example 2:

Fig3.22.1 Application of Dwell(G04)

Program: ……
N150 G01 X20 Z10 F100;
N160 G04 P150;（Clear the over cutting）
N170 G01 W-10;
……
Note: Set P21 in User parameter, also by setting intervals between blocks of G01/G02/G03 to clear the over
cutting.

3.23 Positioning/Continuous Path Processing(G60/G64)

According to process requirements, user can specify the connection way between program
block by G60/G64.
Format: G60 ; Accurate Positioning Processing
G64 ; Continuous Path Processing
Both G60 and G64 are modal instructions.

- 74 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.24 Workpiece Position and Move Command

In tool nose radius compensation, the position of the workpiece with respect to the tool must
be specified.G40, G41, and, G42 are modal.
G code Workpiece Position Tool Path
G40 (Cancel) Moving along the programmed path
G41 Right side Moving on the left side the programmed path
G42 Left side Moving on the right side the programmed path
The tool is offset to the opposite side of the workpiece.

Fig2.24.1 a Workpiece Position of G41/G42

The workpiece position can be changed by setting the coordinate system as shown below.

Fig3.24.2 b Workpiece Position of G41/G42

When the tool is moving, the tool nose maintains contact with the workpiece.

Fig3.24.3 Tool movement when the workpiece position does not change
- 75 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

The workpiece position against the toll changes at the corner of the programmed path as shown
in the following figure.

Fig3.24.4 Tool movement when the workpiece position changes

Although the workpiece does not exist on the right side of the programmed path in the above
case. the existence of the workpiece is assumed in the movement from A to B. The workpiece
position must not be changed in the block next to the start–up block. In the above example, if the
block specifying motion from A to B were the start–up block, the tool path would not be the same
as the one shown.
The block in which the mode changes to G41 or G42 from G40 is called the start–up block.
G40 _ ;
G41 _ ; (Start-up block)
Transient tool movements for offset are performed in the start–up block. In the block after the
start-up block, the tool nose center is positioned Vertically to the programmed path of that block at
the start position.

Fig3.24.5 Start-Up
The block in which the mode changes to G40 from G41 or G42 is called the offset cancel
block.
G41 _ ;
G40 _ ; (Offset cancel block)
The tool nose center moves to a position vertical to the programmed path in the block before
the cancel block. The tool is positioned at the end position in the offset cancel block (G40) as
shown below.

Fig3.24.6 Offset Cancel

- 76 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

When is specified again in G41/G42 mode , the tool nose center is positioned vertical to the
programmed path of the preceding block at the end position of the preceding block.

Fig3.24.7 Specification of G41/G42 in G41/G42 mode

In the block that first specifies G41/G42, the above positioning of the tool nose center is not
performed.
When you wish to retract the tool in the direction specified by X(U) and Z(W) canceling the
tool nose radius compensation at the end of machining the first block in the figure below, specify
the following :
G40 X(U) _ Z(W) _ I _ K _ ;

Fig3.24.8 Tool movement when the moving direction of the tool in a block
The workpiece position specified by addresses I and K is the same as that in the preceding
block. If I and/or K is specified with G40 in the cancel mode, the I and/or K is ignored.
G40 X_ Z_ I_ K_; Tool nose radius compensation
G40 G02 X_ Z_ I_ K_; Circular interpolation
G40 G01 X_ Z_ ;
G40 G01 X_ Z_ I_ K_ ; Offset cancel mode (I and k are ineffective.)
The numeral s followed I and K should always be specified as radius values.
Example

(G40 mode)
1.G42 G00 X60.0 ;
2.G01 X120.0 W–150.0 F10 ;
3.G40 G00 X300.0 W150.0
I40.0 K–30.0 ;

Fig3.24.9 Example of Tool Nose Radius Compensation

- 77 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Tool nose radius compensation with G90 (outer diameter/internal diameter cutting cycle) or
G94 (end face turning cycle) is as follows, :
1. Motion for imaginary tool nose numbers
For each path in the cycle, the tool nose center path is generally parallel to the programmed
path.

Fig3.24.10 Motion for imaginary tool nose numbers

2. Direction of the offset
The offset direction is indicated in the figure below regardless of the G41/G42 mode.

Fig3.24.11 Direction of the offset

Movement after compensation is shown below.
Tool nose radius compensation when Tool nose radius compensation when a
chamfering is performed corner arc is inserted

3.25 Details of Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G40/G41/G42)

The tool nose radius center offset vector is a two dimensional vector equal
to the offset value specified in a T code, and the is calculated in the CNC.
Its dimension changes block by block according to tool movement. This offset vector (simply
called vector herein after) is internally crated by the control unit as required for proper offsetting
and to calculate a tool path with exact offset (by tool nose radius) from the programmed path.

- 78 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

This vector is deleted by resetting.

The vector always accompanies the tool as the tool advances.
Proper understanding of vector is essential to accurate programming.
Read the description below on how vectors are created carefully.
G40, G41 or G42 is used to delete or generate vectors.
These codes are used together with G00, G02, or G32 to specify a mode for tool motion
(Offsetting).
G code Function Workpiece Position
G40 Tool nose radius compensation cancel Neither
G41 Left offset along tool path Left
G42 Right offset along tool path Right
G41 and G42 specify an off mode, while G40 specifies cancellation of the offset.
The system enters the cancel mode immediately after the power is turned on, when the RESET
button on the MDI is pushed or a program is forced to end by executing M02 or M30. (the system
may not enter the cancel mode depending on the machine tool.) In the cancel mode, the vector is
set to zero, and the path of the center of tool nose coincides with the programmed, path. A program
must end in cancel mode. If it ends in the offset mode, the tool cannot be positioned at the end
point, and the tool stops at a location the vector length away from the end point.
Note: 1. G40/G41/G42 are modal codes, can cancel each other.
2. G41/G42 without parameters, the compensation number (on behalf of the tool tip radius compensation
corresponding values) specified by the T code. Its tip arc offset number and tool offset number corresponding
compensation.Establish and canceled .
3. Tool nose radius compensation with G00 or G01 instruction only, not the G02 or G03.Nose radius
compensation tool compensation interface "radius compensation", the definition of the turning radius;
imaginary tool nose number defines the direction of the tip.
The imaginary tool nose tip number defines the positional relationship between the tool and
cutter tip arc center point, which is from 0-9 ten directions, as shown above.
Note: For the definition of the edge position code "Posit tip" See Chapter 6.8 .

3.26 Tool Nose Radius Compensation of Offset C

C means the system calculates the tool trajectory of radius compensation according to the last
program line and the next program line.
1) Inner side and outer side
When an angle of intersection created by tool paths specified with move commands for two
blocks is over 180º, it is referred to as "inner side." When the angle is between 0º and 180º , it is
referred to as "outer side."

- 79 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

2) Tool Movement in Start-up

When the offset cancel mode is changed to offset mode, the tool moves as illustrated below
(start-up):
(a) Tool movement around an inner side of a corner (α≥180º)
Linear Linear Linear Circular

(b) Tool movement around the outside of a corner at obtuse angle (90≤α＜180)
Linear Linear (B type) Linear Circular (B type)

(c)Tool movement around the outside of an acute angle (α＜90º)

Linear Linear (B type) Linear Circular (B type)

d)Tool movement around the outside linear→linear at an acute angle less than 1 degree ( α
＜1º)

Fig3.26.1 Tool Movement at angle less than 1º

3) Tool Movement in Offset Mode
In the offset mode, the tool moves as illustrated below:
- 80 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

(a)Tool movement around the inside of a corner (180º≤α)

Linear Linear Linear Circular

Circular Linear Circular Circular

(b)Tool movement around the inside (α<1º) with an abnormally long vector, linear →
linear

Fig3.26.2 Tool Movement at angle less than 1º

Also in case of arc to straight line, straight line to arc and arc to arc, the reader should infer in
the same procedure.
(c)Tool movement around the outside corner at an obtuse angle (90≤α＜180º)
Linear Linear Linear Circular

Circular Linear Circular Circular

- 81 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

(d)Tool movement around the outside corner at an acute angle (α＜90º)

Linear Linear Linear Circular

Circular Linear Circular Circular

4) Tool Movement in Offset Mode Cancel

(a) Tool movement around an inside corner (180º≤α)
Linear Linear Linear Circular

(b) Tool Movement around an outside corner at obtuse angle (90≤α＜180º)

Linear Linear(B type) Linear Circular(B type)

(c) Tool Movement around an outside corner at acute angle (α＜90º)

Linear Linear(B type) Circular Linear(B type)

- 82 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

(d) Tool movement around the outside linear→linear at an acute angle less
than 1 degree(α＜1º)

Fig3.26.3 Tool Movement at angle less than 1

5) Change in the offset direction in the offset mode
The offset direction is decided by G codes (G41 and G42) for tool nose radius and the sign of
tool nose radius compensation value as follows.
G Sign of offset + -
code value
G41 Left side offset Right side offset
G42 Right side offset Left side offset
The offset direction can be changed in the offset mode. If the offset direction is changed in a
block, a vector is generated at the intersection of the tool nose radius center path of that block and
the tool nose radius center path of a preceding block. However, the change is not available in the
start-up block and the block following it.
6) A Type of Tool Nose Compensation
Tool Movement in Start-up
(90≤α＜180) (90≤α＜180) (α＜90º) (α＜90º)

Tool Movement in Offset Mode Cancel

(90≤α＜180) (90≤α＜180) (α＜90º) (α＜90º)

P41 in Speed is set for A type , B type and other type for Tool Nose Radius Compensation of
Offset C.
- 83 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.27 Automatic beveling (I) and smoothing(R)

Format:
Automatic Beveling
G01(G00) X(U)_ I_ ;
G01(G00) Z(W)_ Automatic Beveling
G01(G00) Z(W)_ I_;
G01(G00) X(U)_ Automatic Beveling

Automatic Smoothing
G01(G00) X(U)_ R_ ;
G01(G00) Z(W)_ Automatic Smoothing
G01(G00) Z(W)_ R_;
G01(G00) X(U)_ Automatic Smoothing
Note:
1.The address of I and R are specified with radius model. The running distance of this line and the next
line must be greater than the length of beveling or radius of smoothing, otherwise the system will decrease the
length of beveling or radius of smoothing to minimal running distance of this line and the next line
automatically.
2. The two adjacent lines must be 90 degrees.
For example:
0 G54 G0 X-50 Y-50 Z20
N1 M03 S500
N2 G01 G42 D01 X0 Y0 F200
N3 G01 Z-5
N4 X100 I4 ;Beveling4x4
N5 Y40 R6 ;SmoothingR6
N6 X47 R5 ;SmoothingR5
N7 Y70 I3 ;Beveling3x3
N8 X15
N9 X0 Y40
N10 Y0
N11 G0 X-50 Y-50 G40
N12 Z50
N13 M30

- 84 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.28 3D Space Arc Interpolation G06

When user don’t know position of circle center & radius, but know coordinate position of 3
points on arc, now user can use G06 code to processing arc, and direction is decided by middle
point between starting point & end point.
Format: G06 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ F_
G06: Modal command
I: Increment coordinate Value of Middle point relative to starting point in X direction
Radius Designation, with direction;
J: Increment coordinate Value of Middle point relative to starting point in Y direction
With direction
K: Increment coordinate Value of Middle point relative to starting point in Z direction
With direction
F: Cutting speed
Note:
1. Middle point is any position point except starting point & end point.
2. System will alarm when three points are at one line.
3. When I,J,K are omitted, default value is I=0, J=0, K=0. But they cannot be omitted all at same
time,otherwise system will alarm.
4. The meanings of I,J,K are similar to I,J,K of G02/G03.
5. G06 cannot be used for processing total round.
6. Compute of G06 command is very large, it only can work smoothly on modbus system, at normal
system, it would work not smoothly.

Example:
G0 X10 Y28 Z10
G06 X30 Y98 Z10 I5 J-6 K-5 F100
X130 Y198 Z120 I55 J-86 K-65
G0 X0 Z0
M02

- 85 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.29 Macro program instruction(G65/G66/G67)

3.29.1 Non-Mode Macro Command G65

Format: G65 P_ L_ A_ B_ C_ ......
Non-mode macro command G65 only work at current line , which is different to mode macro
command(G66),which always work until macro cancel command(G67)
P_ : Specify name of macro program, E.g: P6000 , name of specified macro program is 6000 .
L_: Set times of call macro program
<A_B_C_... ...> : Argument , which is used for transfer data to macro variable(#**) ,
Transferring table is as following
Argument Variable Argument Variable Argument Variable
A #0 I #7 T #14
B #1 J #8 U #15
C #2 K #9 V #16
D #3 M #10 W #17
E #4 Q #11 K #18
F #5 R #12 Y #19
H #6 S #13 Z #20
Warning:
1. Macro variables #100-#155&#190-#201 was occupied by system, user cannot use.
2. User cannot use G70,G71,G72,G73,G92,G76 etc loop command on Macro program.
Note: the address G, L, N, Q, P can’t be used as user-defined variables.
Example:
Main program:9000 Macro program:8000
G00 X0 Z0 N1 #2=#0+#1
G65 P8000 L1 A5 B6 N2 IF （#2 EQ 10）GOTO 4
G0 X0 Z0 N3 GOO X#2
M30 N4 G00 Z#1
N5 M99 ;Return
3.29.2 Mode Macro Command G66/G67
G66 is mode macro command , G67 is cancel mode macro command
Format: G66 P_ L_ A_ B_ C_ ......
G67
G66 Mode macro command,which always call macro program until macro cancel
command(G67)
P_ : Specify name of macro program, E.g: P7000 , name of specified macro program is 7000 .
L_: Set times of call macro program
<A_B_C_... ...> : Argument , which is used for transfer data to macro variable(#**) , the
transferring table is same as above table.
Example: Main Program : 4000
G00 X0 Z0
- 86 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

G66 P6000 L2 A5 B6
A8 B1
A9 B10
G67
M30
Macro Program: 6000
N1 #2=#0+#1
N2 IF (#2 EQ 10) GOTO 4
N3 G00 X#2
N4 G00 Z#1
N5 M99 ; Return
3.29.3 Macro Program Instruction
3.29.3.1 Input Instruction: WAT
Waiting for the input port X valid or invalid instruction
Format: WAT+ (-) X(Y/M)**+(-)X**+(-)X**+(-)X**+(-)X**
Attention: "+" to means wait for the input is effective;
"-" means wait for the input is invalid;
CNC only can detect only one Y or M , X is without limit.
"X" means the input port X00-X55; see the I/O diagnosis;
3.29.3.2 Output Instruction: OUT
Set the output port Y is valid or invalid instruction
Format: OUT +(-)Y
Attention: "+" means the output is effective;
"-" means the output is invalid;
"Y" means the output port Y00-Y31; see the I/O diagnosis;
Note: when Y output address are controlled by M codes,which cannot use OUT command.
3.29.3.3 Assignment Instruction: =
Explanation: used for assignment of a variable
Eg.: #251=890.34 #450=#123
And also it could be mathematical expression , example.: #440=#234+#470
3.29.3.4 Unconditional Jump: GOTO n
"GOTO n" is the command that for jump to the program line that is specified by sequence
number (N**) unconditionally. n is the sequence number.
E.g.: GOTO 5 ; // Jump to N5 program line.
Note: when specified program line, n ,is beyond sequence number of N1-N99999, cnc system will hint error.
n , program line,could be macro variable (#**)
E.g.: GOTO #100
3.29.3.5 Conditional Jump
1) IF (Conditional express) GOTO n
If condition is met, execute GOTO n ,jump to N** program line; if the condition isn't met,
execute the next segment.
Example: N1 IF(#200 EQ 1) GOTO 20
N10 G00 X0
N20 G00 Z0

- 87 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Explanation: If #200 is equal to 1, system will execute GOTO 20 , jump to N20 , and execute
"G00 Z0", if #200 isn’t equal to 1, system don’t execute operation of "GOTO 20" ,and will
execute next segments , "G00 X0",and then execute "G00 Z0".
2) IF (Conditional express) THEN <A Expression>
<B operational segment>
If condition is met, system execute A expression , and then execute B operational segment ; if
condition is not meet, execute the next segment , B operation.
Example: #101=0
N1 IF(#100 EQ 1) THEN #101=1
N2 IF(#101 EQ 1) GOTO 4
N3 G00 X100
N4 G00 Z100
Explanation: If #100 is equal to 1, system will execute "#100=1", and then judge #101 is equal to
1 , jump to N4 & "execute G00 Z100" ; if #100 isn’t equal to 1, system will judge #101 also isn’t
equal to 1 directly , and execute "G00 X100" & "G00 Z100".
NOTE: 1.<A expression> normally is assignment statement.
2. <A expression> after THEN must exist, otherwise system will hint grammatical errors.
Prolongation:
3) IF(conditional express)
<A operational command>
ELSE
<B operational command>
ENDIF
4) IF(conditional express)
<A operational command>
ELIF
<B operational command>
ENDIF
3.29.3.6 Loop Command
Format: (Conditions Initialization)
WHILE (conditional expression) DO n
<A operational segments>
[Alter condition of loop]
END n
<B operational segments>
When conditions are met during WHILE cycle command, execute the operational segments
between DO n and END n . Otherwise,when condition isn’t met, jump to the program line after
END n ,also execute B operational segments.
We can nest for loops by placing one loop within another.
Note: 1.There must have operational codes that are for change condition at operational segments ,which is
between Do n & END n. Otherwise system will enter endless loop.
2.Nesting of macro program loop statements of SZGH CNC system is 3 pieces of loops at most . Also n
only could be 1 , 2 , 3 .
3.n of "DO n" & "END n" must keep same.

- 88 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Example: #100=2 #150=5 #200=25

WHILE （#100 LT 3）DO 1
G00 X100
WHILE （#150 EQ 5）DO 2
G00 Y100
WHILE （#200 GE 20）DO 3
G00 Z100
#200=#200-2
END 3
#150=#150-1
END 2
#100=#100-1
END 1
3.29.4 Operators’ meaning
Operator Sign Explain Operator Sign Explain Operator Sign Explain
EQ = equal GT > greater LT < Less
NE ≠ unequal GE ≥ G&E LE ≤ L&E

3.29.5 Arithmetic & Logic Operation

Function Format Attention
Definition #i = #j
Addition #i = #j + #k ;
Subtraction #i = #j - #k ;
Multiplication #i = #j * #k ;
Division #i = #j / #k ;
Sin #i = SIN(#j) ;
Asin #i = ASIN(#j);
Cos #i = COS(#j) ; 90.5 degrees means 90
Acos #i = ACOS(#j); degrees & 30 points
Tan #i = TAN(#j);
Atan #i = ATAN(#j);
Square root #i = SQRT(#j);
Absolute value #i = ABS(#j) ;
Rounding off #i= ROUND(#j);
Round down #i = FIX(#j);
Round up #i = FUP(#j);
Natural logarithm #i = LN(#j);
Exponential function #i = EXP(#j);
Or #i = #j OR #k ;
Executing with binary
Exclusive or #i = #j XOR #k ;
system
And #i = #j AND #k ;
3.29.6 Local Variable
#0--#20 : local variables only can be used to store data in macro program, such as a result of
operation, when power is off, the local variables are initialized to the empty. The argument
assignment to the local variable when calling the macro program.

- 89 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.29.7 Global Variable

#21--#999 : Their meanings are the same in different macro program.
When power is off, the variable #21--#100 is initialized to zero, the variable #101--#999 data is
saved not to loss even if the power is off.
3.29.8 System Variable
#1000-- : the system variables are used to change various data when reading the running CNC.
For example, the current position and the compensation of tool.
Special Attention: macro variables #100--#155, #161--#165 & #190--#202 have been used by the system,
users can’t use.
#161~#165 are used for record&display XYZAB machine coordinate value of G31/G311 codes.
#201~#204 are used on G76 (threading cycle code)
User can use global variable: #31~#100 & #205~#999,the others are used already on CNC system.
3.29.9 System Parameter Variable
#1001--#1099 : Value of X-axis length compensation for T1--T99(Unit: um)
#1101--#1199 : Value of D1 radius compensation for T1--T99(Unit: um)
#1201--#1299 : Value of Y(C)-axis length compensation for T1--T99(Unit: um)
#1301--#1399 : Value of D2 radius compensation for T1--T99(Unit: um)
#1401--#1499 : Value of Z-axis length compensation for T1--T99(Unit: um)
#1501--#1599 : Value of D3 radius compensation for T1--T99(Unit: um)
#1601--#1699 : Value of A-axis length compensation for T1--T99(Unit: um)
#1701--#1799 : Value of D4 radius compensation for T1--T99(Unit: um)
3.29.10 I/O variable
#1800: X00-X07 (D0-D7) ; input resistor
#1801: X08-X15 (D0-D7) ; input resistor
#1802: X16-X23 (D0-D7) ; input resistor
#1802: X16-X23 (D0-D7) ; input resistor
#1803: X24-X31 (D0-D70 ; input resistor
#1804: X32-X39 (D0-D7) ; input resistor
#1805: X40-X47 (D0-D7) ; input resistor
#1806: X60-X67 (D0-D7) ; input resistor
#1807: X74-X81 (D0-D7) ; Alarm of driver/Spindle
#1808: Y00-Y15 (D0-D15) ; output resistor
#1809: Y16-Y31 (D0-D15) ; output resistor
#1810: Y32-Y47 (D0-D15) ; output resistor
Warning:
1. Macro variables #100-#155&#190-#201 was occupied by system, user cannot use.
2. User cannot use G70,G71,G72,G73,G92,G76 etc loop command on Macro program.
Note: the address G, L, N, Q, P can’t be used as user-defined variables.
3.29.11 Message Hint Dialog Box
Format: MSG(hint words) or MSG[hint words] ;
Hint words is that user want to hint message on cnc system.
Note: 1. This code can be used on normal NC programs.
2. After hint message, cnc system will pause program automatically.
Format: STAF(hint words) or STAF[hint words];

- 90 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Hints words is that user want to hint message on cnc system. And CNC system don’t pause
program automatically.
3.29.12 Build Processing Program Automatically
3.29.12.1 New/Open a program
Format: FILEON(Program) or FILEON[Program]
Example: FILEON(AABBCC) or FILEON[AABBCC]
It means that new or open a program "AABBCC"
3.29.12.2 Close program
Format: FILECE
It means that close current opening program, if without this code, system will close current
program after program is finished.
3.29.12.3 Write codes into program
Format: FILEWD(Blocks) or FILEWD[Blocks]
Example: FILEWD(G54G0X0Z0) or FILEWD[G54G0X0Z0]
It means that write a blocks of "G54G0X0Z0" into current opening program.
3.29.12.4 Write current absolute coordinate into program
Format: FILEWC
It means that write current absolute coordinate value into program.
Example:
G0X0Z0
After finished this program, system will new a
FILEON[AABBCC]
program of "AABBCC" under directory of
FILEWD [G54G0X0Z0]
program, its blocks is :
G1X45Z89
G54G0X0Z0
FILEWC
X45Z89
G1X99Z76
X99Z76
FILEWC
FILECE
3.29.12.5 Save all global variables with program format
FILEMS(ABC) or FILEMS(ABC)
Save #21~#999 to program of “ABC”
If user want to read these variables, it just needs to execute this “ABC” program, or take this
program as subprogram.
3.29.12.6 Application Example
G0 X100 Z2
FILEON(SCANNER01)
G22 L10
G31 Z-10 P1001 F100
FILEWC
G0 Z2
U-1
G800
This is example program for scanning,which will generate program: SCANNER01

- 91 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3.30 Complex function for Turning & Milling

CNC lathe system can finish milling processing, solutions is as follow:
1.Parameter sets: Name of 3rd axis should be set to "Y" axis, which is set by P101 in Axis
parameter; programming mode is radius programming.
2.Related commands: The Others are same except following commands:
Code Same functions in milling system Code Same functions in milling system
G990 G90 in milling system G981 G81 in milling system
G991 G91 in milling system G982 G82 in milling system
G994 G94 in milling system G983 G83 in milling system
G995 G95 in milling system G984 G84 in milling system
G998 G98 in milling system G985 G85 in milling system
G999 G99 in milling system G986 G86 in milling system
G973 G73 in milling system G987 G87 in milling system
G974 G74 in milling system G989 G89 in milling system
G976 G76 in milling system
Note: CNC lathe system have these functions when CNC system is configured with 3rd axis. And set
P101 on Axis parameter.(P101=32, 4 axes or 5 axes CNC turning & milling system)

3.31 Polar Coordinate Interpolation(G12.1/G13.1)

Polar coordinate interpolation is a function that exercises contour control in converting a
command programmed in a Cartesian coordinate system to the movement of a linear axis
(movement of a tool) and the movement of a rotary axis (rotation of a workpiece). This method is
useful in cutting a front surface and grinding a cam shaft on a lathe.
Format:
G12.1 ; Starts polar coordinate interpolation mode (enables polar coordinate interpolation)

Specify linear or circular interpolation using coordinates in a Cartesian

coordinate system consisting of a linear axis and rotary axis (virtual
axis).
G13.1 ; Polar coordinate interpolation mode is canceled ( for not performing polar
coordinate interpolation )
Note: Specify G12.1 and G13.1 in Separate Blocks.
G12.1 starts the polar coordinate interpolation mode and selects a polar coordinate
interpolation plane, G17, (Fig3.20). Polar coordinate interpolation is performed on this plane.
Performed Steps of Polar coordinate interpolation: Polar coordinate interpolation program,
which is based on X axis (Linear axis) & C axis(Rotary axis)
The linear and rotation axes for polar coordinate interpolation must be set in parameters (P102)
beforehand.

- 92 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Fig3.20 Polar coordinate interpolation plane(G17)

Note: 1.When the power is turned on or the system is reset, polar coordinate interpolation is canceled (G13.1).
G12.1 & G13.1 are mode codes.
2.G codes which can be specified in the polar coordinate interpolation mode
G01: linear interpolation
G02,G03 : Circular interpolation
G04: Dwell
G40,G41,G42: Tool nose radius compensation
(Polar coordinate interpolation is applied to the path after cutter compensation.)
3. When G12.1,start polar coordinate interpolation, system will shift to G17 plane automatically; When
running G13.1, cancel polar coordinate interpolation, system will return to G18 plane automatically.
4. Programming mode: X-axis: Diameter/Radius programming; C-axis: Radius programming. Even
when diameter programming is used for the linear axis (X-axis), radius programming is applied to the rotary
axis (C-axis). Programming unit is mm, displaying unit is degree.
5. In the polar coordinate interpolation mode, program commands are specified with Cartesian
coordinates on the polar coordinate interpolation plane. The axis address for the rotation axis is used as the
axis address for the second axis (virtual axis) in the plane. Whether a diameter or radius is specified for the
first axis in the plane is the same as for the rotation axis regardless of the specification for the first axis in the
plane.
6. The virtual axis is at coordinate 0 immediately after G12.1 is specified. Polar interpolation is started
assuming the angle of 0 for the position of the tool when G12.1 is specified.
7. Specify the feedrate as a speed (relative speed between the workpiece and tool) tangential to the polar
coordinate interpolation plane (Cartesian coordinate system) using F.
8. The addresses for specifying the radius of an arc for circular interpolation (G02 or G03) in the polar
coordinate interpolation plane depend on the first axis in the plane (linear axis). I and J in the Xp–Yp plane
when the linear axis is the X–axis or an axis parallel to the X–axis.The radius of an arc can be specified
also with an R command.
9.Polar coordinate interpolation converts the tool movement for a figure programmed in a Cartesian
coordinate system to the tool movement in the rotation axis (C-axis) and the linear axis (X-axis). When the tool
moves closer to the center of the workpiece, the C-axis component of the feedrate becomes larger and may

- 93 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

exceed the maximum cutting feedrate for the C-axis (set by P109 in Axis parameter), causing an alarm (see
the figure below). To prevent the C-axis component from exceeding the maximum cutting feedrate for the
C-axis, reduce the feedrate specified with address F or create a program so that the tool (center of the tool
when tool nose radius compensation is applied) does not move close to the center of the workpiece.

Example: Polar Coordinate Interpolation Program Based on X Axis (Linear Axis) and C Axis
(Rotary Axis)

X axis is by diameter programming, C axis is by radius programming

N10 T0202

- 94 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

...
N100 G00 X150 C0 Z0 ; Positioning to start position
N200 G12.1 ; Start of polar coordinate interpolation
N201 G42 G01 X40.0 F20 ;
N202 C10 ;
N203 G03 X-20.0 C20.0 R10.0;
N204 G01 X-40.0;
Geometry program
N205 C-10.0;
(Program based on Cartesian
N206 G03 X-40 C-20 R20 ;
coordinates on X-C’ plane)
N207 G01 X40 ;
N208 G03 X80 C-20 R20 ;
N209 G01 C0 ;
N210 X150.0 ;
N300 G13.1; Cancellation of polar coordinate interpolation
N400 Z100.0 C0 ;
...
N500 M30 ;

3.32 Turning Side Cycle(G809)

CNC system must be configured with C-axis & A-axis.
Format: G809 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ J_ F_ P_
X(U)_ Z(W)_
X(U) and Z(W) are feeding distance;
I: sides; J: speed of C-axis(r/min); F: feeding speed of Z-axis(mm/min)
P1: C-axis go home,but A-axis not; P2: A-axis go home, but C-axis not;
P3: C-axis & A-axis go home both; P4: C-axis & A-axis don’t go home both.
Note: 1.X & Z are related to G90/G91
2.I_ is positive number, A-axis is rotating with positive direction,if I is negative number,
A-axis is rotating with negative direction
3. J_ is positive number, C-axis is rotating with positive direction,if J_ is negative
number, C-axis is rotating with negative direction.
4.It must use electric ratio for C-axis & A-axis. When rotating speed is higher, electric
ratio(value of Denominator/Numerator) should be bigger,otherwise driver will lost of step as pulse
output frequency of CNC is too higher.
5.G809 is modal code,I J F P & G809 can be omitted in next block of turning side cycle,
until it uses G80/G00/G01/G02/G03/G32, etc. codes to cancel modal status of G809 cycle code.
6.Run M881/M800 if it need to do home of C-axis before run G809; Run G0 A0 if it
need to do home of A-axis before run G809.
Details of process for G809:
1)According to P code: if C-axis isn’t homing, firstly C-axis goes to home(same as run
M800), if homing well,rapidly positioning to zero point.
2)According to P code: A-axis move to zero point rapidly.
3)X-axis & Z-axis is moving with speed specified by F code, C-axis & A-axis are running

- 95 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

with speed in proportion.

4)After Z-axis finish movement of coordinate, C-axis & A-axis will stop running also.
5)C-axis & A-axis will do one-time reduction Automatically for machine coordinate
system with 360 degrees.
Parameter set for G809:
P300=00010101, P912=0 on Other parameter; P220=82, P223=84 on Axis parameter
P222/P225 on axis parameter are set accelerate/decelerate time of C-axis & A-axis.
Example:
N1 T0101;
N2 G00 X200 Z0
N3 X20
N4 M881; C-axis do orientation for home(M61/M22)
N5 G0 A0; flying tool plate move to zero point
N6 G809 Z-100 I4 J400 F200 ; turning 4 sides
N7 Z-105 X30 ; G809 is modal code, chamfer of turning side
N8 G00 X200 Z0 ; cancel G809 modal code
N9 M02
Note: for ensure it can be processed repeatably,do home for all before processing.

- 96 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Chapter 4 M INSTRCUTIONS

4.1 M Function (Auxiliary Function)

M instruction consists of instruction address M and its following 1~2 bit digits, used for
controlling the flow of executed program or outputting M instructions to PLC.
M
Instruction value(the leading zero can be omitted)
Instruction address
When address M followed by a number is specified, a code signal and strobe signal are
transmitted. These signals are used for turning on/off the power to the machine.
In general, only one M code is valid in a block but up to three M codes can be specified in a
block (although some machines may not allow that). The correspondence between M codes and
functions is up to the machine tool builder.
All M codes are processed in the machine except for M97 M98, M99,M codes for calling a
subprogram , and M codes for calling a custom macro. Refer to the appropriate manual issued by
the machine tool builder.
The following M codes have special meanings.
M00, M01, M02, M30, M97, M98, M99 must not be specified together with another M code.
Some M codes other than M00, M01, M02, M30, M97, M98 and M99 cannot be specified
together with other M codes; each of those M codes must be specified in a single block.
4.1.1 Program Stop(M00)
Automatic operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is executed.
When the program is stopped, all existing modal information remains unchanged. The
automatic operation can be restarted by actuating the cycle operation. This differs with the machine
tool builder.
4.1.2 Optional Stop (M01)
Similarly to M00, automatic operation is stopped after a block containing M01 is executed.
This code is only effective and program stop when input point M22(PIN5 of CN10 Plug) is valid
4.1.3 End of Program (M02,M30)
This indicates the end of the main program.Automatic operation is stopped and the CNC unit
is reset.
4.1.4 Cycle of Program (M20)
Run program cycle , cycle time is set by P18 in User parameter. If value of P18 on user
parameter is negative number, countless cycle run.
4.1.5 Account of Workpiece(M87)
Number of workpieces will add one automatically as P10=0 in Other parameter.
4.1.6 Unconditional Jump (M97)
M97 P_ , jump to specified block number that specified by P.P4 said entrance line number
with 4 field numbers specified program transfer main program.
Example: M97 P0120 , when execute this code, CNC will jump to "N0120" block and run.

- 97 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

4.2 Subprogram Configuration

There are two program types, main program and subprogram. Normally, the CNC operates
according to the main program. However, when a command calling a subprogram is encountered in
the main program, control is passed to the subprogram. When a command specifying a return to the
main program is encountered in a subprogram, control is returned to the main program.

Fig4.2.1 Main program and subprogram

If a program contains a fixed sequence or frequently repeated pattern, such a sequence or
pattern can be stored as a subprogram in memory to simplify the program.
A subprogram can be called from the main program.
A called subprogram can also call another subprogram.
4.2.1 Calling of Subprogram (M98)
This code is used to call a subprogram.The code and strobe signals are not sent.
M98 P_ L_ ;
P_: specify address & name of subprogram. Eg.: Psub/1390; sub is a folder.
Subprogram can be hidden files that don’t display in program district,First character of these
program must be a "HIDEFILE".
Example: "HIDEFILE01", the subprogram in the program area is not displayed, user can use
these type commands to call subprogram.
M98 PHIDEFILE01
or M98 P*01
If user want to call subprogram in USB-disk, Format is " P[ _" or " P]_".
Example: M98 P[A1234 ; Call A1234 subprogram in USB-disk;
L_: number of times the subprogram is called repeatedly.When no repetition data is specified,
the subprogram is called just once.
M98 instruction can be omitted. Format: PP_ .
Example: PP[FFDE ; call "FFDE" subprogram in USB-disk;
Note: 1. There must has a blank before "L_" in this system;
2. Subprogram must be an independent program.
4.2.2 End of Subprogram (M99)
This code indicates the end of a subprogram.M99 execution returns control to the main
program.No code or strobe signal is sent.
1) M99 in main program is same to M02;
2) M99 with P in main program is same to M97 ;

- 98 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3) M99 in subprogram return to next block of M98;

4) M99 with P in the subroutine return to specified block in main program.
When the main program calls a subprogram, it is regarded as a one–level subprogram call.
Thus, subprogram calls can be nested up to four levels as shown below.

Eg.:Execution sequence of subprograms called from a main program.A subprogram can call
another subprogram in the same way as a main program calls a subprogram.

A single call command can repeatedly call a subprogram up to 9999 times.

4.3 Standard PLC M Command List
4.3.1 M Output Command List
Function Code Introduction Statement
M03 Spindle on CW
Functions interlocked and states
Spindle M04 Spindle on CCW
reserved
M05 Spindle Stop
M08 Coolant ON Functions interlocked and states
Coolant
M09 Coolant OFF reserved
M10 Chuck Clamping Functions interlocked and states
Chuck
M11 Chuck Unclamping reserved
M79 Tailstock Forward Functions interlocked and states
Tailstock
M78 Tailstock Backward reserved
M32 Lubrication ON Functions interlocked and states
Lubricate
M33 Lubrication OFF reserved
M59 Huff ON Functions interlocked and states
Huff
M58 Huff OFF reserved
M61 User-define Output 1 ON Functions interlocked and states
1
M60 User-define Output 1 Off reserved
M63 User-define Output 2 ON Functions interlocked and states
2
M62 User-define Output 2 Off reserved
M65 User-define Output 3 ON Functions interlocked and states
3
M64 User-define Output 3 Off reserved
M67 User-define Output 4 ON Functions interlocked and states
4
M66 User-define Output 4 Off reserved
5 M69 User-define Output 5 ON Functions interlocked and states

- 99 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

M68 User-define Output 5 Off reserved

M71 User-define Output 6 ON Functions interlocked and states
6
M70 User-define Output 6 Off reserved
M73 User-define Output 7 ON Functions interlocked and states
7
M72 User-define Output 7 Off reserved
M75 User-define Output 8 ON Functions interlocked and states
8
M74 User-define Output 8 Off reserved
M75/M74: When CNC system is configured with C axis , which is used for switch the control
mode (Position control Mode & Analog Speed Mode) of servo spindle. When M75 is valid, which
is set servo spindle to position control mode,when M03/M04 is valid, turn off M75.
M71/M70: When P20 in Other parameter set to 1, M11 output M71.
M73/M72: When P21 in Other parameter set to 1, M78 output M73.
Note: All M output commands, output 0V effective level.
4.3.1.1 Spindle Control (M03/M04/M05)
M03 is for control CW of spindle,M04 is for control CCW of spindle,M05 is for stop spindle.
Input Point
M03 PIN19_CN3 Plug CW of Spindle
M04 PIN7_CN3 Plug CCW of Spindle
M05 PIN20_CN3 Plug STOP of Spindle
Wiring Diagram

Fig4.3.1 Wiring Diagram for Spindle

According to this wiring diagram, it will consist a control circuit with +24V when system
output M03/M04/M05 signal, coil of relay works and NO type switches will be ON , and control
related function of spindle.
Note:1. Effective level of all output points is 0V.
2.When the relays and others inductance load, must connected with the reverse diode to absorb the
reverse current so as not to damage the system, if use the electromagnetic contactor, then plus resistive and
capacitance spark circuit.
Parameter Set
System output dual analog for spindle for control speed of two spindles,2nd analog output 1st
analog,which set by D11_P9 in Other parameter.
In Axis parameter
P7 : Set the braking time of spindle, also the hold time of output M05, Unit:10ms. The time
less , the braking faster.
P8 : Set the braking signal is long signal 1 or short signal 0.
- 100 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

P9: To set system whether checking spindle feedback signal of spindle position, also feedback
signal is spindle encoder signal. To set the parameter value 1 means check; 0 means not to check.
P10: To set feedback pulse numbers of spindle encoder turn a round, value: Line number of
encoder * 4.
P11: Whether turn on the spindle or not when shifting [1 means on, 0 means off]
P51: The speed of motor when spindle shifting (unit: 1/100rpm)
P52: The direction when spindle shifting (0 means positive, 1means negative)
P53: The stopping time when spindle shifting (unit: 10ms)
P54: Turning time of low speed when spindle shifting (unit:10ms)
P55: Stopping delay time of spindle (Unit:10ms)
In Speed parameter:
P8: To set the speed of spindle at manual condition. Unit: rpm.
P36: To set the max speed of spindle, also the speed of corresponding 10V.
Attention: when spindle system is with gears,this is the speed of first gear.
P37: To set the max speed of spindle(second gear), that’s the turning speed of corresponding
10V instruction voltage.Unit: rpm.
P38: To set the max speed of spindle (Third gear), that’s the turning speed of corresponding
10V instruction voltage. Unit: rpm.
P39: To set the max speed of spindle (Fourth gear), that’s the turning speed of corresponding
10V instruction voltage. Unit: rpm.
P40: To set highest speed of second spindle, also the speed of corresponding 10V. Unit: r/min
In Other parameter:
P13: To set whether spindle and chuck is interlocking or not: 0 means they are separately; 1
means the spindle only start turning when chuck on. The thumbstall can’t be use when the spindle
is turning.
Setting parameter is related with the configuration of lathe and user’s service condition, but
consider for safe, suggest setting 1,also interlocking.
4.3.1.2 Spindle Gear Shifting(M41/M42/M43/M44)
Remark PIN Function Command
S01 PIN10_CN3 Plug Output 1st gear of spindle M41
S02 PIN23_CN3 Plug Output 2nd gear of spindle M42
S03 PIN11_CN3 Plug Output 3rd gear of spindle M43
S04 PIN24_CN3 Plug Output 4th gear of spindle M44
M41/M42/M43/M44 output S01/S02/S03/S04 for shifting gear of spindle , and adjust analog
voltage to adjust speed of spindle.
P36 in Speed parameter is set for max speed of 1st class spindle;
P37 in Speed parameter is set for max speed of 2nd class spindle;
P38 in Speed parameter is set for max speed of 3rd class spindle;
P39 in Speed parameter is set for max speed of 4th class spindle;
Note:Functions interlocked and states reserved
4.3.1.3 Coolant(M08/M09)
M08:Turn on coolant
M09: Turn off coolant
Remark PIN Function
M08 PIN8_CN3 Plug Turn On/Off coolant
- 101 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

4.3.1.4 Lubricate(M32/M33)
M32: Turn on lubrication
M33: Turn off lubrication
Remark PIN Function
M32 PIN9_CN3 Plug Turn On/Off Lubrication
In Other parameter,
P4 controls the function of lubricate automatically.
P6 is set the interval time of lubrication (Unit: s);
P5 set the time of lubrication ,also holding time of output M32(Unit: 10ms).
4.3.1.5 Chuck(M10/M11)
M10/M11 are for control clamping/unclamping of chuck.
Remark PIN Function
M10 PIN21_CN3 Plug Control Chuck clamping
M71 PIN9_CN10 Plug Control chuck unclamping(Spare)
M12 PIN11_CN10 Plug Detect position of clamping_chuck(spare)
M22 PIN5_CN10 Plug Detect position of unclamping_chuck(Loose)(spare)
M16 PIN12_CN10 Plug Input point for switch to control chuck(spare)
Chuck of this system control is related with parameter as follows:
In Other parameter:
P2: Type of chuck, (Inner: Chuck to center when M10; Outer: Chuck opening outward when
M10). 1 means outer, 0 means inner.
P13: Interlock between Chuck & Rotation_Spindle.0: No interlock, 1: yes.
P15: Detect position of clamping/unclamping of chuck,0:No detect, 1: yes.
M12: input point for detecting position of clamping of chuck;
M22: input point for detecting position of unclamping of chuck.
P20: Type of controlling signal for chuck,0: one output controlling signal for chuck; 1: two
output controlling signals for chuck.
M10:output point for controlling clamping of chuck , controlling code is M10;
M71:output point for controlling unclamping of chuck,controlling code is M11.
P22: External Switch(Foot switch) for chuck, reciprocating mode, price one time clamping
chuck; press twice time, unclamping chuck. 0: without switch ; 1: with external switch for control
chuck; input signal is M16.
P24: Holding time of output M10/M71 of chuck, unit: s. 0: mode type*.
4.3.1.6 Tailstock(M79/M78)
M79: Tailstock forward
M78: Tailstock backward
Remark PIN Function
M79 PIN22_CN3 Plug Tailstock Forward/Backward
M73 PIN22_CN10 Plug Control chuck unclamping(Spare)
M18 PIN11_CN10 Plug Detect position of forward_Tailstock(spare)
M28 PIN24_CN10 Plug Detect position of backward_Tailstock(spare)
M14 PIN24_CN10 Plug Input point for switch to control Tailstock(spare)
Parameters set for tailstock,in Other parameter:
P16: Detect Position of Forward/Backward of Tailstock; 0: no detect,1:Yes;
M18: input point for detecting position of forward of tailstock;

- 102 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

M28: input point for detecting position of backward of tailstock.

P21: Type of controlling signal for tailstock,0: one output controlling signal for tailstock; 1:
two output controlling signals for tailstock.
M79:output point for controlling forward of tailstock , controlling code is M79;
M73:output point for controlling backward of tailstock,controlling code is M78.
P23: External Switch(Foot switch) for tailstock, reciprocating mode, price one time, tailstock
forward; press twice time, tailstock backward. 0: without switch ; 1: with external switch for
control tailstock; input signal is M14.
P25: Holding time of output M79/M73 of tailstock, unit: s. 0: mode type*.
Note: 1. When user-defined signals M71/M70 , M73/M72 are used for output signal of spindle chuck and
Tailstock, it can’t be used for other functions.
2. M12,M14,M1,M18,M28 are multi-function codes, only one function when using.
3. *mode type means that once valid,always valid until canceling/resetting code.
4.3.1.7 Status Output of Machine Tool(M65/M67/M69)
M65/M67/M69 be used for output condition of machine tool, set by parameters
Remark PIN Function
M65 PIN20_CN3 Plug Output Alarm condition of machine tool
M67 PIN8_CN3 Plug Output Running condition of machine tool
M69 PIN21_CN3 Plug Output Pausing condition of machine tool
Parameter sets for condition output of machine tool. In Other parameter:
P28: M65/M69 are as outputs for run/halt condition of machine tool,0:no,1:yes.
P29: M67 is as output for alarm condition of machine tool, 0: no, 1:yes.
Note:1.When M65,M67,M69 are used for output condition of machine tool, and then they can’t be used for
other functions.
2.Valid level of all output points is 0V. When fixed with inductance load, must connected with the reverse
diode to protect inner circuit of cnc system.
4.3.2 M Input Command List
No. Code Function Introduction Statement
M12 Check M12 is valid
1
M13 Check M12 is invalid
M14 Check M14 is valid
2
M15 Check M14 is invalid
M16 Check M16 is valid
3
M17 Check M16 is invalid
These codes can be used
M18 Check M18 is valid
4 for conditional wait or
M19 Check M18 is invalid
conditional jump.
M28 Check M28 is valid
5
M29 Check M28 is invalid
M22 Check M22 is valid
6
M23 Check M22 is invalid
M24 Check M24 is valid
7
M25 Check M24 is invalid
Note: All M input commands, input effective level is 0V.
There are two kinds of special application about M input commands,as following,
a) Conditional Wait
Example: M12
- 103 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

When Input point M12 is valid, program goes on run following blocks, if M12 is invalid,
system will wait if M12 is valid.
b) Conditional Jump
Example: M14 P0120
When the program running to this block and the system detecting if M14 input signal is valid.
When M14 is valid, program will jump to 120th line of program (also N0120 block), otherwise ,
system will execute the next block.
4.3.3 M Special Command List
No. Code Function
M320 Clear workpiece coordinate value of all axes
M317 Clear X_workpiece coordinate
M318 Clear Y_workpiece coordinate
M319 Clear Z_workpiece coordinate
2 M315 Clear A_workpiece coordinate
M316 Clear B_workpiece coordinate
M312 Clear C_workpiece coordinate
M313 Clear Xs_workpiece coordinate
M314 Clear Ys_workpiece coordinate
M420 Clear machine coordinate value of all axes
M417 Clear X_machine coordinate
M418 Clear Y_machine coordinate
M419 Clear Z_machine coordinate
3 M415 Clear A_machine coordinate
M416 Clear B_machine coordinate
M412 Clear C_machine coordinate
M413 Clear Xs_machine coordinate
M414 Clear Ys_machine coordinate
4.4 Analog Speed of Spindle(S , SS)
SZGH CNC system support dual analog outputs for SP_speed.
Speed of 1st spindle is set by "S**"; Speed of 2nd spindle is set by "SS**".
P36 in Speed parameter is set for max speed of 1st spindle; P40 in Speed parameter is set for
max speed of 2nd spindle.
Note: D11_P9=1 in Other parameter is set for output 1st analog voltage to dual analog output(+10V of
CN3&CN10) at same time, without function of "SS**".
There are two gears control ways for 1st spindle as following,
(1) Four gears spindle speed electrical control, output four bits code of step speed change,
M41-M44 control instructions are corresponding to output S01-S04 code, with fixed speed.
P50/P51/P52/P53/P54 in Axis parameter are set for mode of shifting.
(2) Four gears+Variable speed, M41-M44 instruction control, correspond the output S01-S04
code. P36/P37/P38/P39 in Speed parameter are set for maximum speed of corresponding gear,
P50/P51/P52/P53/P54 in Axis parameter are set for mode of shifting.
Variable speed,range is 0-99999, output 0-10V variable-frequency voltage.
Note: Output 10V is corresponding to max speed of spindle.

- 104 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

4.5 T Tool Function Command

Format Function
Tab a: Exchanging Tool Number b: Tool compensate number
Note: 1. a=0 ; means that don’t exchange tool;
2. b=0; means that don’t make tool compensation , display machine coordinate;
3.Range: a= 0~99 ; b=0~99.
Eg1: T0204 ; change to No.2 tool , and make No.4 tool compensation.
T0300 ; change to No.3 tool , and don’t make tool compensation.
T0004 ; don’t exchange tool , only make No.4 tool compensation.
When machine tool is with electrical turret, each station can fix several tools,adopt different
tool compensation to exchange tools.
Eg2: 4 station turret, there are 2 tools in 3rd station (use No.3 & No.5 tool compensation)
N0000 T0101 ; change to No.1 tool, and make no.1 tool compensation
N0001 G0 X30 Z500
N0002 T0303 ; change to 1st tool in 3rd station
N0003 G00 X50
N0004 T0505 ; change to 2nd tool in 3rd station
N0005 M02

4.6 User-defined macro instruction(G120-G160,M880-M889)

Every user-defined G code is corresponding to a macro program ProgramGxxx, the M code is
corresponding to a macro program of ProgramUser0 --ProgramUser9, the user cannot programme
the macro program in NC system, must edit the macro code in the computer, and then copy into the
system.
For example, defines the G152 function: the arc model porous drilling cycle. (must copy the
macro program ProgramG152 into system).
Format:G152 Xx Yy Zz Rr Ii Aa Bb Hh Ff;
X: The X coordinate with absolute value or incremental value of center to specify.
Y: The Y coordinate with absolute value or incremental value of center to specify.
Z: Hole depth
R: Approaching fast to the point coordinate
F: Cutting feed speed
I: Radius
A: The angle of the first hole
B: Incremental angle specify(CW when negative)
Macro program ProgramG152 as follows:
#80=#0
#81=#1
#82=#2
#83=#3
#84=#4
#85=#5

- 105 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

#86=#6
#87=#7
#88=#8
#89=#9
#90=#10
#91=#11
#92=#12
#93=#13
#94=#14
#95=#15
#96=#16
#97=#17
#98=#18
#99=#19
#100=#20
#30=#4003
#31=#4014
G90
IF[#30 EQ 90] GOTO 1
G53
#98=#5001+#98
#99=#5002+#99
N1 WHILE[#86 GT 0] DO 1
#35=#98+#87*COS[#80]
#36=#99+#87*SIN[#80]
G81X#35Y#36Z#100R#92F#85
#80=#80+#81
#86=#86-1
END 1
G#30 G#31 G80
M99

4.7 Synthetic instance for programming

In the actual programming, must according to the drawing and processing requirement to select
the correct install folder mode and suitable tool, and combined with the actual working
performance of lathe to select the right cutting allowance.
Example 1：The tool is:
T01 cylindrical cutting tool; T02 cutting groove, tool width 3m; T03 thread tool with 60 degree
angle

- 106 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Program as follows:
N10 M03 S1000; Start spindle
N20 T0101; Choose the first tool and execute the first redeem
N30 G00 X41.8 Z2 M08; Move fast to the cutting point，cutting fluid is on
N40 G01 X48 Z-1 F100; Chamber
N50 Z-60; Fine machining for thread
N60 X50; Tool is backing
N70 X62 W－60; Fine machining in cone
N80 W－15; Fine machining in Φ62mm ex-circle
N90 X78; Tool is backing
N100 X80 W-1; Chamber
N110 W-19; Fine machining in Φ80mm ex-circle
N120 G02 X80 W-60 R70; Fine machining in arc（I63.25 K－30）
N130 G01 Z-225; Fine machining in Φ80mm ex-circle
N140 X85; Tool is backing
N150 Z-290; Fine machining in Φ85mm ex-circle
N160 X90 M09; Tool is backing，cutting fluid is off
N170 G00 X150 Z50; Move fast to the point of changing tool
N180 T0202; Change tool and set the No.2 redeem
N190 M03 S800; Change speed of spindle
N200 G00 X51 Z-60 M08; Move fast to the processing point，use the left point of tool to redeem
N210 G01 X45 F90; Cutting Φ45mm groove
N220 G00 X51; Tool is backing
N230 X150 Z50 M09; Return to the point of backing tool，cutting fluid is off
N240 T0303; Change tool and set the redeem
N250 M03 S1500; Change speed of spindle
N260 G00 X62 Z6 M08; Move fast to the processing point，cutting fluid is on
N270 G92 X47.54 Z－58 F1.5; Cutting thread is cycle
N280 X46.94;
N290 X46.54;
N300 X46.38;
N310 G00 X150 Z50 M09; Return to the point of start cutting, cutting fluid is off
N320 T0300; Cancel redeem

- 107 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

N330 M05; Stop spindle

N340 M30; Program is over

4.8 Apply to High Speed Punch machine

T0101
G00 X0
G22 L50 ; Cycle times
WAT+M295 ;position of punch head lift up, detect input point M18(X28)
OUT-M295
G0 U1
WAT+M297 ; position of punch head down, detect input point M14(X30)
OUT-M297
G800
M02
Note: This CNC system is with two high-speed input points, set P32=28, P910=1 on Other parameter.

4.9 Usage of Following Function of Axes

Solution 1)
Coordinate doesn’t following with control axis, it can don’t display 4th axis when using.
On Axis Parameter,
P414=7 ; 4th axis is following with X-axis , synchronous to X-axis on Manual/Auto.
P414=8 ; 4th axis is following with Y-axis , synchronous to Y-axis on Manual/Auto.
P414=9 ; 4th axis is following with Z-axis , synchronous to Z-axis on Manual/Auto.
P414=17 ; C axis is following with X-axis , synchronous to X-axis on Manual/Auto.
P414=18 ; C axis is following with Y-axis , synchronous to Y-axis on Manual/Auto.
P414=19 ; C axis is following with Z-axis , synchronous to Z-axis on Manual/Auto.
P414=27 ; B axis is following with X-axis , synchronous to X-axis on Manual/Auto.
P414=28 ; B axis is following with Y-axis , synchronous to Y-axis on Manual/Auto.
P414=29 ; B axis is following with Z-axis , synchronous to Z-axis on Manual/Auto.
Solution 2)
Using command to specify one axis following with control axis on Auto status, don’t follow
on Manual status,coordinate also following with control axis.
M123 : Activate Y-axis following with motion of X-axis on Auto status;
M124 : Deactivate Y-axis following with motion of X-axis on Auto status
M125 : Activate A-axis following with motion of X-axis on Auto status;
M126 : Deactivate A-axis following with motion of X-axis on Auto status;

- 108 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Chapter 5 Operation
When using CNC Lathe system, just master the parameter of system, edit program, manual
operation, auto operation. Then you can operate the system easily. There are some details to
instruct hereinafter.

5.1 Operational Panel

This system panel is total controller ,which includes 8.4 inches LCD display area , function
menu , editing keyboard area & machine control panel.

Function Menu

Editing
LCD display area
Keyboard Area

Machine Control
Operate Panel

Fig5.1 SZGH-CNC1000TDb CNC Lathe Controller

5.2 Function Menu

Menu Keys Comment
Enter the interfaces of status parameter. data parameter , diagnosis and screw compensation
parameter interface (interfaces can be switched by repeated press)

Enter the program interface.

Enter the redeem interface.

Enter controlling condition of manual

Enter controlling condition of auto

Delete key Note: Clear number of workpiece on main screen.

Exit key

Enter key

- 109 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

5.3 Editing Keyboard

Keys Name Description

Reset key CNC reset, stop of the feeding and moving, etc.

Address Address input,

Key Double-address key, switch between addresses

Digital
Key&Sym Digit input & Symbol Input
bol key

Cursor
Move Move the cursor in different directions.
Keys
Page
Page up/down on
up/down Note: Exchange of coordinate
display
key

Shift key Shift function of key

Space key Leave a blank space

5.4 Machine Control Panel

Key Designation Explanation Remarks and operation
explanation
K1 switch K1 ON/OFF Control Y24 ON/OFF
Output Point: PIN11 of CN16 plug
K2 switch K2 ON/OFF Control Y25 ON/OFF
Output Point: PIN12 of CN16 plug
K3 switch K2 ON/OFF Control Y26 ON/OFF
Output Point: PIN13 of CN16 plug
Coolant switch Coolant ON/OFF Control code: M08/M09
Output Point: PIN8 of CN3 plug

- 110 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Chuck switch Tighten/Loosen Tool Control code: M10/M11

of Spindle Output Point:PIN21 of CN3 plug
Tailstock switch Tailstock Control code: M79/M78
Forward/Backward Output Point: PIN22 of CN3 plug
Lubricate switch Lubricate ON/OFF Control code: M32/M33
Output Point: PIN9 of CN3 plug
Huff switch Huff ON/OFF Control code: M59/M58
Output Point: PIN6 of CN10 plug
Single block key To enter single block
mode
Per Step mode key To enter single step Switching cycle from "manual
mode continuous" to "manual increment"
Graphic mode key To enter graphic mode(Only Work on AUTO condition)

Simulate switch/dry
run switch
Handwheel/*1/*10/ Enter controlling condition of handwheel, press again, it will
*100 shift handwheel rate of *1/*10/*100
Diagnosis key Enter the interfaces of diagnosis

Pause key Halt for program

Cycle start key Press this key and the Auto mode, MDI mode, DNC mode
system mode
automatically runs
Return Home of To enter mode of return
Machine key home of machine

Key Designation Explanation Remarks and operation

explanation
Spindle override keys Up/Down rate of Range is form 5% to 150%,16
SP_Speed gears totally
Rate of G00 speed Up/Down rate of range is from 5% to 100%,16
G00_Speed gears totally
Rate of feeding speed Up/Down rate of range is from 0% to 150%,16
Feeding Speed gears totally
Spindle control keys CW/CCW/Sto Corresponding to M03/M04/M05
p of Spindle codes

- 111 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Rotation of SP in JOG Point CW/CCW rotation of spindle

Exchange Tool key Manual change to next one tool

Rapid mode Holding Rapid key+ Manual Feeding Key, for feeding
with rapid speed manually. When P38=8 in Other
parameter,the key is set to switch of Rapid/Normal.
Manual Feeding Key

For positive/negative movement of X, Y, Z,

A & B axes in MANUAL mode

Cycle Start Button, for run processing program on Auto, or run MDI

Pause Button, for halt processing

Note:only E type operational panel has Pause button.

Emergency stop Driver and motor stop immediately, turns off the
spindle, coolant, waits for the rise of button, and initializes values

Interface Switch
Left side: Normal Mode
Middle: F-Halt , stop feeding
Right side: FS-Halt, stop feeding & rotation of spindle

Handwheel on panel for feeding manually.

P1=0 in Other parameter is select handwheel on panel.
Note: only A type & C type operational panel have handwheel(MPG).

Note: 1."Manual speed controlled": Press "1" "2" "3" "4" "5" "6" "7" "8" "9" to set feed override "F30"
"F60" "F120" "F250" "F500" "F1000" "F1500" "F2000" "F2500" "F3000".
2."Incremental coordinate": Press "Setup" to set or set to 0 after enter "relative" coordinate mode.
3. Machine coordinate clear: Press "E" in parameter and then press "Enter".
4. "F": Taking mm/min as the unit to set the manual feed speed, the input range is from 1 to
30000mm/min. And the input method according to data input method in parameter.
5."S": Set the speed of the first spindle. The range is from 0 to 99999, the max depends on the No.36
parameter in speed parameter.
6."I": Modify the increment per step in manual increment mode
7. "T": Choosing the position cutting tool.
- 112 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

The system adjusts one-level menu operation, intuitive, convenient, shortcut, prompt
comprehensive information. System will enter the main screen once power on.

G Codes & current

tool & compensation

Feeding Speed &

Feed Rate

SP_Speed & SP_RATE

Fig5.2 Displayer
On this main screen, user can check current control mode, current processing program &
current processing block of system. And also can check using G codes & M codes, feeding speed &
rate , spindle speed & rate, alarm hint message, workpiece processing time & number, spindle real
speed.
User also can select related function rapidly by function keys as following,
Button Remark Function
F1 Relat Enter Relative Coordinate System screen
F2 Absol Enter Absolute Coordinate System screen(Default)
F3 All Enter All Coordinate System display screen
F4 STEP Enter Manual Step mode(Manual Increment/Continuous)
F5 MDI Enter MDI mode (Manual Data Input)
F6 TOOL Tool Setup
F7 SetCo Setup workpiece Coordinate system(G54-G59)
F8 ChoCo Choose Workpiece coordinate system(G54-G59)
In manual condition, system could manual process workpiece, cannot run processing program.
System adjust coordinate system, tool set, confirm starting point & related loads ON/OFF in
Manual condition.

- 113 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

5.5 Manual Operation

5.5.1 Manual Continuous

Continuous operation is basis on the time of pressing, Press to feed, up to stop feeding. Making
sure the axis and using "Manual Feeding Key" to feed, feeding speed displays on the interface (F)
multi Rate.
When continuous starting, press "Rapid" to switch the speed set by P1,P2 in Speed parameter,
also G00 speed. If set the speed higher than the speed in parameter, the feed speed will be P1,P2 in
Speed parameter times rapid override.
In order to facilitate the user single axis cutting in the manual function, setting the manual
speed in manual status. Press "F" and input the speed.
When the hard limit point beyond positive and negative feed running axis two direction at, stop
the feed and prompt to feed reverse direction.(the same as hereinafter)
The manual maximum speed is limited by P3 in Speed parameter, when setting the speed is
higher than the value of parameter, then will be P3 in Speed parameter.
When P38=8 in other parameter, "Rapid" is change into a switch, press once to turn on (no
more to always press), press again to turn off.
5.5.2 Manual Increment
This operation is to set the value of increment as the basis, press "↑ ↓ ← →" once to run a
value of increment. It will prompts "I=0010.000" in manual increment represent for the value of
increment is 10mm, press "I" to revise and Enter.
The speed is the speed on display(F) times the rate.
5.5.3 Manual Pulse Generator (Handwheel)
There are two types of handwheel, one is handwheel in Handhold box; the other is handwheel
in the operational panel.
Handwheel in Handhold Box: Press "Handwheel" key to enter handwheel mode. User can
operate the axes selection & feeding override of handwheel(*1/*10/*100).
Handwheel is mainly used for "Tool", also posit tool.
Speed of handwheel pulse generator should be lower than 200r/min(100 pulses per cycle).
Parameters set for handwheel
P1 in Other parameter is set for position of handwheel.
P17 in Speed parameter is set for acceleration / deceleration time constant.
P18 The maximum speed is controlled by No.20(X axis) No.21(Z axis).
Note: 1. SZGH-CNC1000TDb series support handwheel in operational panel & Handhold box.
2. Handwheel is of no effect in auto-coordinates diagram machining, it only works in working
coordinates.

Fig5.3 Handhold Box(Manual Pulse Generator)

- 114 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

5.5.4 Manual Reference Position Return

The CNC machine tool has a position used to determine the machine position. This position
is called the reference position, where the tool is replaced or the coordinate are set. Ordinarily, after
the power is turned on or alarm/release emergency stop, the tool is moved to the reference position.
Manual reference position return is to move the tool to the reference position using switches
and push buttons located on the operator’s panel.
There are two ways that return to reference position manually, one is that floating zero point,
the other is that switch for homing, details as follows:
(1) Floating Zero Point Set
When user don’t fix switches for Homing , user can use floating zero point as home, also
reference position, also original point of machine coordinate system.
Parameters set: In Axis parameter,
P23: Bit parameter, D3:X ; D4:C(Y) ; D5:Z ; D6:A ; D7:B ; 1 means float zero point;
P24: Distance between reference position & current position in X direction;
P25: Distance between reference position & current position in Z direction;
P119:Distance between reference position & current position in C(Y) direction;
P217:Distance between reference position & current position in A direction;
P318:Distance between reference position & current position in B direction.
Steps of setting floating zero point(home):
1. Enabled function of float zero point of all axes(XZCAB): P23= 11111001;
2. Moving each axes to designated position in order to set floating point easily;
3.Set distance between reference & designated position: P24/P25/P119/P217/P318.
Note: If current position is home of machine coordinate system, no needs to set offset of P24/P25/P119
/P217/P318 for each axis.
(2) Switch For Homing Set
User can fixed switches for homing,some parameters & wiring needs to done.
A. Parameters set: in Axis Parameter,
P23: Bit parameter, D3:X ; D4:C(Y) ; D5:Z ; D6:A ; D7:B; 0 means switch for homing;
P26: Grade of Homing,0: Just hint; 1:No use; 8: Compulsion; 9: Super Compulsion;
P27: Mode of Homing, 0 & 2: Detect Z0 signal; 1 & the others, no detect ;
P28: Bit Parameter, Direction & Sequence of Homing;
P29: Bit parameter, Type of switch for homing ;
P30: Range of detecting Z0 signal in X-axis ;
P31: Range of detecting Z0 signal in Z-axis ;
P115: Range of detecting Z0 signal in Y(C)-axis ;
P213: Range of detecting Z0 signal in A-axis ;
P314: Range of detecting Z0 signal in B-axis.
P32: Offset after homing in X-axis
P33: Offset after homing in Z-axis
P116: Offset after homing in Y(C)-axis
P214: Offset after homing in A-axis
P315: Offset after homing in B-axis
In Other parameter: P901: set homing sequence of XYZAB axis.

- 115 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

In Speed Parameter,
P30: X-axis homing speed
P32: Z-axis homing speed
P31: Speed during detecting Z0 signal of X-axis
P33: Speed during detecting Z0 signal of Z-axis
In Axis parameter,
P112: C-axis homing speed
P113: Y-axis homing speed
P211: A-axis homing speed
P312: B-axis homing speed
P114: Speed during detecting Z0 signal of Y-axis
P212: Speed during detecting Z0 signal of A-axis
P313: Speed during detecting Z0 signal of B-axis
Note: Details about parameters set,please check part of Parameters List(see chapter 6.3)
B. Input points for homing in the table
Input Point PIN Function
X0 PIN3 of CN3 Plug X axis homing
Z0 PIN17 of CN3 Plug Z axis homing
M36/Y0 PIN2 of CN3 Plug Y(C) axis homing
M34/A0 PIN4 of CN3 Plug A axis homing
M24/B0 PIN3 of CN10 Plug B axis homing
Note: 1.when system hasn’t Y(C), A axis & B axis, these three input points as function of M36&M34&M24.
2. Valid level of all input points is 0V, also common port is 0V or NPN type .
3. Wiring for homing, please see Appendix I Wiring Diagram of CN3 Plug.
C. Operation of Return Reference Position
Press "Return" in Manual mode, system will hint "Input axis name:(X; Z; Y(C) ; A; B ;
0(ZXYAB))" , user can select one axis for homing alone, and also input "0" & Enter key , all axes
go homing sequentially.
Note: 1. If user want to stop during homing, press "Emergency Stop" or "Reset" to stop.
2. After homing successfully, circle before coordinate will change to green, otherwise homing is failure.
The tool can be moved to the reference position also with program commands.
This operation is called automatic reference position return(See Chapter3.15).
Special Attention: Every time to power up the system must back to zero point to make sure the accuracy of
lathe process. The system power off unusually or in an accident, it must back to zero point, otherwise could
cause trouble.

5.5.5 Alignment Tool(Posit Tool)

When machine tool use several tools to processing , length of each tool is different, so user
need to ensure their offset value between tools, also posit tool, which actually is move tool to one
position of workpiece, measure coordinate value of this position, and input to CNC system. System
will calculates the offset and save to the related offset value of tools to register automatically.
a) Two solutions for posit tool:
A Solution (suggestion)
1 Chuck clamp workpiece, set SP_Speed and Feed speed well,run spindle ;
2 Select one tool that needs to setup, Example: T0202 ;
- 116 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

3 Turning a cylinder/bore on workpiece in Manual Continuous Mode ;

4 Exit Z axis(don’t move X-axis), stop spindle ;
5 Measure the diameter of workpiece(cylinder/bore);
6 Press “F6-Tool”key in Function Menu, input “X” & “Enter” , then import the above
value of measurement into dialog box, press “Enter” to confirm ;
7 Cut endface of workpiece with same steps above, After done, don’t move Z-axis , Stop
spindle ;
8 Measure distance between endface of workpiece and zero point of Z-axis(Z0) ;
9 Press “Tool” in Function Menu, input “Z” & “Enter” , then import the above value of
measurement into dialog box, press “Enter” to confirm ;
10 Posit/Setup of No.2 Tool(T02) is already done; Repeat ① - ⑨ to setup /posit/calibrate
other tools.
B Solution
1) Chuck clamp workpiece, set SP_Speed and Feed speed well,run spindle ;
2) Select one tool that needs to setup, Example: T0202 ;
3) Turning a cylinder/bore on workpiece in Manual Continuous Mode ;
4) Press “F6-Tool” key in Function Menu, CNC system will hint a dialog box;
5) Exit both X axis and Z axis , & stop spindle ;
6) Measure the diameter of workpiece (cylinder or bore) ;
7) Press “X” and input above measuring value to dialog box, press “Enter” to confirm ;
8) Cut endface of workpiece with same steps above, stop feeding ;
9) Press “Tool” in Function Menu, CNC system will hint a dialog box;
10) Exit both X axis and Z axis , and stop spindle.
11) Measure distance between endface of workpiece and home of Z-axis(Z0) ;
12) Press “Z” and import the above value of measurement into dialog box, press “Enter” to
confirm.
13) Posit/Setup of No.2 Tool(T02) is already done;Repeat (1) ~ (12) to setup /posit/calibrate
other tools.

b) Difference between two methods:

A Solution B Solution
Must ensure don’t exit posit tool axis Posit tool axis can exit
Tool touch workpiece during exit Tool don’t touch workpiece
Use for posit tool in Z direction Use for posit tool in X direction
In the above processes, cnc system will save difference value between input measuring value
and machine coordinate value to related tool compensation (Redeem) automatically. If there is error
as posit tool, user can adopt the redeem/tool offset of tool compensation for revise processing error.

c) Special Application
When user needs to use a group of tools to processing several kinds of pieces, that needs using
working coordinate system to do tools offset totally.
Method of operation is as follows:
(1) Select any one tool; Example:T0303
(2) Select corresponding coordinates by F8(ChoCo) key: Input 54~59 , press “Enter” key;
- 117 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Or run G54~G59 in MDI,press Start key after input G54~G59;

(3) Turning a cylinder/bore on workpiece in Manual Continuous Mode ;
(4) Exit Z axis (don’t move X axis), stop spindle ;
(5) Measure the diameter of workpiece(cylinder or bore).
(6) Press “F7-SetCo” key, input “X” and “Enter”, import the measuring value, & “Enter”.
(7) Cut endface of workpiece with same steps above ,stop feeding & spindle ;
(8) Measure distance between endface of workpiece and zero point of Z-axis(Z0) ;
(9) Press “F7-SetCo” key, input “Z” and import the measuring value, & “Enter”.
CNC system will save difference between import value and workpiece coordinate value to the
corresponding parameters automatically, posit tool in workpiece coordinate also set done well, and
the others also set well. Tool setup is okay that user add workpiece coordinate codes (G54~G59) in
first line to select the related workpiece coordinate system.
Note: 1.Every tool are independent each other, which has its own coordinate system, so user can can
posit any tool at anytime .
And also only affect current tool when crashing or lost of steps during processing, so user only need to
posit current tool well when crashing or loss of step, all is okay.
Method: Select G53 coordinate system, operate method as operations at c) special application,also press
“F7-SetCo” key instead of “F6-Tool” key on A solution & B solution of posit tool.
2. Before posit tool,please ensure that CNC system can ATC normally.

5.6 Auto Operation

Auto refers to processing the editing program of workpiece. This system can start at arbitrary
point, and also can start at arbitrary line or with arbitrary tool. Starting arbitrary line or with
arbitrary tool must use absolute coordinate to edit the program. Press "Auto" to enter Auto mode in
Manual mode. User can’t move coordinate manually in Auto mode.
Select running program: Press "Program" key to enter program interface, press "↑ ↓" to move
cursor to a program which is going to run , press "C" key to select the program as processing
program and switch to main screen automatically.(See Chapter2. 4)
Switch display of coordinate: Press "PgUp"/ "PgDn" to switch the display which correspond to
"Relative" "Absolute" "All".
Relative Coordinate Absolute Coordinate All Coordinate

5.6.1 Automatic Processing Mode

"Single/continuous": Press "Single" key to switch cycle.
"Continuous": The program continue to execute every program segment(program line) to end or
the instruction of stop to stop.
"Single ": The program just execute one program line and end, wait another operation or press
"Run" again to execute one next program line.

- 118 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

"Simulate": The program is speedy simulate, the axis of coordinate can’t move.
Table of Status Display about Manual/Auto
Manual Continuous Manual Increment Handwheel

Auto Continuous Auto Single Simulate

"Coordinate/Graphic": Press "Graphic" in Auto mode to switch cycle.

"Automatically coordinate": The axis of coordinate will display with value.
"Automatically Graphic": The axis of coordinate will display with a figure.
There are two kinds of figure,also two types of lathe machine, one is Front Turret lathe
machine ,the other is rear turret lathe machine, P3 in Tool parameter is set for type of lathe
machine.
Front Toolpost Coordinate System Rear Toolpost Coordinate System

5.6.2 Processing at arbitrary program line or with arbitrary tool

5.6.2.1 Start from "nth" line(block)
At the condition of automatic processing, press "—" to popup a dialog box, import a number
of line, press "Enter" to confirm, system will start program from this line,and display at processing
program. No.1 line of program is 1th line , input number is nth line , as one block is one line.
Note: 1. The line is the actual line in the program, not the "N" stand for the line.
2. Firstly of all, system will move the starting point of "nth" block with speed which is set by P5 in Speed
parameter, then run the program normally.
3. If user don’t input line number, cnc system will jump to the line that program stop last time, to facilitate
user’s operations.
4. Press "Reset" to return back to the beginning of program after use "N" to search line number in
coordinate screen.
5.6.2.2 Start from "N**" line
The system support that program can start from "N**" line(N** is 4 digit marked line) . At
automatic process condition, press "N" to popup a dialog box to import the marking line, press
"Enter" to confirm. Press "Start" to run program at the "N**" line you import(mark).
Note: 1. "N**" line is not "nth" line/block, is the "N**" stand for the line.
2. Firstly of all, system will move the starting point of "nth" block with speed which is set by P5 in Speed
parameter, then run the program normally.
5.6.2.3 Start from "nth" tool
The system has a function to start program from someone tool("nth" tool). At automatic
process condition, press "G" and input number of tool , press "Enter" to confirm. Press "Run" to
process program at the tool you import.

- 119 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Note: 1.only input number of tool, not need to input number of compensation; Eg.: T0304, just import "03" ;
2. Firstly of all, system will move the starting point of "nth" block with speed which is set by P5 in Speed
parameter, then run the program normally.

5.6.3 Start Program

Start program must in the mode of "Auto" , press "Auto" key to enter mode of Auto, there are
two methods to start program, as follows,
(1) Press "Start" key in the operational panel.
(2) Fix external switch to Run port(PIN18_CN3/PIN8_CN6/PIN9_CN11)
Note: PIN9_CN11 can be used as Run port, P33 in Other parameter is set for this function.

5.6.4 Halt Program

There are five methods to stop/pause program , as follows,
(1) Instructions of program: M00, M01, M02, M30, M20.
(2) Press "Single" to run a current block and stop.
(3) Interface switch turn to the middle or right side.
(4) Press "Reset" to stop all the actions of program.
(5) Fix external switch to Halt port(PIN6_CN3/PIN6_CN6/PIN10_CN11).
Note: PIN10_CN11 can be used as Halt port, P34 in Other parameter is set for this function.

5.6.5 Emergency Stop

Press "Emergency Stop" button when emergency accidents happening, the system will stop
all the actions of machine tool and shows "Emergency stop" on screen.
User can fix external switch as Emergency Stop, Input point is PIN5 of CN11 plug.Type of
emergency stop switch can be set by P27 in Other parameter.
After "Emergency Stop" during processing, which will affect difference between machine tool
coordinate system & actual position of machine tool, in order to ensure coordinate system is same
to actual position of machine tool, it is best to do manual return reference position(homing) before
processing.
5.6.6 Alarm
The screen hints alarm message when machine tool alarm, CNC system will stop processing.
Only after clear alarm,and then CNC system can processing.
There are some fixed alarm,cannot be changed ,as following
Alarm Hinting Message Input Point
X-axis driver has happened hardware limit -L(PIN15_CN3 Plug)
Z-axis driver has happened hardware limit +L(PIN16 _CN3 Plug)
X-axis,C-axis,Z-axis,A-axis,B-axis driver is alarming ALM(PIN12_CN5 Plug)
Spindle driver is alarming ALM1(PIN5_CN3 Plug)
Emergency Stop Stop(PIN5_CN11 Plug)
There are also some user-defined alarm as following
Alarm Hinting Message Auxiliary Relay in PLC
No.0 Alarm M80
No.1 Alarm M81
No.2 Alarm M82
- 120 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

No.3 Alarm M83

No.4 Alarm M84
Protect Door Is Open M85
No.6 Alarm M86
No.7 Alarm M87
Loss of Lubricate Oil M88
No.9 Alarm M89
No.10 Alarm M90
No.11 Alarm M91
+5V Undervoltage M92
+24V Undervoltage M93
No.14 Alarm M94
No.15 Alarm M95
Note: these alarm hinting message & input point can be edited as user’s asks on PLC.
Input point for protect door: M12, PIN11 of CN10 Plug
In Other parameter:
P7: Detect switching signal of protective door, 0:no detect,1: yes
P8: Type of switch for protective door, 0: NO type, 1: NC type.
P17: Type of alarm for servo driver, 0: NO type, 1: NC type.
P18: Type of alarm for spindle, 0: NO type, 1: NC type.
P19: Type of alarm for machine tool, 0: NO type, 1: NC type.
P26: Type of switch for emergency stop in panel, 0: NO type, 1: NC type.
P27: Type of switch for emergency stop in CN11, 0: NO type, 1: NC type.
Note: Emergency STOP: Press "Emergency STOP" button when appearing emergent accident, the lathe
will stop all actions and the screen of system shows "Emergency STOP". Wait for releasing the button.

5.6.7 Indicator Light Output

Output Signal Output Point Parameter Set
Program Running M69(PIN21_CN10 Plug) P28=1 In Other parameter
Program Halt M65(PIN20_CN10 Plug)
Alarm M67(PIN8_CN10 Plug) P29=1 In Other parameter
Note: more details about indicator light output, please check Chapter 4.3.1.7.

5.6.8 DNC function

Storage room of SZGH cnc system is 128Mbit, user can adopt RS232-DNC or USB-DNC
function to run the processing program that is greater than the remainder storage. RS232 port &
USB port are in the front/rear of CNC1000TDb series controller.
5.6.8.1 RS232-DNC
1. Connect PC and CNC system well with the dedicated communication line , & set
communication rate by P37 in Other parameter;
2. Use the dedicated communication software(SZGHCNCCS) on PC to set the related
communication port and rate. Press "Transmit CNC", select the program file to process
linked, enter the status of sending program file.
3. To enter the interface of program file on CNC system, press "L" to enter the status of linked
process, and program will display "RS232--DNC", press "Start" to running carry out linked
process in the automatic status.
- 121 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

4. Turn "Interface switch" to middle or right to stop the running system in the process of linked
process, press "E-Stop" or "Reset" to exit link of DNC.
Note: 1. Baud rate is related to operational environment when using serial port to send files.
2. The communication cable can’t more than 10 meters length.
3. Only the dedicated communication software of this system can send program in User’s computer. To set the
sending speed of PC as the NC, defeat otherwise.

5.6.8.2 USB-DNC
USB-DNC is realized by U-disk, switch on U-disk and system, select program to execute in
U-disk.
Press "F6" to open U-disk in program interface, select corresponding program to press "F7" to
execute program, press "Auto" to get into automatic mode and press "Start"/ "Run" button to
process the program.
Note 1. Don’t unplug U-disk in the process of USB-DNC, otherwise failure.
2. Back to the system program interface from U-disk interface after finish USB-DNC.
3. After selecting the program, it is best to press "P" to compile once to make sure the program is right before
executing program of USB-DNC.

5.7 External Electrical Connection

Basic IOs of this cnc system is 56*32, some input points & output points have related
functions.
5.7.1 Limitation
There are two ways to set limitation of machine tool , one is software limitation, another is fix
external switch as limitation.
5.7.1.1 Software limitation
Software limitation is finished by setting working range of machine tool , also set related
parameters in CNC system.
In Axis Parameter
P11: bit parameter, software-limitation of each axis is set alone.
Bit_P11 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Axis B A Z Y X
Default set 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
1: it is invalid of software-limitation,0: valid of software-limitation.
P3: Max Range in X-Negative Direction
P4: Max Range in X-Positive Direction
P5: Max Range in Z-Negative Direction
P6: Max Range in Z-Positive Direction
P117: Max Range in C(Y)-Negative Direction
P118: Max Range in C(Y)-Positive Direction
P215: Max Range in A-Negative Direction
P216: Max Range in A-Positive Direction
P316: Max Range in B-Negative Direction
P317: Max Range in B-Positive Direction
Note: when shift Metric/Inch, unit is changed(mm/inch), data for limitation don’t change.

- 122 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

5.7.1.2 External Switch for limitation

Input Point of Limitation
Mark Port Explanation
-L PIN15_CN3 Plug Limitation in negative direction
+L PIN16 _CN3 Plug Limitation in positive direction
Type of Limitation Switch
In Axis parameter:
P21, Type of switch in Positive direction [0: NO type, 1: NC Type]
P22, Type of switch in Negative direction [0: NO type, 1: NC Type]
Wiring of Limitation
NPN Type Proximity Switch General Switch

5.7.1.3 Suggestion Usage

Fix hardware limitation switch within the range of sets by software-limitation,
P11=00000001; even if hardware switches don’t work, software-limit also will work, double safe
for limitation,
Note: 1. When limitation switch is NO type(normal open type) switch,use parallel connection; when limitation
switch is NC type(normal close type) switch, use series connection.
2. CNC system could define X0&Z0 as limitation of X/Z axis. X0 signal as limitation and home of X axis,
controlled by one switch. Z0 signal as the limitation and home of Z axis, also controlled by one switch.It needs
to restore our special PLC ladder into CNC system.
2.1 Limitation in negative or positive direction of X axis use one input port , -L ;
2.2 Limitation in negative or positive direction of Z axis use one input port , +L ;
In Axis parameter:
P21, Type of Switch in X direction [0: NO type, 1: NC Type]
P22, Type of Switch in Z direction [0: NO type, 1: NC Type]
5.7.1.4 External Switch for Power ON/OFF
It needs to use one contactor(KM1) & two switches for turn on & turn off power, one is NO
type, which is for turn on power, another is NC type, which is for turn off power.

Fig5.4 Wiring Diagram for Power ON/OFF

- 123 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

5.8 Diagnosis
Press "Diagnosis" key or press "Parameter"key twice one the panel to enter the diagnosis
interface.
Press "F2" & "PgDn/PgUp"or " " to check the status of inputs and outputs.

Fig5.8.1 System Diagnosis Interface(Input signal)

Fig5.8.2 System Diagnosis Interface(output signal)

In diagnosis interface of I/O , "0" means invalid status, "1" means valid status.

- 124 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Press "F3" key diagnosis screen to enter interface of check condition of PLC.

Fig5.8.3 Condition of Inner Register & IOs

Press "PgDn", "PgUp" , "Up arrow" , "Down Arrow" to check condition of inner registers &
outputs & inputs.
"Green" means the register is valid, "Red" means the register is invalid.
Press "F5" key on diagnosis screen to enter interface of edit ladder of PLC.

Fig5.8.4 Editing Screen of Inner Ladder

Press "S" key on these interfaces to activate search function. After finish ladder & save, it will
work after reboot.

- 125 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Press "R" key on condition screen of PLC, PLC will work immediately & no needs to reboot.
Note: when P1 in Password parameter set to Disable, and then user can check & edit inner ladder.

Fig5.8.5 System Diagnosis Interface(Alarm messages)

Spindle encode check:0 ,shows current resolution of SP_encoder;
1,[Current Alarm]:NO, shows current alarm condition of machine tool
Following shows history alarm messages.[Press Del key to clear alarm messages]
5.9 Programming Operation
Press "Program" to enter into status of Programming as following.

Program
List Current selecting
file/folder

Function
Keys
Fig5.9.1 Interface of Program

- 126 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Management of program adopt mode of file/folder management, storage room of SZGH CNC
system is 128Mb, there is no limitation about quantity of programs.
At program list,press "PgDn/PgUp"or " , " to select program/file.and then press "Enter" to
enter current program.
Name Function
New/Sek Press "F1" key to New/Search a program
COPY Press "F2"key to Copy selecting program(System USB-disk)
RENAM Press "F3" key to Rename current selecting program
INFOR Press "F4" key to hints size of program& remain space of system
LAST Press "F5" key to return to last level
USB-disk Press "F6" key to open USB-disk
EXEC Press "F7" key to execute current program
CANCEL Press "F8" key to cancel or return
Compile-P Press "P" key to compile current program
Receive-R Press "R" key" to receive file from PC with RS232-DNC
Transmit-T Send file to PC with RS232-DNC
DNC-L Open function of RS232-DNC between PC & CNC

5.9.1 Editing
Press "F1"key and popup a dialog box to input the name of program, if the name is existing,
the existing program is called up; If the name isn’t existing, the system will build a new program.
The name of program could be number, letter or mix, the length is 100 bits.
Build a new program or select a program and press "Enter" to entering the editing
interface.Press "F7" button to shift to function interface.

Fig5.9.2 (1)Editing interface of Program

- 127 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Fig5.9.3 (2)Editing interface of Program

Note:The name of all files don’t allow same & blank.
The screen prompt the editing program name at the top left corner in the editing status; The
left is the content, the right is the information for status, the operation in the editing status as
follows:
(1) Location of current cursor:
Press "↑↓←→" to move the cursor to any position of program content
Press "PgUp" key to the last page.
Press "PgDn" key to the next page.
(2) Character Modification: Delete the character at the position of the cursor, then enter the new
character.
(3) Character Insertion: Enter a new direct character at the cursor position. When the input is the
letter,the letter in front of automatically generating space. If you want to enter a space, first enter a
letter, and then delete this letter.
(4) Character Deletion: Press "Del" directly at the cursor position
(5) Inset a line: Press "Enter" directly, inset a line in front of the current line if the cursor is at the
first line, otherwise insert a line after the current line.
(6)Function keys operation:
First Function Keys
Superposition Function
F1 Compile current program
F2 Cursor jump to first line or last line
F3 Teaching function, enter status of Handwheel;Press X/Z/Y/C/A key to
shift selecting axis, and press “F3” key to read & set value of current
coordinate system.
F4 Cursor jump to the specified line
F5 Null
- 128 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

F6 Delete current block.

F7 Shift first function keys & second function keys
F8 Cancel
Second Function Keys
F1 Delete specified blocks from current line to input line
F2 Copy specified blocks from input begin line to input last line
F3 Array all blocks of current program
F4 Search specified characters from cursor line to end line
F5 Replace 1st specified characters from cursor line to end line
F6 Replace all specified characters from cursor line to end line
F7 Shift first function keys & second function keys
F8 Cancel
5.9.2 Copy
Press "↑ ↓" in main interface of Program, to select the program which need to copy and
press "F2" to popup a dialog box to import a new name of program, to copy which is the same
content but different name , in order to modify, rename and spare.
5.9.3 Delete
Press "↑ ↓" in main interface of Program, to select program which need to delete and press
"Del" key to delete the program.
Note: The operation of delete need to be careful, it can’t be recovery once deleted.
5.9.4 Rename
Press "↑ ↓" in main interface of Program, to select program which need to rename and
press "F3" to popup a dialog box to import a new name.
5.9.5 Information
Press "↑ ↓" in main interface of Program, to select program which need to check and press
"F4"key to popup a dialog box to check the size of current program and remain space of system.
5.9.6 Compile
Press "↑ ↓" in main interface of Program, to select program and press "P",or Press "F1" key
on editing interface of program, the system will check the format and grammar of program.
Prompting when finding mistake automatically.
Note: Before run program, it should compile successfully.
5.9.7 Folder management
User can build a folder in this system, Press "F1" in main interface of Program to import a
name of folder ,add "." , and press "Enter"to build a folder and it will prompt a "[夹]" after the
name.
Note: the name of folder must be different to name of other file/folder,otherwise failure.
Move the cursor to the folder and press "Enter" to open folder , user also can build a new file
or folder in this folder.
Press "F5" key go to the last folder.
Move the cursor to the folder and press "Del" to delete the folder.
5.9.8 Execute Program
Press "↑ ↓" in main interface of Program to select a program and press "F7" to select the
processing program and switch into main interface of cnc system.
5.9.9 Communication
The system could deliver files with RS232 serial protocol .

- 129 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

There are two communication port for RS232 at front & rear of panel.
Remark PIN Function
RXD PIN2 of DB9 Port of Front panel(under USB port ) Receive Date
TXD PIN3 of DB9 Port of Front panel(under USB port ) Send Date
0V PIN5 of DB9 Port of Front panel(under USB port ) Ground
Delivery (Transmit)
Deliver the selected program in this system to another system or to PC for save. Press "↑ ↓"
in main interface of Program to select the program and press "T" to deliver, press "Reset" to
interrupt delivery.
Reception
Receive the selected program in another system or PC (Must be text file form). Press "R" to
import a name of received program into the dialog box in main interface of Program , press "Reset"
to interrupt reception.
Note: 1. Using the exclusive communication software to deliver program in User’s PC.
2. The rate of deliver of both PC&CNC must be the same,otherwise failure easily.P37 in Other
parameter is set the rate of CNC system.
3. The length of RS232 can’t over 10 meters.
4. The number of serial port must be the same as the system setting.
5. Editing program of PC must be text file form.
5.9.10 U-disk management
To exchange files of parameter or programs with other system or PC by U-disk. It also can
upgrade or back-up the software or parameter in system.
Note: The name of folder can’t have blank symbols.
Suggestion: Please prepare special USB-disk for manage files for CNC system.
We prepare one special USB-disk for user, which includes user manual & related software.
Press "F6"-USB-disk to enter the U-disk in main interface after U-disk is connected to USB
port in the front of panel. Press "F6"-SYSTM again to back interface of system.

Fig5.9.4 Main Interface of USB-disk

- 130 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

5.9.10.1 Function Keys of USB-disk

Name Function
F1-Backup Press "F1" key to backup files of system to current directory of U-disk
F2-Restore Press "F2"key to restore files at current directory of U-disk into system
F3-Export Press "F3" key to export/copy file of system to U-disk
F4-Import Press "F4" key to import/copy current file of U-disk to system
F5-LAST Press "F5" key to return to last level
F6-SYSTM Press "F6" key to return back to system,also exit USB-disk
F7-EXEC Press "F7" key to execute current program at U-disk
F8-CANCEL Press "F8" key to cancel or return
Compile-P Press "P" key to compile current program
Input-R Press "R" key to copy all files of U-disk to system
Output-T Press "T" key to copy all files of system to U-disk
DNC-L Open function of RS232-DNC between PC & CNC

5.9.10.2 Management of Processing Program

Copy the files or folder of U-disk into system
After connecting U-disk, press "F6" key to enter the U-disk directory in main interface of
Program. Press "↑ ↓" to move cursor to select file or folder to copy and press "F4" key to popup
a dialog box to import name, press "Enter" to confirm. If there is the same name of program in the
system, it will popup a dialog box to ask if cover the file or folder or not.
Press "R" to copy all the program in U-disk into system.
Copy the files or folder of system into U-disk
Press "↑ ↓" to move cursor to select file or folder that needs to copy to U-disk, and then
press "F6" key, press "F3" key to popup a dialog box to import name in U-disk interface and press
"Enter" to confirm. If there is the same name of program in the system, it will popup a dialog box
to ask if cover the file/folder or not.
Press "T" key to copy all the program in system to USB.
Note: 1. It must return to program directory of system, also exit U-disk by press "F6" key before
unplugging U-disk, otherwise the date which is copied just now will be lost.
2. The name of folder can’t have blank symbol when using U-disk.

- 131 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

5.9.10.3 Management of Parameters & Software

User can use U-disk to deliver parameters files , system software , for upgrade and renew,
back-up files and parameters of CNC system
A) Backup inner files & PLC files of system to U-disk
Note: Prepare a special empty U-disk for manage parameter files & PLC files of system better as
Parameter files is lots of about several dozens, Or setup a folder in U-disk on your computer firstly, open the
folder of U-disk on system before backup parameter files & PLC files into the folder of U-disk.

Insert U-disk to system, Press

"Program" , And then press "F6" key
to enter directory of USB-disk

Selecting folder(SZGH-CNC990TDB-2)
and "Enter" to enter the folder, Press "F1"
key to Backup, input password & Enter

Press "Enter" key, wait for seconds, it

will backup successfully, Press "F6" key
to exit U-disk & return back to system

Fig5.9.5 Steps of Backup PLC & Parameter to U-disk

B) Restore parameters & PLC files into system with U-disk(Upgrade)
Note: Please put parameters & PLC for upgrade to a folder, which is better to avoid restore wrong files in
U-disk into CNC system, and result to damage inner files & system.

Insert U-disk to system, Press

"Program" , And then press "F6" key
to enter directory of USB-disk

Selecting folder(SZGH-CNC990TDB-2)
and "Enter" to enter the folder, Press "F2"
key to restore, input password & Enter

Press "Enter" key, wait for seconds, it

will hint restore successfully, Press "F6"
key to exit U-disk & reboot system

Fig5.9.6 Steps of Restore PLC & Parameter to U-disk

- 132 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Chapter 6 Parameter List

At any status conditions, press "Parameter" to enter interface of parameter.

Fig6.1 Parameter List

Remark Function
F1-User Press "F1" key to enter User Parameter screen
F2-Speed Press "F2" key to enter Speed Parameter screen
F3-axis Press "F3" key to enter Axis Parameter screen
F4-Tool Press "F4" key to enter Tool Parameter screen
F5-Other Press "F5" key to enter Other Parameter screen
F6-Coor Press "F6" key to enter Coordinate Parameter screen
F7-PASSWD Press "F7" key to enter Password Parameter screen
F8-CANCEL Press "F8" key to exit parameter list
After enter Parameter interface & select kind of parameter list, press " Down arrow ", "Up
arrow", "PgDn", "PgUp" to select one parameter that need to alter, Press "Enter" enter key , popup
dialog box,after alter well, press "Enter" for ensure parameter is set well.
Note: 1.Yellow cursor means current Parameter kind & Parameter Number.
2.The version of Parameter List is V21.04.

- 133 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

6.1 User Parameter

P Parameter Ex-Value
1 (^d)Depth of Cutting in G71/G72[Radius Designation] (10um) 50
2 (e)Escaping Amount in G71/G72[Radius Designation](10um) 10
3 Function Bit parameter of G71/G72/G73 00000001000000001
4 (^u)X_Distance&Direction of finishing allowance of G71/G72/G73 (10um) 20
5 (^w)Z_Distance&Direction of finishing allowance of G71/G72/G73 (10um) 20
6 (d)The number of division in G73 1
7 (^i)X_Distance and direction of relief of G73[Radius Designation] (10um) 10
8 (^k)Z_Distance and direction of relief of G73(10um) 10
9 (^k)Depth of Cut in Z direction of G74/G75(10um) [Without Sign] 50
10 (e)Return Amount of G74/G75(10um) [Radius Designation] 10
11 (m)Repetitive Count in Finishing of G76 1
12 (r)Chamfering amount of G76(1/10 lead) 10
13 (a)Angle of tool tip in G76(degree) [0～180°] 60
14 (^dmin)Minimum Cutting Depth of G76(10um) [Radius Designation] 20
15 (d)Finishing allowance of G76(10um) 10
16 Programming mode of X axis [1: Radius,0: Diameter] 0
17 Interlock between Running Program & SP-Rotating [1:Yes, 0:No] 0
17-1 Interlock between Running Program & SP_Chuck[1:Yes, 0:No] 0
18 Times of auto-cycle running(M20)[<0: Endless Loop] -1
20 Length of chamfering in G92(1/10 lead) 0
21 Dwell between G01/G02/G03 blocks(ms)[>100] 0
22 Dwell between G00 blocks (ms)[>100] 0
23 Acceleration/Deceleration Constant of Handwheel [50-100] 70
24 Q( d)infeed times in G76 [8:Times of rough cutting] 1
33 Type of Detect SP_Speed Reached(0:M69 Relay, 8:SP_Encoder) 1
34 Allow error of SP_Speed that detected by SP_Encoder(RPM) 1
200 Waiting time to screen-saver [>=2minutes] 1
201 Delay time before detect zero pulse when threading(ms)[>100] 1
202 System inner parameter
203 Inspect overcut when tool radius offset (2131970:Yes, 34818:No, 6326274: Pre-read) 23103490
206 G21-Metric/G20-Inch Mode(512:Metric, 1024: Inch, other: G20/G21) 512
210 Type of Graphic display area(8:manual,other:Automatic) 1
211 Display X-axis Negative area (1:Yes, 0: No) 1
212 Display X-axis Positive area (1:Yes, 0: No) 1
213 Display Y-axis Negative area (1:Yes, 0: No) 1
214 Display Y-axis Positive area (1:Yes, 0: No) 1
215 Display Z-axis Negative area (1:Yes, 0: No) 1
216 Display Z-axis Positive area (1:Yes, 0: No) 1
230 Running program through input point (+4+8+16+32+64+128: X26-X31) 1
231 Mode of "Delete" key [0:backward deletion,1:Forward delete] 0
232 Detect SP_Zero position before tapping [18:Yes,0:No] 18
233 G06 Circle teaching function[0:No, 1:Yes] 1
234 Activate Program Back Function with Handwheel[+8:Yes, Other: No] 1
235 Automatically generate comments when teaching [0:Yes,1:No] 0
236 Type of Arc code when Teach-in[0:G5/G6 IJK,1:G2/G3 R] 0
237 Mode of Generate G code in Teach_In[0:Normal,1:G01] 0
238 Auto Insert one line in middle line during Teach_In[0:Yes,1:Alter] 0
307 M18xx/M28xx/WAT alarm time(ms)[>=10] 1
400 Translate DXF file to G code[1:Sequencing,4:Start point ,8:No sequencing] 0
401 DXF_X-axis coordinate of Start Point 0
402 DXF_Y-axis coordinate of Start Point 0

- 134 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

500 G74 equal to ProgramG No.[101-170(101-150Modeless,151-170Mode)] 0

501 G81 equal to ProgramG No.[101-170(101-150Modeless,151-170Mode)] 0
502 G82 equal to ProgramG No.[101-170(101-150Modeless,151-170Mode)] 0
503 G83 equal to ProgramG No.[101-170(101-150Modeless,151-170Mode)] 0
504 G84 equal to ProgramG No.[101-170(101-150Modeless,151-170Mode)] 0
551 Machine structure of 5 Axes CNC machine tool(10-99) 1
552 Reverse direction of compensation with RTCP function (BX+4;BZ+8;AY+16;AZ+32) 1
553 Y-Axis machine coordinate value on A-axis rotary center(um) 1
554 Z-Axis machine coordinate value on A-axis rotary center(um) 1
555 Length of tool when measure rotary center of A-axis(um) 1
556 X-Axis machine coordinate value on C-axis rotary center(P551=12) 0
557 AC Axis offset of tool return Transformation of AC Axis (um) 0
600 Internal multiplier of non-G00 instruction[>=20 valid] 105
Explanation about User Parameter(processing parameter)
1,(^d)Depth of Cutting in G71/G72[Radius Designation](10um)
It is set for every default infeed in X-axis direction when W( d) isn’t specified in G71 code,
radius designation; unit:0.01mm.
It is also set for every default infeed in Z-axis direction when it isn’t set in G72 code;
unit:0.01mm

2,(e)Escaping Amount in G71/G72[Radius Designation](10um)

It is set for every default backward (radius) in X-axis direction when it isn’t be set in G71
code;unit:0.01mm. And it is set for every default backward in Z-axis direction when it isn’t be set
in G72 code;unit:0.01mm.

3,Function Bit parameter of G71/G72/G73

D2: do finishing automatically for G71/G72/G73. 1:Yes ; 0: No finishing.
D3: X-axis rapid feeding for G74/G75
D4: Z-axis rapid feeding for G74/G75
D5: Automatically judge feeding/escaping direction of G71/G72/G73 commands
D6: Auto feeding point
D7: Don’t return to starting point when G70
D8: Allowance is more than radius of tools when G41/G42.

4,(^u)X_Distance&Direction of finishing allowance of G71/G72/G73(10um)

It is set for every default remain of smoothing(diameter) in X-axis direction when it isn’t be
set in G71/G72/G73 code;unit:0.01mm.

5,(^w)Z_Distance&direction of finishing allowance of G71/G72/G73(10um)

It is set for every default remain of smoothing(diameter) in Z-axis direction when it isn’t be
set in G71/G72/G73 code;unit:0.01mm.

6,(d)The number of division in G73

It is for default cycle times when it isn’t be set in G73 code.

- 135 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

7,(^i)X_Distance and direction of relief of G73[Radius Designation](10um)

It is for default rough thickness of X axis when it isn’t be set in G73 code.

8,(^k)Z_Distance and direction of relief of G73(10um)

It is for default rough thickness of Z axis when it isn’t be set in G73 code.

9,(^k)Depth of Cut in Z direction of G74/G75(10um) [Without Sign]

It is for each default infeed in Z-axis direction when it isn’t be set in G74;
It is for every default infeed (radius) in X-axis direction when it isn’t be set in G75 code;

10,(e)Return Amount of G74/G75(10um) [Radius Designation]

It is for every default retract in Z-axis direction when it isn’t be set in G74 code;
It is for every default retract (radius) in X-axis direction when it isn’t be set in G75
code;unit:0.01mm.

11,(m)Repetitive Count in Finishing of G76

It is for default cycle times when it isn’t be set in G76 code.(times:1-99)

12,(r)Chamfering amount of G76(1/10 lead)

It is for default length of retract chamfer when it isn’t be set in G76 code.the length is 1/10 of
thread lead.

13,(a)Angle of tool tip in G76(degree) [0～180°]

It is for default angle of thread tooth when it isn’t be set in G76 code.unit:degree.

14,(^dmin)Minimum Cutting Depth of G76(10um) [Radius Designation]

It is for set minimal cutting depth (radius) of G76.Unit:0.1mm

15,(d)Finishing allowance of G76(10um)

It is for default remaining of finish turn when it isn’t be set in G76 code.

16,Programming mode of X axis [1 mean Radius,0 mean Diameter]

There are two programming modes ,when it set as 1 that means radius programming
mode,when set as 0 means that diameter programming mode

17,Interlock between Running Program & SP-Rotating [1 mean Yes,0 mean No]
It is for interlock between run program and run spindle,when set as 1means that running
program with running spindle;when set as 0 means that running program without check spindle
running.
17-1,Interlock between Running Program & SP_Chuck[1 mean Yes,0 mean No]
It is for interlock between run program and spindle chuck is tightening, when set as 1 means
that running program with chuck is tightening, input point is M14, PIN24_CN10 plug;when set as
0 means that running program without check condition of chuck.

- 136 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

18,Times of auto-cycle running(M20)

It is for times of run M20 code in the program,negative number mean run countless times.

19, Mode of Program Dry Run

2:Stop at current block; 4: Skip one block automatically, +32: holding press “start” key,
running program, release press key, stop running; +512: start from current block

20,Length of chamfering in G92(1/10 lead)

It is for set default length(width) of quit and retract,the length=thread lead * 0.1.

21,Dwell between G01/G02/G03 blocks(ms)[>100]

It is for set delay time between G01/G02/G03,it is for solve the over-cutting in the corner.

22,Dwell between G00 blocks (ms)[>100]

It is for set delay time after run G00 ,it is effective that more than 100ms.

23,Acceleration/Deceleration Constant of Handwheel [50-100]

It is for set the constant of handwheel smoothly acc/dec-eleration. the smaller it is,the faster
the acc/dec-eleration is,but much vibration.

24,Q( d)infeed times in G76 [8 mean times of rough cutting]

It is for set the define of Q in G76,set as "8",it is the times of feeding in roughing.

33,Type of Detect SP_Speed Reached(0:M69 Relay, 8:SP_Encoder)

It sets the type of detect SP_Speed reached. 0 means that detect if M69(inner register of plc
ladder) input is valid; 1 means that system detect spindle encoder for ensure spindle speed is
reached.

34,Allow error of SP_Speed that detected by SP_Encoder(RPM)

It sets the allowable error of coding speed(S) & encoder feedback speed . Unit: rpm.

200,Waiting time to screen-saver [>=2minutes]

It is the time that enter protection screen when system stay in main screen and without
dialog,don’t enter screen protection if less than 2 minutes,press any keys to return back.

201,Delay time before detect zero pulse when threading(ms)[>100]

It is for set delay time before check Z pulse when process screw.

202, System inner parameter, cannot be altered.

203,Inspect overcut when tool radius offset (2131970:Yes, 34818:No,6326274:Pre-read)
It is set for if inspect overcut when tool radius offset(G41/G42), when set to 2131970: yes,
inspect; when set to 34818,don’t inspect; when set 6326274,fast pre-read blocks.

- 137 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

206,G21-Metric/G20-Inch Mode(512:Metric, 1024: Inch, other: G20/G21)

It sets programming mode about Metric or Inch mode, 512: Programming with Metric, 1024:
Programming with Inch mode, Other values: Metric/Inch mode are shifted by G20/G21

210,Type of Graphic display area(8:manual,other:Automatic)

It set the type of graphic display area, when set to 8, the graphic display area is set
manually,& related parameter; when set to others, cnc system will adjust graphic display area
automatically.

211,Display X-axis Negative area (1:Yes, 0: No)

212,Display X-axis Positive area (1:Yes, 0: No)
213,Display Y-axis Negative area (1:Yes, 0: No)
214,Display Y-axis Positive area (1:Yes, 0: No)
215,Display Z-axis Negative area (1:Yes, 0: No)
216,Display Z-axis Positive area (1:Yes, 0: No)
P210-P216 are set for if that CNC system display related area when type of graphic display
area is manual.

230,Running program through input point (+4+8+16+32+64+128: X26-X31)

CNC system support run processing program by input points , +4+8+16+32+64+128, also
D2-D7[22-27]: related input points is X26-X31, +256+512+1024+2048+4096+8192+16384
+32768 , also D8-D15 [28-215] : related input points is X16-X23.
Example: When P230=+4+8=12, inputs of X26 or X27 is valid, CNC system will running
program of "X26"/"HIDEFILEX26" or "X27"/ "HIDEFILEX27".

231,Mode of "Delete" key [0:backward deletion,1:Forward delete]

It sets the mode of "Del" , delete key, when set to 0, press "Del" key, system will delete
backward word , when set to 1, Press "Del" key, system will delete forward word.

232,Detect SP_Zero position before tapping [18:Yes,0:No]

It is set for that if system needs to detect zero position of spindle encoder when tapping.

233,G06 Circle teaching function[0:No, 1:Yes]

It sets if system use G06 circle teaching function, 0 means no use; 1 means yes, use this
function.

234,Activate Program Back Function with Handwheel[+8:Yes, Other: No]

It sets if system activate program return back function that back to front processing blocks
with handwheel on Auto Handwheel condition.
Note:Press Auto & Handwheel keys enter this processing condition. Press Handwheel key again exit
this processing condition.

235,Automatically generate comments when teaching [0:Yes,1:No]

It sets for if generate comments automatically when user adopt teach-in function, 0: Yes,

- 138 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

CNC will generate comments automatically when record of Teach-in.

236,Type of Arc code when Teach-in[0:G5/G6 IJK,1:G2/G3 R]

It sets type of G code format for arc when user adopt Teach-in function, 0: when arc during
teach-in, use G5/G6 & IJK format; 1: G2/G3 & R format.

237,Mode of Generate G code in Teach_In[0:Normal,1:G01]

It sets mode of generate G code in Teach-in function, 0:Normal, 1: Generate G01 in each one
linear movement.

238,Auto Insert one line in middle line during Teach_In[0:Yes,1:Alter]

It sets if insert one line automatically when do teach-in during middle line,0:Yes, insert one
line automatically, 1:alter current middle line.

307,M18xx/M28xx/WAT alarm time(ms)[>=10]

It sets max waiting time for M18xx/M28xx, when over max time,CNC will hints alarm.unit is
ms. Example set to 100 (>=10), also 1000ms, when M1810 code,detect X10 is on within 1000ms,
otherwise CNC hints alarm.

400,Translate DXF file to G code[1:Sequencing,4:Start point ,8:No sequencing]

401,DXF_X-axis coordinate of Start Point
402,DXF_Y-axis coordinate of Start Point
1)When P400=1, CNC will make sequencing according to start/end point of dxf file
2)When P400=4, After make sequencing according to according to start/end point of dxf file,
and compare distance with starting point(P401&P402),starting from nearest point.
3) When P400=8, CNC doesn’t make sequencing automatically. When use Auto-CAD to
make drawing & generate dxf file, we need to take care of sequence of drawing, as dxf files are
saved with drawing sequence.So CNC generate G code files also according to this sequence.
Note: Current CNC only can transfer 2D dxf file to G code program.

500,G74 equal to ProgramG No.[101-170(101-150Modeless,151-170Mode)]

501,G81 equal to ProgramG No.[101-170(101-150Modeless,151-170Mode)]
502,G82 equal to ProgramG No.[101-170(101-150Modeless,151-170Mode)]
503,G83 equal to ProgramG No.[101-170(101-150Modeless,151-170Mode)]
504,G84 equal to ProgramG No.[101-170(101-150Modeless,151-170Mode)]
These parameters are for user define corresponding G codes for G74-G84.Which is for select
Non-mode/mode status,and user-defined.

P551~P557, RTCP function is valid if turning-milling system & 5 Axes CNC lathe system.

600,Internal multiplier of non-G00 instruction[>=20 valid]

It is set inner rate of G codes except G00.It is valid only when its value is >=20.

- 139 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

6.2 Speed parameter

P Parameter EX-Value
1 G00 Speed of X-axis (mm/min) 6000.000
2 G00 Speed of Z-axis (mm/min) 6000.000
3 Manual Max Feeding Speed(mm/min) 10000.000
3-1 X_Manual Max Feeding Speed(mm/min) 0
3-2 Y_Manual Max Feeding Speed(mm/min) 0
3-3 Z_Manual Max Feeding Speed(mm/min) 0
3-4 A_Manual Max Feeding Speed(mm/min) 0
3-5 B_Manual Max Feeding Speed(mm/min) 0
4 Auto Max Feeding Speed(mm/min) 15000.000
5 Default Speed of G01/G02/G03 (mm/min) 2000.000
6 Running Speed at Simulation Mode (mm/min) 10000.000
7 Manual Feeding Speed(mm/min) 100.00
8 Manual Spindle Speed (rpm) 200.00
9 Beginning Speed of Feeding Axes (mm/min)[>1] 500
10 Max Speed Increment of Feeding Axes (mm/min)[>1] 500
11 Limit G01/G02/G03 Speed of each axis [1:Yes, 0:No] 0
12 Max Speed of X_G1/G2/G3 (mm/min) 2000
13 Max Speed of Z_G1/G2/G3 (mm/min) 2000
14 X_Acceleration/Deceleration Constant [1～99999] 50000
15 Z_Acceleration/Deceleration Constant [1～99999] 50000
16 Acceleration/Deceleration Constant When Auto Run 2
17 Handwheel_Acceleration/Deceleration Constant [500--30000] 6000
18 Handwheel_Acceleration/Deceleration Constant when dry [>500] 60000
19 G00 Speed when dry (mm/min) [>10] 1500
19-1 Start speed when dray with handwheel(mm/min)[>5] 100
20 X_Max Speed with Handwheel (mm/min) 2000
21 Z_Max Speed with Handwheel (mm/min) 2000
22 Z_Acceleration/Deceleration Constant when threading 0.000
23 X_Acceleration/Deceleration Constant when threading 0.000
24 Ratio of Retired Speed in X-axis Servo when threading 4000
25 Beginning Speed of Retired in X-axis Step when threading 150
26 Max Retired Speed in X-axis Step when threading 6000
27 Type of Acceleration/Deceleration [0 mean line,8 mean curve] 0
28 Initial Acceleration/Deceleration Constant when curve [>=10] 100
29 Quadratic Acceleration/Deceleration Constant when curve [>=10] 500
30 Max Acceleration/Deceleration Constant when curve [>=500] 1
31 X_Homing Speed (mm/min) 2500.000
32 X_Speed for detect Z0 signal (mm/min) 250.000
33 Z_Homing Speed (mm/min) 2500.000
34 Z_Speed for detect Z0 signal (mm/min) 250.000
35 Min Speed of spindle when G96 (rpm) 1
36 Max Speed of 1st Spindle (rpm) 3000
37 Max Speed of Spindle at 2nd gear (rpm) 3000
38 Max Speed of Spindle at 3rd gear (rpm) 3000
39 Max Speed of Spindle at 4th gear (rpm) 3000
40 Max Speed of 2nd Spindle (rpm) 3000
41 Compensation Mode of Arc Backlash (0: A, 8: B) 8
42 Compensation Speed in B Mode (mm/min) 3000
42-1 Beginning Compensation Speed in B Mode (mm/min) 500
42-2 Acceleration/Deceleration Constant in B mode (mm/min/s) 60000
43 Handwheel_Stopping Speed (mm/min)[>100] 100
- 140 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

49 Activate Speed Processing Function[1:Yes, 0:No] 0

49-1 Stopping speed when reverse deceleration during running(mm/min) 200
50 Handwheel Stop Speed(mm/min)[>100] 100
51 SP_Speed when exit at following tapping mode(rpm)[>1] 2
52 SP_Reverse Backlash Compensation when tapping(Pulse) 1
53 Advance Retired Value before reverse rotation of following tapping(um)[10-5000] 1
54 Retired Speed when tapping (mm/min)[>=60] 1
58 Beginning Speed when hardware limitation (mm/min) 1.000
60 Use smooth processing function(+4:Manual,+8:MPG,+16:Program) 28
61 Time constant of smooth processing on Manual[2-500] 50
62 Time constant of smooth processing on MPG[2-500] 0
63 Time constant of smooth processing on Program[2-500] 0
65 Manual enhancement smoothing processing time constant [2-50] 0
66 Handwheel enhancement smoothing processing time constant [2-50] 0
67 Program enhancement smoothing processing time constant [2-50] 0
68 Grade of smoothing process [1-9](Bigger, higher smooth) 0
101 X_Beginning Speed (mm/min)[>1] 500
102 Y_Beginning Speed (mm/min)[>1] 500
103 Z_Beginning Speed (mm/min)[>1] 500
104 A_Beginning Speed (mm/min)[>1] 500
105 B_Beginning Speed (mm/min)[>1] 500
111 X_Max Speed Increment (mm/min)[>1] 500
112 Y_Max Speed Increment (mm/min)[>1] 500
113 Z_Max Speed Increment (mm/min)[>1] 500
114 A_Max Speed Increment (mm/min)[>1] 500
115 B_Max Speed Increment (mm/min)[>1] 500
200 Coherent movement is valid for G00[1:No,16:Yes] 1
210 Wait SP_Speed smooth when threading 0
211 SP_Starting Speed_Tapping-Feed(rpm) 1
212 SP_Starting Speed_Tapping-Extract(rpm) 1
213 Acceleration-Feed-Rigid Tapping(rpm/S)[>1] 1
214 Acceleration-Retreat-Rigid Tapping(rpm/S)[>1] 1
215 Reserve-Feed-Rigid Tapping(1/1000Rev)[>2] 1
216 Trailing-Feed-Rigid Tapping(1/1000Rev)[>2] 1
217 Reserve-Retreat-Rigid Tapping(1/1000rev)[>2] 1
218 Trailing-Retreat-Rigid Tapping(1/1000rev)[>2] 1
219 Time Constant of Smooth processing for rigid tapping[20002-20500] 1
230 G00 Speed of SP-axis (mm/min) 1000
231 Mode for SP-axis[+4:F,+8:G90/G91,+16:Pulse] 10
232 Orientation Direction of SP-axis[0:Pos,1:Neg,2:near] 2
233 Control Mode of SP_homing 0
234 Offset Degrees when SP_Orientation(0.1Deg)[Neg:Non-Orientation] 0
235 SP_Homing Speed(0.1 rpm) 800

Explanation about Speed Parameter:

1,G00 Speed of X-axis (mm/min) 2,G00 Speed of Z-axis (mm/min)
It is rapid speed(also speed of G00) of X/Z axis,Max is 240000(unit:mm/min)
Attention: the value depends on machine configuration,set wrong is very easy to trouble machine tool &
accident.

3,Manual Max Feeding Speed(mm/min)

It is the max feeding speed in the condition of Manual , Unit:mm/min.
Attention: reference speed=G00 speed*0.5 ,in order to make sure safe.
- 141 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

P3-1,P3-2,P3-3,P3-4,P3-5 are set manual max feeding speed of each axis alone.
4,Auto Max Feeding Speed(mm/min)
It is the max of feeding speed in Auto ,Max is 30000.Unit:mm/min. This speed could faster
than G00 speed in order to each axis can reach at max speed when linkage as it only limit
integrated speed.

5,Default Speed of G01/G02/G03 (mm/min)

It is the default speed of G01/G02/G03 when the speed of first interpolation code
(G01/G02/G03) isn’t specified in Auto-running. Max:5000 (unit:mm/min)

6,Running Speed at Simulation Mode (mm/min)

It is running speed at the mode of Simulation. (press "Simulate",is dry run mode) Max:240000.
(unit:mm/min)

7,Manual Feeding Speed(mm/min)

It is the speed of feeding axis in Manual.Range:< max feeding speed
Attention:in Manual mode, press "F" key ,can set the parameter directly.

8,Manual Spindle Speed (rpm)

It is set for speed of spindle in mode of manual. Unit:rpm.
Attention:in Manual,press "S" key ,can set the parameter directly.

9,Beginning Speed of Feeding axes (mm/min)[>1]

It is beginning speed of feeding axis when acceleration/deceleration.when it is smaller than
acceleration/deceleration, accelerate/decelerate of speed start from the beginning feed speed.
when it is bigger than acceleration/deceleration, the speed reached at setting speed directly. Unit:
mm/min. P101~P104 are set for each axis alone.
Attention:Generally,stepper system<=100,servo system<=500.

10,Max Speed Increment (mm/min) of Feeding axes [>1]

It is max speed increment when multi-axial running track-interpolation. Also max changing
value of speed. P111~P114 are set for each axis alone.
Example:when it is 300,the speed of feeding axis(multi-axial track-interpolation)up from
F800 to F1600,800(=1600-800)>300,so the process is up from F800 to F1100,and then F1600.

11,Limit G01/G02/G03 Speed of each axis [1:Yes, 0:No]

It is set for whether limit speed of each axis when G1/G2/G3 interpolating.

12,Max Speed of X_G1/G2/G3 (mm/min)

It is for the Max running speed of X-axis when G1/G2/G3 interpolation.

13,Max Speed of Z_G1/G2/G3 (mm/min)

It is for the Max running speed of Z-axis when G1/G2/G3 interpolation.

- 142 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

14,X_Acceleration/Deceleration Constant [1～99999]

It is time constant of X-axis acceleration/deceleration, the bigger it is ,the faster acceleration
/deceleration is.
Attention:This value depends on the machine structure,the heavier the load is ,the smaller the value
is.With stepper system,the value should less than 15000.

15,Z_Acceleration/Deceleration Constant [1～99999]

It is time constant of Z-axis acc/dec-eleration, the bigger it is ,the faster the ace/dec-eleration
is.
Attention:This value depends on the machine structure,the heavier the load is ,the smaller the value is.With
stepper system,the value should less than 15000.

16,Acceleration/Deceleration Constant When Auto Run [1-500]

It is for set constant of acc/dec-eleration in auto.the range is 1-500.It is mainly for distinguish
Auto and Manual,only the difference is too much,set it is effective.

17,Handwheel_Acceleration/Deceleration Constant [500--32000]

It is for set constant of acc/dec-eleration of Handwheel.the range is 500-32000.
18,Handwheel_Acceleration/Deceleration Constant when dry [>500]
It is for set constant of acc/dec-eleration when handwheel start program. the range is
500-32000.when the value is less than 500,it is invalid.

19,G00 Speed when dry (mm/min) [>10]

It is the speed of G00 when when handwheel start program for simulate. it is invalid when
the value is less than 10.

19-1,Start Speed when dry with Handwheel (mm/min) [>5]

It is Starting speed of G00 when when handwheel start program for simulate. it is invalid
when the value is less than 5.

20,X_Max Speed with Handwheel (mm/min)

It is for limit max speed of X-axis when use handwheel in manual.
Attention:it is valid when >100,otherwise invalid.And suggest don’t over 4000.

21,Z_Max Speed with Handwheel (mm/min)

It is for limit max speed of Z-axis when use handwheel in manual.
Attention:it is valid when >100,otherwise invalid.And suggest don’t over 4000.

22,Z_Acceleration/Deceleration Constant when threading

It is time constant of Z-axis ace/dec-eleration when do threading , Range:300~90000.The
bigger it is,the faster the acceleration/deceleration.
Attention:with stepper system,it should be set smaller. When <300,it is invalid.When with servo motor ,for
ensure efficiency,set 0.

- 143 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

23,X_Acceleration/Deceleration Constant when threading

It is time constant of Z-axis ace/dec-eleration when do threading, the range is from 300 to
90000. The bigger it is,the faster the acceleration/deceleration.
Attention:with stepper system,the smaller,the safer.when <300, it is invalid. When with servo motor, for
ensure efficiency, set 0.

24,Ratio of Retired Speed in X-axis Servo when threading

It is ratio of X axis retried speed that configured with servo system when threading. Unit:
*0.1 .

25,Beginning Speed of Retired in X-axis Step when threading

It is beginning speed of X axis retired that configured with step system when threading.
Attention: for safe,it should be less than 100mm/min.

26,Max Retired Speed in X-axis Step when threading

It is Max speed of X axis retired that configured with step system when threading.
Attention: it is related to load,the bigger the load,the smaller it is.

27,Type of Acceleration/Deceleration [0 mean line,8 mean curve]

It sets type of acceleration/deceleration.set 0 means line type.set 8 means curve type.
Attention:In normal condition,set line type in servo system;set curve type in step system.

28,Initial Acceleration/Deceleration Constant when curve [>=10]

It is initial acceleration/deceleration constant when P27 set curve type.Range: >=10.

29,Quadratic Acceleration/Deceleration Constant when curve [>=10]

It is quadratic constant of acceleration/deceleration when P27 set curve type. Range >=10.

30,Max Acceleration/Deceleration Constant when curve [>=500]

It is Max acceleration/deceleration constant when P27 set curve type.
It is valid when >=500,otherwise the ace/dec-eleration constant is with line type of each axis.

31,X_Homing Speed (mm/min)

It is homing speed of X-axis.Unit:mm/min. the range is less than X_G00 speed.

32,X_Speed for detect Z0 signal (mm/min)

It is speed for check Z0 pulse signal after X-axis reach at homing switch. Unit:mm/min. the
range is 20-500.
note:it is for ensure accuracy.the smaller it is ,the higher the accuracy is.when set well,don’t change it forever.
33,Z_Homing Speed (mm/min)
It is homing speed of Z-axis.Unit:mm/min. the range is less than Z_G00 speed.

34,Z_Speed for detect Z0 signal (mm/min)

It is speed for check Z0 pulse signal after Z-axis reach at homing switch. Unit:mm/min. the

- 144 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

range is 20-500.
Note:it is for ensure accuracy.the smaller it is ,the higher the accuracy is.when set well,don’t change it forever.

35,Min Speed of spindle when G96 (rpm)

It is the min speed of spindle when run G96 code , also at constant surface speed mode.

36,Max Speed of 1st Spindle (rpm)

It is max speed of 1st spindle, also at 1st gear,M41 output for 1st gear, it is also the speed
when PIN25_CN3 plug output analog voltage is 10V(Default condition).

37,Max Speed of Spindle at 2nd gear (rpm)

It is max speed of spindle at 2nd gear,M42 output for 2nd gear, it is also the speed when
PIN25_CN3 plug output analog voltage is 10V at M42.

38,Max Speed of Spindle at 3rd gear (rpm)

It is max speed of spindle at 3rd gear,M43 output for 3rd gear, it is also the speed when
PIN25_CN3 plug output analog voltage is 10V at M43.

39,Max Speed of Spindle at 4th gear (rpm)

It is max speed of spindle at 4th gear,M44 output for 4th gear, it is also the speed when
PIN25_CN3 plug output analog voltage is 10V at M44.

40,Max Speed of 2nd Spindle (rpm)

It is the max speed of 2nd spindle,it is also the speed when PIN25_CN10 plug output analog
voltage is 10V. Specified by "SS#" , unit is rpm.

41,Compensation Mode of Arc Backlash (0 mean A; 8 mean B)

It is compensation mode for arc reverse backlash.
0(D3=0) means A compensation mode, which is that the bigger the reverse backlash is ,the
faster the compensation speed is , in order to ensure tool don’t exit pause condition. the
compensation speed is less than 10000mm/min.
+8(D3=1): means B compensation mode , which is that the compensation speed is set by P54 in
the following.
+1(D0=1):Length offset compensation is B mode,otherwise A mode. If A mode, length offset
always make compensation at Z-axis. If B mode, length offset compensation are based on
G17/G18/G19. G17: compensate Z-axis ; G18: compensate Y-axis; G19:compensate Z-axis.
+2(D1=1): mode of canned cycle is B mode,otherwise A mode. If A mode, CNC always make
compensation at Z-axis. If B mode, compensation are based on G17/G18/G19. G17: compensate
Z-axis ; G18: compensate Y-axis; G19:compensate Z-axis.
+4(D2=1): means when arc programming, IJK is the coordinate value from end point to center.
In the original value of P41 plus 4(Eg.: P41=0 +4= 4) means that the IJK of G02/G03 is the
coordinate value from end point to center, otherwise IJK of G02/G03 is the coordinate value from
starting point to center.
+256(D8=1): linear speed of helical interpolation don’t over F speed.

- 145 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

42,Compensation Speed in B Mode (mm/min)

It is the compensation speed in B compensation mode.unit:mm/min.

42-1,Beginning Compensation Speed in B mode (mm/min)

It is beginning compensation speed in B compensation mode.it is valid when it >10.

42-2,Acceleration/Deceleration Constant in B mode (mm/min/s)

It is the acceleration/deceleration constant in B compensation mode (also P41=8/12) .
Range: >=10.

43,Handwheel_Stopping Speed (mm/min)[>100]

It is the speed when handwheel stop. the bigger it is ,the faster handwheel stop.

49,Activate Speed Processing Function[1:Yes ; 0:No]

It is set for if activate speed processing function, 1 means yes, activate speed processing
function, 0 means no activate the function.

49-1,Stopping speed when reverse deceleration during running(mm/min)

It sets stopping speed when CNC do reverse deceleration during running.Unit:mm/min.

50,Handwheel Stop Speed(mm/min)[>100]

It sets the starting speed that handwheel stop.

51,SP_Speed when exit at following tapping mode

It is min speed before spindle reverse rotation when tapping.

52,SP_Reverse Backlash Compensation when tapping

It is reverse backlash compensation value before spindle reverse rotation when tapping. Unit:
Pulse

53,Advance Retired Value before reverse rotation of following tapping

It is advance retired value before spindle reverse rotation when tapping. Unit:um.
Range:10-5000

54,Retired Speed when tapping (mm/min)[>=60]

It is speed when spindle retired during tapping. Unit: mm/min

58,Beginning Speed when hardware limitation (mm/min)

It is beginning speed that motor touch hardware limitation switch. When cnc system is
configured with servo, no need to set beginning speed , set to 1 normally.

60,Use smooth processing function(+4:Manual,+8:MPG,+16:Program)

It is set mode of using smooth processing function,+4: smooth processing on Manual; +8:
smooth processing on MPG(Handwheel); +16: smooth processing on running program. +64: low

- 146 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

speed, +512: fully new mode

61,Time constant of smooth running on Manual[2-500]

It is the time constant when CNC system do smooth running manually,also P60=+4. Range:
2-500.

62,Time constant of smooth running on MPG[2-500]

It is the time constant when CNC system do smooth running on status of MPG,also P60=+8.
Range: 2-500.

63,Time constant of smooth running on Program[2-500]

It is the time constant when CNC system do smooth running & processing,also P60=+16. Range:
2-500.

65,Manual enhancement smoothing processing time constant [2-50]

It set time constant when CNC do smooth processing manually, Range: 2~50.

66,Handwheel enhancement smoothing processing time constant [2-50]

It set time constant when CNC do processing with handwheel, Range: 2~50.

67,Program enhancement smoothing processing time constant [2-50]

It set time constant when CNC do smooth processing automatically, Range: 2~50.

68,Grade of smoothing process [1-9](Bigger, higher smooth)

It sets grade of smooth processing, range is 1~9, When P8 are with bigger value, CNC will do
processing with higher smoothly.

101,X_Beginning Speed (mm/min)[>1] 102,Y_Beginning Speed (mm/min)[>1]

103,Z_Beginning Speed (mm/min)[>1] 104,A_Beginning Speed (mm/min)[>1]
105,B_Beginning Speed (mm/min)[>1]
It is beginning speed of feeding axis when acceleration/deceleration.when it is smaller than
acceleration/deceleration, accelerate/decelerate of speed start from the beginning feed speed.
when it is bigger than acceleration/deceleration, the speed reached at setting speed directly. Unit:
mm/min.
Attention:Generally,stepper system<=100,servo system<=500.

111,X_Max Speed Increment (mm/min)[>1] 112,Y_Max Speed Increment (mm/min)[>1]

113,Z_Max Speed Increment (mm/min)[>1] 114,A_Max Speed Increment (mm/min)[>1]
115,B_Max Speed Increment (mm/min)[>1]
It is max speed increment when multi-axial running track-interpolation. Also max changing
value of speed.
Example:when it is 300,the speed of X axis(multi-axial track-interpolation)up from F800 to
F1600,800(=1600-800)>300,so the process is up from F800 to F1100,and then F1600.

- 147 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

200,Coherent movement is valid for G00[1 is No,16 is Yes]

It is set for that if coherent movement is valid for G00. 16: yes, it is valid for G00. 1: No, it is
invalid for G00.
210,Wait SP_Speed smooth when threading[0:No, 1:Yes]
It is set for that if wait speed of spindle is smooth when threading. 1: yes, wait speed of
spindle is smooth before threading. 0: No, don’t wait.

211,SP_Starting Speed_Tapping-Feed(rpm)
It is starting speed of spindle axis for feeding when tapping.

212,SP_Starting Speed_Tapping-Extract(rpm)
It is starting speed of spindle axis for extract when tapping

213,Acceleration-Feed-Rigid Tapping(rpm/S)[>1]
It is acceleration/deceleration for spindle feeding when rigid tapping,unit:rpm/s.

214,Acceleration-Retreat-Rigid Tapping(rpm/S)[>1]
It is acceleration/deceleration for spindle retreat when rigid tapping,unit:rpm/s.

215,Reserve-Feed-Rigid Tapping(1/1000Rev)[>2]
It is reserve for spindle feed during rigid tapping. Unit:1/1000r, Range:>2

216,Trailing-Feed-Rigid Tapping(1/1000Rev)[>2]
It is trailing for spindle feed during rigid tapping. Unit:1/1000r, Range:>2

217,Reserve-Retreat-Rigid Tapping(1/1000rev)[>2]
It is reserve for spindle retreat during rigid tapping. Unit:1/1000r, Range:>2

218,Trailing-Retreat-Rigid Tapping(1/1000rev)[>2]
It is trailing for spindle retreat during rigid tapping. Unit:1/1000r, Range:>2

219,Time Constant of Smooth processing for Rigid tapping[20002-20500]

It is time constant of smooth processing for rigid tapping, range of value is 20002-20500.

230,G00 Speed of SP-axis (0.1rpm)

It is G00 speed for SP-axis,which is on CN10 plug,unit:0.1rpm.

231,Mode for SP-axis[+4:F,+8:G90/G91,+16:Pulse]

It set mode for SP-axis & other special function. +4: run with F code, +8: run with G90/G91
code, +16: send pulse with display value, +8192:CNC output analog voltage per one second,
+16384: run M05 & turn off analog voltage output.

232,Orientation Direction of SP-axis[0:Pos.,1:Neg.,2:Near]

It set orientation direction of SP-axis when rigid tapping with interpolate mode.0: Positive

- 148 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

direction, 1: Negative direction, 2: nearest direction

233,Homing Control Mode of SP-Axis

It set homing control mode of SP-axis, 1: Controlled by Pulse(CN10 plug+spindle encoder),
2: Control by Spindle driver(output M61, detect M22 is valid), 16 or 32: after orientation, move
SP to degree of P234, 16: Output M75: detect M22 is valid.

234,Offset Degrees when SP_Orientation(0.1Deg)[Neg:Non-Orientation]

It set offset degrees after orientation end, unit:0.1degree, if negative number, don’t
orientation.

235,SP_Homing Speed(0.1 rpm)

It set homing speed of Sp-axis,unit: 0.1rpm.

- 149 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

6.3 Axis parameter

P Axis Parameter Ex-Value
1 Switch Type for Feed-Rate [0: Key, 1: Band Switch] 0
2 Switch Type for SP-Rate [0: Key, 1: Band Switch] 0
3 Max Travel in X_Negative direction (mm) -9999.000
4 Max Travel in X_Positive direction (mm) 9999.000
5 Max Travel in Z_Negative direction (mm) -9999.000
6 Max Travel in Z_Positive direction (mm) 9999.000
7 SP_Braking Time (10ms) 150
8 SP_Braking is Long Signal [0: No,1: Yes] 0
9 Detect SP_Position Feedback [0: No,1: Yes] 1
10 Pulses Per Revolution of Spindle 4096
10-1 Allow Error of Resolution of SP_Encoder[>10] 0
10-2 Pulses Per Revolution of Spindle[1/1:0,Other:>99] 0
11 Soft-Limitation is valid [0:Yes, 1: No][D2X;D3C(Y);D4Z;D5A;D6B] 0000000100000001
12 X_Reverse Backlash Compensation (um) 0
13 Z_Reverse Backlash Compensation (um) 0
14 X_Direction [1:normal, 0: Reverse] 0
15 Z_Direction [1:normal, 0: Reverse] 0
16 Using Electron Gear Ratio for Feeding Axes [0:Yes, 1:No] 0
17 Numerator of X_Electron Gear 1
18 Denominator of X_Electron Gear 1
19 Numerator of Z_Electron Gear 1
20 Denominator of Z_Electron Gear 1
21 Type of Limit Switch in Positive Direction[0:NO type, 1:NC type] 0
22 Type of Limit Switch in Negative Direction[0:NO type, 1:NC type] 0
23 Type of Home [D3X;D4(C)Y;D5Z;D6A;0:Switch;1:float Zero] 11111011
24 X_Machine Coordinate of float zero point
25 Z_Machine Coordinate of float zero point
26 Grade of Homing[1:No,0:Prompt,8:Compulsion,9:Super compulsion] 1
27 Mode of Homing 1
28 Direction of Homing[D2:X,D3:C(Y),D4:Z,D5:A,D6:B] 0000000100000001
29 Type of Switches for Homing 00000000
30 Range of Detect Z0 in X axis 45
31 Range of Detect Z0 in Z axis 60
32 Offset after homing in X axis 0
33 Offset after homing in Z axis 0
50 Spindle is rotating when shift gear[1:Yes, 0:No] 0
51 Rotating Speed of Spindle when shift gear(1/100rpm) 100
52 Rotating Direction of Spindle when shift gear[0:CW, 1:CCW] 1
53 Pause Time of Spindle when shift gear (10ms) 10
54 Braking Time of Spindle when shift gear (10ms) 10
55 Delay time between reset M03/M04 & set M05 (10ms) 0
66 Gear Shift Control on Spindle Axis[1:Yes, 0:No] 0
68 Delay Time when feeding axes shift direction (ms) 0
69 Mode of Manual Return Home(1:All axis, 0:Selected Axis) 1
80 X/Z axis is Rotating Axis 00000001
100 System Inner Parameter 1
101 Name of 3rd Axis [0:Y, 1:C ] 1
102 Mode of Y(C) Axis [0:Rotating Axis, 1: Linear Axis] -9999.000
- 150 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

104 C(Y)_Direction [1:normal, 0: Reverse] 9999.000

105 Numerator of C(Y)_Electronic Gear 1
106 Denominator of C(Y)_Electronic Gear 1
107 C(Y)_Reverse Backlash Compensation (um) 0
108 G00 Speed of C(Y) Axis 4000.000
109 Max Speed of C(Y)_G1G2G3 2000
110 C(Y)_Acceleration/Deceleration Constant 50000
111 C(Y)_Max Speed with Handwheel (mm/min) 2000
112 Speed of C-axis return to Zero point of Encoder(º/min) 250.000
113 Y_Homing Speed (mm/min) 2500.000
114 Y_Speed for Detect Z0 signal (mm/min) 250.000
115 Range of detect Z0 in Y axis 60
116 Offset after homing in Y axis 0
117 Max Travel in C(Y)-Negative Direction -9999.000
118 Max Travel in C(Y)-Positive Direction 9999.000
119 C(Y)_Machine Coordinate of float zero point
200 System Inner Parameter 0
201 Mode of A Axis [0:Rotating Axis, 1: Linear Axis] 1
202 Base when A axis is rotating axis 0
203 A_Direction [1:normal, 0: Reverse] 0
204 Numerator of A_Electronic Gear 1
205 Denominator of A_Electronic Gear 1
206 A_Reverse Backlash Compensation (um) 0
207 G00 Speed of A Axis 4000.000
208 Max Speed of A_G1G2G3 2000
209 A_Acceleration/Deceleration Constant 50000
210 A_Max Speed with Handwheel (mm/min) 2000
211 Homing Speed in A Positive Direction (mm/min) 2500.000
212 Homing Speed in A Negative Direction (mm/min) 250
213 Range of detect Z0 in A axis 60
214 Offset after homing in A axis 0
215 Max Travel in A-Negative Direction -9999.000
216 Max Travel in A-Positive Direction 9999.000
217 A_Machine Coordinate of float zero point
218 Automatically Output(Y/M) for unclamp when 4th Axis is running 0
219 Detection in position of unclamp[10000+:X,20000+M,30000+wait time] 0
300 System inner parameter 1
301 Mode of B Axis [0:Rotating Axis, 1: Linear Axis] 1
302 Base when B axis is rotating axis 0
303 Name of 5th Axis [0:B, 1:C ] 0
304 B_Direction [1:normal, 0: Reverse] 0
305 Numerator of B_Electronic Gear 1
306 Denominator of B_Electronic Gear 1
307 B_Reverse Backlash Compensation (um) 0
308 G00 Speed of B Axis 4000.000
309 Max Speed of B_G1G2G3 2000
310 B_Acceleration/Deceleration Constant 50000
311 B_Max Speed with Handwheel (mm/min) 2000
312 Homing Speed in B Positive Direction (mm/min) 2500.000
313 Homing Speed in B Negative Direction (mm/min) 250
314 Range of detect Z0 in B axis 60

- 151 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

315 Offset after homing in B axis 0

316 Max Travel in B-Negative Direction -9999.000
317 Max Travel in B-Positive Direction 9999.000
318 B_Machine Coordinate of float zero point
323 Nearest way for rotary axis(+4:X, +8:Y, +16:Z, +32:A, +64:B)
404 SP_Direction when position control mode 0
405 Using Electronic Gear Ratio for Spindle [0:Yes, 1:No] 0
406 Numerator of SP_Electronic Gear Ratio in Low Gear 4096
407 Denominator of SP_Electronic Gear Ratio in Low Gear 360000
408 Numerator of SP_Electronic Gear Ratio in High Gear 4096
409 Denominator of SP_Electronic Gear Ratio in High Gear 360000
410 Coordinate Axis when spindle do tapping 92
411 Control Mode of Tapping [0:Following, 4: Interpolation] 0
412 Teeth of SP_Motor (<P413) 1
413 Teeth of SP_Encoder (>P412) 1
414 Follow-Up of A Axis[7:X, 8:Y, 9:Z] 1
501 Advanced distance for Z-axis with M123M125(um)[>9/<-9] 0
502 Rough allowance when advance with M123M125(um)[radius] 0
503 Max feed speed when rough processing with M123M125(mm/min)[>9] 0

Explanation about Axis Parameter:

 P81-P400 are the parameters for C(Y)axis, A axis & B axis (only when cnc system is configured with
C(Y) , A axis & B axis, related parameters are effective), take X-axis/Z-axis as reference.

1,Switch Type for Feed-Rate [0: Key, 1: Band Switch]

It is set switch type of Feed-Rate, Rate of Feeding axes.
0: Keys of "Feed Rate+" & "Feed Rate-" in Panel for adjust rate of feeding speed;
1: External Band switch for Feed-Rate. Port for external band switch is at CN11 plug, Pins are
VDK0,VDK1,VDK2,VDK3. Total are 16 gears

2,Switch Type for SP-Rate [0: Key, 1: Band Switch]

It is set switch type of SP-Rate, Rate of SP_Speed.
0: Keys of "SP Rate+" & "SP Rate-" in Panel for adjust rate of spindle speed;
1: External Band switch for SP-Rate. Port for external band switch is at CN11 plug, Pins are
VDS0,VDS1,VDS2,VDS3. Total are 16 gears

3,Max Travel in X_Negative direction (mm)

It is max travel in negative direction of X axis when soft-limitation, which is based on
machine coordinate system.

4,Max Travel in X_Positive direction (mm)

It is max travel in positive direction of X axis when soft-limitation, which is based on machine
coordinate system.

5,Max Travel in Z_Negative direction (mm)

It is max travel in negative direction of Z axis when soft-limitation, which is based on
machine coordinate system.

6,Max Travel in Z_Positive direction (mm)

It is max travel in positive direction of Z axis when soft-limitation, which is based on machine
coordinate system.

- 152 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

7,SP_Braking Time (10ms)

It is the braking time of spindle,also holding time of output M05. the shorter it is,the faster the
brake is. Unit: 10ms.

8,SP_Braking is Long Signal [0: No,1: Yes]

It is set for signal mode of SP_Braking. 1: Long signal, 0:short signal. It depends on braking
mode of spindle system.

9,Detect SP_Position Feedback [0: No,1: Yes]

It is for whether the system detect position feedback signal of spindle by SP_encoder. 1: detect,
0: No detect.
It is used for open that display of spindle real speed & some functions related with SP_Speed
which must be on condition of transmission ratio is 1:1 between SP_encoder & spindle motor.

10,Pulses Per Revolution of SP_Encoder(4*Encoder Resolution)

It is pulses per revolution of spindle. Pulses= (Resolution of SP-encoder) * 4.

10-1,Allow Error of Revolution of SP_Encoder[>10]

It sets the max allowable error between detecting value & resolution_SP_Encoder. Range: >10

10-2,Pulses Per Revolution of Spindle[1/1:0,Other:>99]

It sets the pulses per revolution of spindle(4times), When spindle & encoder is 1:1, set to 0,
when not 1:1, range is greater than 99.

11,Soft-Limitation is valid [0:Yes, 1: No]

It is bit parameter, set for if soft-limitation is valid of each feeding axis.
Bit D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Axis - - - - YS XS C - - B A Z Y X - -
0: means soft-limitation is valid , 1: means invalid. Example: soft limit of X-axis is invalid,
P11= 00000100. Suggest all soft limit are valid even if CNC is fixed with hardware limit switches.
D12=1: don’t limit when use MOVE code
D14=1: don’t limit when ATC
D15=1: Save incremental coordinate even if power off, 0 means not.

12,X_Reverse Backlash Compensation (um)

It is the value of reverse backlash compensation of X-axis, Radius designation. When
direction of X-axis movement is changed ,system will make compensation with the value
automatically. Unit: um

13,Z_Reverse Backlash Compensation (um)

It is the value of reverse backlash compensation of Z-axis.When direction of Z-axis movement
is reversed ,system will make compensation with the value automatically. Unit: um

14,X_Direction [1:normal, 0: Reverse]

It is for set the direction of X-axis. 1: Direction of X-axis is same to direction of code; 0:
Direction of X-axis is opposite to direction of code.

15,Z_Direction [1:normal, 0: Reverse]

It is for set the direction of Z-axis. 1: Direction of Z-axis is same to direction of code; 0:
Direction of Z-axis is opposite to direction of code.

16,Using Electron Gear Ratio for Feeding Axes [0:Yes, 1:No]

- 153 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

It is for whether using the electron gear ratio for feeding axis. 0: yes,using electron gear, 1: No,
don’t using electron gear.

17,Numerator of X_Electron Gear (1-999999)

It is Numerator of X-axis’s electron gear ratio.(X_CMR) Range: 1-999999.

18,Denominator of X_Electron Gear (1-999999)

It is Denominator of X-axis’s electron gear ratio.(X_CMD) Range: 1-999999.

19,Numerator of Z_Electron Gear (1-999999)

It is Numerator of Z-axis’s electron gear ratio. (Z_CMR) Range: 1-999999.

20,Denominator of Z_Electron Gear (1-999999)

It is Denominator of Z-axis’s electron gear ratio.(Z_CMD) Range: 1-999999.

Algorithm of P17-P20 & P105/P106 & P204/P205 parameters

Effective Range: 1-999999
Unit:non
User:Upon operating administrators
Initialization:1
Effective time:Immediately
Explain:
When lead screws with different screw pitches are configured with motors of various step
angles,or with servo motors of different pulse number per round,or connections are realized
through different gears,the programmed values can remain consistent with the actual moved
distance by setting the parameter of the electronic gear ration of the system.
Numerator CMR P
Electron Gear Ratio = = =
Denominator CMD L * 1000
CMR:Numerator of gear ratio
CMD:Denominator of gear ratio
P: pulse number per motor round
L: Moved distance per motor round(mm)
The value of CMD/CMR is the pulse equivalent,which tells the moved distance per pulse ,with its
unit as 0.001mm.
Example1: The motor rotates one circle very 5000 pulses,after which the machine tool moves
5mm,then:
CMR/CMD = 5000 / (5 * 1000 ) = 1/ 1
That is to say,we can set the values as :CMR=1,CMD=1.
Here ,the pulse equivalent is 0.001mm.
Example2: The motor rotates one circle very 5000 pulses,after which the machine tool moves
10mm.
CMR/CMD = 5000 / (10 * 1000 ) = 1 / 2
That is to say,we can set the values as :CMR=1,CMD=2.
Here ,the pulse equivalent is 0.002mm.

21,Type of Limit Switch in Positive Direction[0:NO type, 1:NC type]

It is set type of limit switch in positive direction, also type of switch that is connected to
+L,PIN16_CN3 plug. 0:NO Type, 1: NC Type.

22,Type of Limit Switch in Negative Direction[0:NO type, 1:NC type]

It is set type of limit switch in negative direction, also type of switch that is connected to
-L,PIN15_CN3 plug. 0:NO Type, 1: NC Type.
- 154 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

23,Type of Home [D3X;D4(C)Y;D5Z;D6A;D7B; 0:Switch; 1:float Zero]

It is set type of home. bit parameter. Each axis set alone.
Bit D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Axis B A Z C(Y) X - - -
0: Switch/Sensor for home, 1:Float Zero point for home.
Example:Only Home of X-axis is float zero point, P23=00001001.
D0 bit sets workpiece coordinate value &D1 bit sets machine coordinate vase of C-axis.

24,X_Machine Coordinate of float zero point

It is set the machine coordinate value of X-axis based on float zero point. The value is distance
between current position of machine tool & float zero point.

25,Z_Machine Coordinate of float zero point

It is set the machine coordinate value of Z-axis based on float zero point. The value is distance
between current position of machine tool & float zero point.

26,Grade of Homing[1:No need, 0:Prompt, 8:Compulsion, 9:Super compulsion]

It set the grade of homing for feeding axis.there is 4 grades as follow:
1 : No need. When system boots every time,no prompt and no limitation;
0 : Prompt. After system boot every time,there is a prompted box for homing , and then there
aren’t any limitation about homing;
8 : Compulsion. When system boots every time, there will a prompted box for homing. And
then, if system don’t homing successfully, it will hint "feed axis don’t go home" before running
program ,and don’t run processing program;
9 : Super compulsion. When system boots every time, there will a prompted box for homing.
And then,if system don’t homing successfully,it will hints "feed axis don’t go home" at each
operations ,and feeding axes don’t move.

27,Mode of Homing
It set mode of homing. There are 4 kinds of mode about homing.
0 : Homing after hit homing switch, move in reverse direction until homing switch is off, then
detect Z0 signal of Encoder of servo motor.
1 : Homing after hit homing switch, move in reverse direction until homing switch is off.
2 : Homing after hit homing switch, move forward until homing switch is off, then detect Z0
signal of encoder of servo motor.
Other: Homing after hit homing switch,move forward until homing switch is off.

28,Direction of Homing [D2:X,D3:C(Y),D4:Z,D5:A,D6:B]

It sets the direction & sequence of homing for each axis. Bit parameter.
Bit D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Axis - - - - - - - - - B A Z C(Y) X - -
0:Homing in positive direction, 1:Homing in negative direction, D8: set priority of X&Z-axis
go home.1 means Z-axis first,0 means X-axis first.

29,Type of Switch for Homing [D0X;D1C(Y);D2Z;D3A;D4B; 1:NC ; 0:NO]

It set the type of switch for homing. Bit parameter.
Bit D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Axis - - - B A Z C(Y) X
1: NC type; 0: NO type.D7=1:Manual/Auto shift automatically ;
- 155 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Example:If X&Z axis are NC switch,the bit parameter is 000000101.

D6=1: Handwheel/Auto status shift automatically.
D7=1:Manual/Auto shift automatically ;when end of program,CNC will enter manual status
automatically, when press Start key on manual status, CNC will enter Auto status automatically.

30,Range of Detect Z0 in X axis (unit:100um)

It is range that system can detect Z0 signal of encoder in X direction.
Attention:the value must be less than the length of one rev,otherwise homing failure.

31,Range of Detect Z0 in Z axis (unit:100um)

It is range that system can detect Z0 signal of encoder in Z direction.
Attention:the value must be less than the length of one rev,otherwise homing failure.

32,Offset after homing in X axis (unit:10um,-9999~+9999)

It is offset that X-axis after homing. Move with G00 speed. Unit: 0.01mm.

33,Offset after homing in Z axis (unit:10um,-9999~+9999)

It is offset that Z-axis after homing. Move with G00 speed. Unit: 0.01mm

50,Spindle is rotating when shift gear [1:Yes, 0:No]

It set if spindle is rotating when spindle shift gears.1:Yes, SP is rotating, 0: No.

51,Rotating Speed of Spindle when shift gear(1/100rpm)

It is rotating speed of spindle when spindle shift gear & P51=1.

52,Rotating Direction of Spindle when shift gear [0:CW,1:CCW]

It is rotation direction of spindle when spindle shift gear. 0: CW, output M03; 1:CCW, output
M04.

53,Braking Time of Spindle when shift gear (10ms)

It is braking time of spindle when spindle shift gear. Unit: 10ms.

54,Delay time between reset M03/M04 & set M05 (10ms)

It is delay time before output M05 ,and after reset M03/M04. Unit:10ms.

55,Spindle stop time(unit:10ms)

It is the delay time between cancel M03/M04 and boot M05.unit:10ms.

66,Gear Shift Control on Spindle Axis[1:Yes, 0:No]

It sets whether set gear shift control on spindle axis.

68,Delay time when feeding axes shift direction (ms)

It is the delay time when feeding axes change direction, unit: ms.

69,Homing Mode of Manual return to home with keys(1:All, 0:Select)

It sets homing mode of press “Return” key, 1: all axes go to home, 0: just selected axis goes to
home.

80,Mode of X&Z axis

It is bit parameter, Each bit have its related function. 1: Valid, 0: Invalid.
D2:Z axis based on Workpiece coordinate system;
D3:X axis based on Workpiece coordinate system;
D4:Z axis based on Machine coordinate system;
- 156 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

D5:X axis based on Machine coordinate system.

D6:Z axis is rotation axis;
D7:X axis is rotation axis.
Bit D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Function XR ZR XM ZM XW ZW - -

100,System Inner Parameter

Inner parameter of system, cannot be altered.

101,Name of 3rd Axis [0:Y, 1:C ]

It is set for name of 3rd axis, 0: set to Y , display & programming with "Y", normally when 3rd
axis is linear axis; 1: set to C, display & programming with "C", normally when 3rd axis is rotating
axis. 32: Turning&Milling System(4 axes: XYZC/5Axes: XYZAC)

102,Mode of Y(C) Axis [0:Rotating Axis, 1: Linear Axis]

It is set for the mode of Y(C)-axis, 0: Rotating axis , 1: Linear axis.

104,C(Y)_Direction [1:normal, 0: Reverse]

It is for set the direction of C(Y)-axis. 1: Direction of C(Y)-axis is same to direction of code; 0:
Direction of C(Y)-axis is opposite to direction of code.

105,Numerator of C(Y)_Electronic Gear

It is Numerator of C(Y)-axis’s electron gear ratio. (C_CMR) Range: 1-999999.

106,Denominator of C(Y)_Electronic Gear

It is Denominator of C(Y)-axis’s electron gear ratio.(C_CMD) Range: 1-999999.

107,C(Y)_Reverse Backlash Compensation (um)

It is the value of reverse backlash compensation of C(Y)-axis.When direction of X-axis
movement is changed ,system will make compensation with the value automatically. Unit: um

108,G00 Speed of C(Y) Axis (mm/min)

It is rapid speed(also speed of G00) of C(Y) axis,Max is 240000(unit:mm/min)
Attention: the value depends on machine configuration,set wrong is very easy to trouble machine tool &
accident.

109,Max Speed of C(Y)_G1G2G3

It is for the Max running speed of C(Y)-axis when G1/G2/G3 interpolation.

110,C(Y)_Acceleration/Deceleration Constant
It is time constant of X-axis acc/dec-eleration,the bigger it is ,the faster the ace/dec-eleration
is.
Attention:This value depends on the machine structure,the heavier the load is ,the smaller the value is.With
stepper system,the value should less than 15000.

111,C(Y)_Max Speed with Handwheel (mm/min)

It is for limit max speed of X-axis when use handwheel in manual.
Attention:it is valid when >100,otherwise invalid.And suggest don’t over 4000.

112,Speed of C-axis return to Zero point of Encoder(º/min)

It is the speed of C-axis return to Z0 of Encoder. Unit:º/min. the range is less than the G00

- 157 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

speed of C-axis.

113,Y_Homing Speed (mm/min)

It is homing speed of Y-axis .Unit:mm/min. the range is less than Y_G00 speed.

114,Y_Speed for Detect Z0 signal (mm/min)

It is speed for check Z0 pulse signal after Y-axis reach at homing switch. Unit:mm/min. the
range is 20-500.
Note:For ensure accuracy.the smaller it is ,the higher the accuracy is.when set well,don’t change it forever.

115,Range of detect Z0 in C(Y) axis (100um)

It is range that system can detect Z0 signal of encoder in C(Y) direction.
Attention:the value must be less than the length of one rev,otherwise homing failure.

116,Offset after homing in Y axis (Unit:10um)

It is offset that Y-axis after homing. Move with G00 speed. Unit: 0.01mm

117,Max Travel in C(Y)-Negative Direction

It is max travel in negative direction of C(Y) axis when soft-limitation, which is based on
machine coordinate system.

118,Max Travel in C(Y)-Positive Direction

It is max travel in positive direction of C(Y) axis when soft-limitation, which is based on
machine coordinate system.

119,C(Y)_Machine Coordinate of float zero point

It is set the machine coordinate value of C(Y)-axis based on float zero point. The value is
distance between current position of machine tool & float zero point.

200,System Inner Parameter

Inner parameter of system, cannot be altered.

201,Mode of A Axis [0:Rotating Axis, 1: Linear Axis]

It is set for the mode of A-axis, 0: Rotating axis , 1: Linear axis.

202,Base when A axis is rotating axis

It is set the base of A-axis when it is rotating axis. 0:Null, 1:Based on Absolute Coordinate, 2:
Based on Machine Coordinate, 3: Both.

203,A_Direction [1:normal, 0: Reverse]

It is for set the direction of A-axis. 1: Direction of A-axis is same to direction of code; 0:
Direction of A-axis is opposite to direction of code.

204,Numerator of A_Electronic Gear

It is Numerator of A-axis’s electron gear ratio. (A_CMR) Range: 1-999999.

205,Denominator of A_Electronic Gear

It is Denominator of A-axis’s electron gear ratio.(A_CMD) Range: 1-999999.

206,A_Reverse Backlash Compensation (um)

It is the value of reverse backlash compensation of A-axis.When direction of A-axis
- 158 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

movement is changed ,system will make compensation with the value automatically. Unit: um

207,G00 Speed of A Axis

It is rapid speed(also speed of G00) of A axis,Max is 240000(unit:mm/min)
Attention: the value depends on machine configuration,set wrong is very easy to trouble machine tool &
accident.

208,Max Speed of A_G1G2G3

It is for the Max running speed of A-axis when G1/G2/G3 interpolation.

209,A_Acceleration/Deceleration Constant
It is time constant of A-axis acceleration/deceleration,the bigger it is ,the faster the
ace/dec-eleration is.
Attention:This value depends on the machine structure,the heavier the load is ,the smaller the value
is.With stepper system,the value should less than 15000.

210,A_Max Speed with Handwheel (mm/min)

It is for limit max speed of A-axis when use handwheel in manual.
Attention:it is valid when >100,otherwise invalid.And suggest don’t over 4000.

211,A_Homing Speed (mm/min)

It is homing speed of A-axis .Unit:mm/min. the range is less than A_G00 speed.

212,A_Speed for Detect Z0 signal (mm/min)

It is speed for check Z0 pulse signal after A-axis reach at homing switch.

213,Range of detect Z0 in A axis

It is range that system can detect Z0 signal of encoder in A direction.
Attention:the value must be less than the length of one rev,otherwise homing failure.
214,Offset after homing in A axis
It is offset that A-axis after homing. Move with G00 speed. Unit: 0.01mm

215,Max Travel in A-Negative Direction

It is max travel in negative direction of A axis when soft-limitation, which is based on
machine coordinate system.

216,Max Travel in A-Positive Direction

It is max travel in positive direction of A axis when soft-limitation, which is based on machine
coordinate system.

217,A_Machine Coordinate of float zero point

It is set the machine coordinate value of A-axis based on float zero point. The value is distance
between current position of machine tool & float zero point.

218,Automatically Output(Y/M) for unclamp when 4th Axis is running

It is set output point(Y) or auxiliary relay(M) for unclamp automatically when 4th axis is
running. Normally 4th axis is used for rotary table,which is with brake, we can define output
point/auxiliary relay for control released of brake. 10000+Y output address, 20000+M auxiliary
relay address. Example: we use Y27 to control & release brake of rotary table,so P103=10027.

- 159 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

219,Detection in position of unclamp[10000+X,20000+M,30000+wait time]

It is set input point & waiting time for detecting in position of unclamp when rotary table is
with brake.10000+(X),set input point address, 20000+(M),set auxiliary relay input,30000+, set
waiting time,unit is ms. Example: we use X01 as input point for detect position of unclamp,max
waiting time is 1.5seconds,also P104=41501=(10001+31500)

300,System inner parameter, cannot be altered.

301,Mode of B Axis [0:Rotating Axis, 1: Linear Axis]

It is set for the mode of B-axis, 0: Rotating axis , 1: Linear axis.

302,Base when B axis is rotating axis

It is set the base of B-axis when it is rotating axis. 0:Null, 1:Based on Absolute Coordinate, 2:
Based on Machine Coordinate, 3: Both.

303,Name of 5th Axis [0:B, 1:C ]

It is set for name of 5th axis, 0: set to B , display & programming with "B", normally when 5th
axis is linear axis; 1: set to C, display & programming with "C", normally when 5th axis is rotating
axis.

304,B_Direction [1:normal, 0: Reverse]

It is for set the direction of B-axis. 1: Direction of B-axis is same to direction of code; 0:
Direction of B-axis is opposite to direction of code.

305,Numerator of B_Electronic Gear

It is Numerator of B-axis’s electron gear ratio. (B_CMR) Range: 1-999999.

306,Denominator of A_Electronic Gear

It is Denominator of A-axis’s electron gear ratio.(B_CMD) Range: 1-999999.

307,B_Reverse Backlash Compensation (um)

It is the value of reverse backlash compensation of B-axis.When direction of B-axis
movement is changed ,system will make compensation with the value automatically. Unit: um

308,G00 Speed of B Axis

It is rapid speed(also speed of G00) of B axis,Max is 240000(unit:mm/min)
Attention: the value depends on machine configuration,set wrong is very easy to trouble machine tool &
accident.

309,Max Speed of B_G1G2G3

It is for the Max running speed of B-axis when G1/G2/G3 interpolation.

310,B_Acceleration/Deceleration Constant
It is time constant of B-axis acceleration/deceleration,the bigger it is ,the faster the
ace/dec-eleration is.
Attention:This value depends on the machine structure,the heavier the load is ,the smaller the value
is.With stepper system,the value should less than 15000.

311,B_Max Speed with Handwheel (mm/min)

It is for limit max speed of B-axis when use handwheel in manual.
Attention:it is valid when >100,otherwise invalid.And suggest don’t over 4000.

- 160 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

312,B_Homing Speed (mm/min)

It is homing speed of B-axis .Unit:mm/min. the range is less than B_G00 speed.

313,B_Speed for Detect Z0 signal (mm/min)

It is speed for check Z0 pulse signal after B-axis reach at homing switch.

314,Range of detect Z0 in B axis

It is range that system can detect Z0 signal of encoder in B direction.
Attention:the value must be less than the length of one rev,otherwise homing failure.
315,Offset after homing in B axis
It is offset that B-axis after homing. Move with G00 speed. Unit: 0.01mm

316,Max Travel in B-Negative Direction

It is max travel in negative direction of B axis when soft-limitation, which is based on
machine coordinate system.

317,Max Travel in B-Positive Direction

It is max travel in positive direction of B axis when soft-limitation, which is based on machine
coordinate system.

318,B_Machine Coordinate of float zero point

It is set the machine coordinate value of B-axis based on float zero point. The value is distance
between current position of machine tool & float zero point.

323,Nearest way for rotary axis(+4:X, +8:Y, +16:Z, +32:A, +64:B)

It sets whether these rotary axes are moving with nearest way, +4: X-axis don’t run with
nearest way, +8:Y-axis, +16:Z-axis, +32:A-axis, +64:B-axis.

400,Detect Position Feedback of Spindle[1:Yes, 0:No]

It sets that if system detect position feedback signal of spindle motor from SP_Encoder. 1: Yes,
detect, 0: No detect.

404,SP_Direction when position control mode

It is the direction of spindle motor,o means reverse,1 mean normal.

405,Using Electronic Gear Ratio for Spindle [0:Yes, 1:No]

It is for whether the spindle use electron gear.

406,Numerator of SP_Electronic Gear Ratio in Low Gear (1-999999)

It is the numerator of SP-axis’s electron low gear in low gear.

407,Denominator of SP_Electronic Gear Ratio in Low Gear (1-999999)

It is the denominator of SP-axis’s electron low gear in low gear.

408,Numerator of SP_Electronic Gear Ratio in High Gear (1-999999)

It is the numerator of SP-axis’s electron low gear in high gear.

409,Denominator of SP_Electronic Gear Ratio in High Gear (1-999999)

It is the denominator of SP-axis’s electron low gear in high gear.

410,Interpolation Axis when spindle do tapping[91 X,92 Y/C,93 Z,94 A,95 B,96 C]
It sets the interpolation axis that be use for spindle when interpolation tapping. 91: X-axis, 92:
- 161 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Y axis/C-axis ; 93: Z-axis; 94:A-axis; 95:B-axis; 96: C-axis, also different name of B-axis, which is
set by P303 in Other parameter.

411,Control Mode of Tapping [0:Following, 4: Interpolation]

It is control mode of tapping, when set to 0, tapping following spindle encoder; when set to 4,
spindle tapping interpolate with feeding axis , which set by P410.

412,Teeth of SP_Motor (<P413)

It is tooth number of spindle.it <=P413.

413,Teeth of SP_Encoder (>P412)

It is tooth number of SP-encoder,it >=P412.
Attention:the tooth number of spindle must be not more than the tooth number of SP-encoder,when
less,it need to install our company’s adapter plate.

414,Follow-Up of A Axis[7:X, 8:Y, 9:Z]

It is set the function of follow up of A-axis. Set to 7: A-axis follow up with X-axis; Set to 8:
A-axis follow up with Y-axis ; Set to 9: A-axis follow up with Z-axis. A-axis follow up on
condition of both Manual & Auto.

501,Advanced distance for Z-axis with M123M125(um)[>9/<-9]

It sets advanced distance for Z-axis when use M123/M125 follow-up codes.Range:>9/<-9.

502,Rough allowance when advance with M123M125(um)[radius]

It sets rough allowance when advance with M123/M125 code, radius value,unit:um.

503,Max feed speed when rough processing with M123M125(mm/min)

It sets max feeding speed when rough processing with M123/M125 code,unit: mm/min.

Special Cautions:
1.Only when CNC controller is configured with related feeding axis, and there are related parameters sets
for related feeding axis, such as C axis , A-axis & B-axis.
2.About bit parameters, if some bits are don’t specified functions for feeding axis, please keep same to
ex-factory set, which should be important for inner system, otherwise it will affect normal operations of CNC
system.

- 162 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

6.4 Tool parameter

P Tool Parameter Ex-Value
1 Activate ATC Function(1:Yes, 0:No) 1
2 Tool Number of Electric Turret (+1) 5
3 Type of Lathe Machine 0
4 Max Time of Turret Positive Rotation(s) 8.000
5 Delay Time before detect after rotating(ms) 100.000
6 Delay Time after turret stop positive rotation(ms) 100.000
7 Time of Turret Negative Rotation for lock(ms) 1200.000
8 Management of Tool(0:M06,1:T code,+32768:Tool life management) 1
9 Detect Position of Lock (1: Yes, 0:No) 0
10 Mode of Setup Radius C Compensation 0
11 Mode of Cancel Radius C Compensation 0
20 Mode of Turret(1:Electric Turret; 0:Special Turret) 1
32 Filtering for Position Signal or WAT Signal 1283

Explanation about Tool Parameter:

1,Active ATC function [1:Yes, 0: No]

It is for whether activate function of tool changer automatically. 0: No, lathe machine is
without turret for tool magazine 1: yes, lathe machine is with turret for tool change, after tool is on
position,no detect position signal of tool. 8: yes, after tool is on position, system will detect
position signal of tool again.
Attention: 1.when the machine tool is only with linear turret ,the parameter is set to 0;
2.Set sum of tools,Press "F7"key and input sum in Redeem(tool compensation) screen.

2,Tool Number of Electric Turret (+1)

It is total tool number of electric turret.The value of this parameter needs to add 1 based on
actual tool number. Example:When with 4 tools on turret, set P2=5.
When lathe machine is configured with 4 tools on electric turret and 4-linear tools. On
"Redeem" screen, press "F7" key to set total tools, which is 8. and the parameter is 5, so T1-T4
means tools of electric turret,T5-T8 means tools of linear turret.

3,Type of Lathe Machine

It is type of lathe machine, also structure of machine tool.
0:turret in front of horizontal lathe; 1:turret behind of horizontal lathe;
8:turret in front of vertical lathe; 9:turret behind of vertical lathe.
Note: There are related introductions about type of lathe on chapter2.1.1 & chapter 2.5.1, this parameter
also setup different machine Coordinate system for machine tool.

4,Max Time of Turret Positive Rotation(s)

It is max time of turret rotates in positive direction to find position signal of tool. When
system didn’t find position signal of tool within the setting time, it will stop changing tool &
rotation and alarm. Unit: second.

- 163 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

5,Delay Time before detect after rotating(ms)

It is delay time to detect position signal of tool after turret rotates in positive direction. Unit:
millisecond.

6,Delay Time after turret stop positive rotation(ms)

It is delay time after turret stop rotating in positive direction, also time after reset (+T_CN4)
signal , and before output (-T_CN4) signal. Unit: ms.

7,Time of Turret Negative Rotation for lock(ms)

It is the time of turret rotates in negative direction for locking turret , also the time of output
(-T_CN4) signal.
Attention:The value is related to size of turret on machine tool. Motor on turret would be over-heat when
the value is too big.

8,Management of Tool(0:M06,1:T code,+32768:Tool life management)

It sets management way for tool code,0:use M06 with T code, 1: use T code for change tool
directly, +32768, activate function of tool lift management.
Press “Redeem” key again to enter tool lift management screen, press “Redeem” again,exit to
Redeem screen.It can set using times or using time,and also can set current using times & using
time, unit of time is second(s),. When times or using time is reached, do related tool offset on next
time automatically, revise increment values are set by parameters on tool life management, after
revised,current using times or current using times will be cleared to 0.

9,Detect Position of Lock (1: Yes, 0:No)

It sets whether system detect position signal of lock. 1:Yes, detect, 0:No detect. Input point of
detection is TOK, PIN9 of CN4 Plug.

10,Mode of Setup Radius C Compensation (0:A type, 1:B type)

11,Mode of Cancel Radius C Compensation (0:A type,1:B type)
They are mode of setup/cancel radius C compensation, details at chapter 3.26.

20,Mode of Turret(1:Electric Turret; 0:Special Turret)

It sets mode of turret. When with special turret, it needs to design "ProgramTool" & PLC for
special turret.

32,Filtering for Position Signal or WAT Signal

It is set filtering time for position signal of electric turret or WAT signal on special turret.
Time Position Signal WAT signal
2ms +256 +2048
4ms +512 +4096
8ms +1024 +8192
+1: Rotating turret with nearest way to select tool,otherwise rotating turret with positive
direction(Output +T) and select tool.

- 164 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

6.5 Other Parameter

P Other Parameter Ex-Factory
1 Type of Handwheel(0:Panel, 1:Handhold) 0
2 Type of Chuck 0
3 Using Interface Switch on Panel(0: No, 88:Yes) 88
4 Lubricate Automatically (0:Yes, 1:No) 0
5 Time of Lubrication (10ms) 300
6 Interval of Lubricate Automatically(s) 1800
7 Detection for Door Switch(0:No, 1:Yes) 0
8 Type of Door Switch(0:NO type, 1:NC type) 0
9 Special Bit Parameter 1000010001000101
10 Counting Workpieces Automatically(0:No, 1:Yes) 1
11 Increment of shift block 1
12 System Inner Parameter 7
13 Interlock between Rotation_SP & Chuck(0:No, 1:Yes) 1
13-1 Interlock between Rotation_SP & Tailstock(0:No, 1:Yes) 1
14 Coolant key is valid on Auto(0:No, 1:Yes) 1
15 Detect Position of Chuck(M10/M11)(0:No, 1:Yes) 0
16 Detect Position of Tailstock(M79/M78)(0:No, 1:Yes) 0
17 Type of Driver Alarm(ALM)(0:NO type, 1:NC type) 0
18 Type of Spindle Alarm(ALM1)(0:NO type, 1:NC type) 0
19 Type of Machine Alarm(ALM2)(0:NO type, 1:NC type) 0
20 Control Mode of Chuck(0:Single, 1:Double) 0
21 Control Mode of Tailstock(0:Single, 1:Double) 0
22 External Switch for Chuck(0:No, 1:Yes) 0
23 External Switch for Tailstock(0:No, 1:Yes) 0
24 Time of Chuck(s) 0.00
24-1 M10 Long Signal(0:No, 1:Yes) 0
24-2 M71 Long Signal(0:No, 1:Yes) 0
24-3 Chuck M10 or M11 boot [0:M10, 1:M11] 0
25 Time of Tailstock(s) 0.00
25-1 M79 Long Signal(0:No, 1:Yes) 0
25-2 M73 Long Signal(0:No, 1:Yes) 0
26 Type of Emergency Stop1(0:NO type, 1:NC type) 0
27 Type of Emergency Stop2(0:NO type, 1:NC type) 0
28 Run/Pause Output(0:No, 1:Yes) 0
29 Alarm Output(0:No, 1:Yes) 0
30 Language(1:Chinese, 0:English) 0
31 Use Inner PMC(0:No, 1:Yes) 1
32 Use High-Speed Inner PMC(0:No, 18:Yes) 18
33 HY as Running Key(0:No, 1:Yes) 0
34 HA as Halt Key(0:No, 1:Yes) 0
35 Soft-Limit is Valid when no homing(0:No, 1:Yes) 1
36 Time(Year-Month-Day-Hour-Minute)
37 Rate of RS232 6
37-1 OPC Function_Modbus_Station
38 Latched for Rapid Key(8:Yes) 1
- 165 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

39 System Inner Parameter ***

40 System Inner Parameter -88
41 Backup Current Parameters
42 Recovery Backup Parameters
50 Run from middle Program ask going last line point[8:Yes,0:No] 0
51 Return Safe Point firstly when starting from break point(+4:Z,+8:X) 1
52 Machine Coordinate_Safe Point 1
120 Direction of Manual Feeding Key 1
140 M77:Machine Coordinate VS Reference point 1 0
141 M78:Machine Coordinate VS Reference point 2 1
150 X_Reference Point_1(mm) 0.000
151 Y_Reference Point_1(mm) 0.000
152 Z_Reference Point_1(mm) 0.000
153 A_Reference Point_1(mm) 0.000
160 X_Reference Point_2(mm) 0.000
161 Y_Reference Point_2(mm) 0.000
162 Z_Reference Point_2(mm) 0.000
163 A_Reference Point_2(mm) 0.000
501 Shift Color Display of Screen(1:No, 8:Yes) 1
601 Define Parameters for Step
602 Define Parameters for Servo Servo
900 Display User-define Dialog Box[1:No, 4:Yes] 8192
901 Homing Sequence of Axis(5bits) 1
902 Inner Parameter[2:ON] 0
903 Inner Parameter[2:SD Card,+16:5th Axis Follow,+32:4th Axis Follow] 0
904 Inner Parameter[4:File Decrypt,8:Encryption] 0
910 High-Speed Input of M18/M22/M24/M28 for G31/G311 0
911 Using M18_Teach-in, M28_Record(0:No, 1:Yes) 0
912 "Reset"key reset Outputs(0:No, 1:Yes) 1
Note:P12&P39&P40 are System Inner Parameter, cannot be altered.
Explanation about Axis Parameter:
1,Type of Handwheel(0:Panel, 1:Handhold)
It sets the type of handwheel,0:Handwheel in operational panel, 1:Handwheel in Handhold
box.
Note: when the parameter is 1 (P1=1), CN11 plug is connected to Handhold box; & can’t use rate of
spindle&feeding axis,only off/X/Y/Z/A &*1/*10/*100(also P1&P2=0 in Axis parameter).

2,Type of Chuck
It set type of chuck, 0: Inside Chuck(M10: chuck clamp to center); 1:Outside Chuck(M10:
chuck clamp to external).

3,Using Interface Switch on Panel(0: No, 1:Yes,)

It sets whether system use interface switch(3 position switch/Normal/F-Halt/FS-Halt) on
operational panel. 0:No, don’t use; 88:Yes,use on Manual/Auto both,99:Yes, use on Auto

4,Lubricate Automatically (0:Yes, 1:No)

It sets whether system use lubricate automatically. 0:Yes, lubricate automatically is valid, 1:No
- 166 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

use lubricate automatically.

Attention:Lubricate automatically according to time of running program.

5,Time of Lubrication (10ms)

It sets the time of lubricate automatically , also time of outputting M32, PIN9_CN3 Plug.
Unit:0.01s.

6,Interval of Lubricate Automatically(s)

It is the interval that lubricate every time,also the interval that twice M32 is valid.

7,Detection for Door Switch(0:No, 1:Yes)

It sets whether system detect the signal of protective-door. 0:No detect, 1:Yes.
Attention:1. Input point for door switch: M12, PIN11_CN10 plug.
2. After set P7=1,system can work in Manual,and stop processing in Auto.
3. Pin for detect Chuck_clamp&Door-switch are M12, only one usage is valid.
8,Type of Door Switch(0:NO type, 1:NC type)
It is type of Door-switch. 0:NO type(normal open),1:NC type(normal close).

9,Special Bit Parameter

It is bit parameter,each one bit have different functions,details as following:
Bit D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
D0: Null; default value is 1,which cannot be altered.
D1: 1:Clear Part Number after reboot system; 0:Keep Part number.
D2: 1:Indent automatically between characters when edit; 0:No blank;
D3: Null; default value is 0,which cannot be altered.
D4: Null; default value is 0,which cannot be altered.
D5: 1:Don’t stop Rotation_SP & Coolant when pressing "Reset" key;
D6: 1:Each axis run with itself speed when G00; 0: linkage movement;
D7: 1:Don’t call related tool compensation when tool change manually; 0: Call related tool
compensation automatically; default is 0.
D8: 1:Save status of Chuck(M10/M11) when power off;Recovery original status when
booting system; 0: System output M10 automatically when booting.
D9: Select Mode of tool set & input mode of Redeem;
D10: 1:Auto Sequence for block when programming;
D11: 1:Analog of 1st spindle outputs to both +10V_CN3&CN10;
D12: 1:Shield function of "Skip" ,also "/" in the front of blocks is invalid;
D13: 1:Shield function of "Return" key on operational panel;
D14: 1:Shield function of "Start" key on operational panel;
D15: 1:Value of Redeem displays with Increment type; 0: Value of Redeem displays with
absolute type;
Attention:some bits of this bit parameter cannot be altered , otherwise it maybe system will work
abnormal.

- 167 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

10,Counting Workpieces Automatically(0:No, 1:Yes)

It set whether system counting number of workpiece automatically, 0:No counting workpieces
automatically; 1:Yes,counting automatically.

11,Increment of shift block

It sets the increment of block when change lines.

12,System Inner Parameter

 It is system inner parameter,which cannot be altered.

13,Interlock between Rotation_SP & Chuck(0:No, 1:Yes)

It sets interlock between rotation of spindle and Chuck(M10).
0:No interlock, rotation of spindle isn’t related to Chuck;
1:Yes,when CNC/Spindle is in the status of M05 , chuck can clamp/unclamp;
8:fully interlock, When M05&SPRPM(spindle encoder) is 0,chuck can clamp/unclamp;
16:super interlock, Interlock by detecting rotating speed
32:Chuck & Chuck Key are invalid when CNC is running program without Pause;
56:Compulsion interlock. Chuck & Chuck Key are invalid when CNC is on Auto mode;
64:No interlock when Auto, Interlock when Manual.
Suggest set to interlock for safe.

13-1,Interlock between Rotation_SP & Tailstock (0:No, 1:Yes)

It sets interlock between rotation of spindle and tailstock(M79). The same principle for
parameter set as Spindle chuck, please check P13 on Other parameter.

14,Coolant key is valid on Auto(0:No, 1:Yes)

It sets if Press "Coolant"key is valid on Auto. 0:No,"Coolant" key doesn’t work on Auto;
1:Yes, "Coolant" key also works in condition of Auto.

15,Detect Position of Chuck(M10/M11)(0:No, 1:Yes)

It sets if detect position of chuck. 0:No detect; 1:Yes,detect.
If P15=1, M12,PIN11_CN10 Plug, position input for Chuck(Clamp/M10); M22, PIN5_CN10
plug, position input for Chuck(Loose/M11)
Attention: It is same pin(M12) of check of Chuck-clamp&Door-switch, only one usage is valid.If check
chuck clamp if is in position,also cannot be used as check of Door-switch.
It is same pin(M22) of check of Chuck-loose&orientation end input,only one usage is valid. If check
chuck-loose if is in position,also cannot be used as Tailstock control switch.

16,Detect Position of Tailstock(M79/M78)(0:No, 1:Yes)

It sets if detect position of tailstock. 0:No detect; 1:Yes, detect;
If P16=1, M18,PIN10_CN10 Plug, position input for Tailstock (Forward/M79; M28,
PIN23_CN10 Plug, position input for Tailstock(Backward/M78).

- 168 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

17,Type of Driver Alarm(ALM)(0:NO type, 1:NC type)

It sets the type of driver alarm. ALM,PIN12_CN5 plug, 0:NO type; 1:NC type.

18,Type of Spindle Alarm(ALM1)(0:NO type, 1:NC type)

It sets the type of spindle alarm. ALM1,PIN5_CN3 plug,0:NO type; 1:NC type.

19,Type of Machine Alarm(ALM2)(0:NO type, 1:NC type)

It sets the type of machine_tool alarm. Input point is ALM2, PIN2_CN10 plug. 0:NO type;
1:NC type.

20,Control Mode of Chuck(0:Single, 1:Double)

It sets the control mode of chuck, 0:Single control signal for Chuck; 1:Double control signal for
Chuck.
P20=0, one output point for Chuck, M10:clamp chuck, M11: unclamp chuck;
P20=1, two output points for Chuck, M10: output M10(PIN21_CN3 Plug) to clamp chuck;
M11: output M71(PIN9_CN10 Plug) to unclamp chuck.

21,Control Mode of Thumbstall(0:Single, 1:Double)

It sets the control mode of tailstock, 0:Single control signal for thumbstall, also tailstock;
1:Double control signal for Thumbstall.
P21=0, one output point for thumbstall, M79:thumbstall forward, M78, also M79 is invalid:
thumbstall backward;
P21=1, two output points for thumbstall, M79: output M79(PIN22_CN3 Plug) to forward
thumbstall; M78: output M73(PIN22_CN10 Plug) to backward thumbstall.

22,External Switch for Chuck(0:No, 1:Yes)

It sets if there is external switch for control chuck. 0:No,without switch for chuck;1:Yes,with
external switch for chuck. Input point is M16,PIN12_CN10 Plug.
Note: It is reciprocating signal. one is valid,clamp chuck; another is invalid,loose chuck.

23,External Switch for Tailstock(0:No, 1:Yes)

It sets if there is external switch for control tailstock,0:No,without switch for tailstock;
1:Yes,with switch for tailstock. Input point is M14,PIN24_CN10 Plug.
Note:Reciprocating signal.one is valid,tailstock forward;anther is invalid,tailstock backward.

24,Time of Chuck(s)
It sets holding time of output M10/M11 for chuck. Unit:second. 0 means M10/M11 are long
signal, also always output M10/M11 is valid.

24-1,M10 Long Signal(0:No, 1:Yes)

It sets the control mode of M10, 0 means short signal, holding time of output M10 can be set
by parameter, 1 means long signal, M10 always valid

- 169 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

24-2,M71 Long Signal(0:No, 1:Yes)

It sets the control mode of M71, 0 means short signal, holding time of output M71 can be set
by parameter, 1 means long signal, M71(M11) always valid.

24-3,Chuck M10 or M11 boot [0:M10, 1:M11]

It sets cnc system output M10 or M11 when booting system, 0:Output M10, 1:Output M11.
Note: If double outputs for chuck, M11,also output M71, PIN9_CN10 Plug.

25,Time of Tailstock(s)
It sets holding time of output M79/M78 for tailstock. Unit:second. 0 means M79/M78 are long
signal, also always output M79/M78 is valid.

25-1,M79 Long Signal(0:NO, 1:Yes)

It sets the control mode of M79, 0 means short signal, holding time of output M79 can be set
by parameter, 1 means long signal, M79 always valid

25-2,M73 Long Signal(0:NO, 1:Yes)

It sets the control mode of M73(M78), 0 means short signal, holding time of output M73 can
be set by parameter, 1 means long signal, M73(M78) always valid.
Note:If double outputs, M78, also output M73, PIN22_CN10 Plug.

26,Type of Emergency Stop1(0:NO type, 1:NC type)

It set thee type of switch for 1st Emergency Stop, which is at panel. 0: NO type switch; 1:NC
type switch for 1st emergency stop.

27,Type of Emergency Stop2(0:NO type, 1:NC type)

It set thee type of switch for 2nd Emergency Stop, which is at panel. 0: NO type switch; 1:NC
type switch for 2nd emergency stop.Input is PIN5_CN11 Plug.
28,Run/Pause Output(0:No, 1:Yes)
It sets if output the condition of Running/Pause. 0:No, don’t output condition of Run/Pause;
1:Yes, output the condition of Run/Pause. And M69, PIN21_CN10 plug , output Running
condition; M65,PIN20_CN10 plug, output Pause condition.
Note:These signals can be used to indicator for show condition of machine.

29,Alarm Output(0:No, 1:Yes)

It sets if output the condition of Alarm. 0:No, don’t output condition of Alarm; 1:Yes, output
the condition of Alarm, Output point is M67,PIN8_CN10 Plug.
Note: The signals can be used as machine-protection or show condition of machine.

30,Language(1:Chinese, 0:English)
It sets the language of system. 1: Set language to Chinese ; 0: set to English.

31,Use Inner PMC(0:No, 1:Yes)

It sets if use inner PMC function; 0:No, no use; 1:Yes, use. 32: output points of CNC & output

- 170 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

points on PLC are valid when diagnosis; 64: output points of CNC are valid, and output points on
PLC are invalid when diagnosis.
Warning:It is usually used for adjusting parameters. system must use inner IO PMC when actual use,also
P31=1. Otherwise system will works abnormally.

32,Use High-Speed Inner PMC(0:No, 1:Yes)

It sets if use high-speed inner PMC for IOs. 0:No,don’t use PMC; 1: Yes,use High-Speed
PMC.
Warning:It is usually used for adjusting parameters. system must use High-Speed PMC when actual
use,also P32=1. Otherwise system will works abnormally.

33,HY as Running Key(0:No, 1:Yes)

It sets if make HY input point, PIN9_CN11 plug as external key for RUN signal. 0:No, HY
don’t as RUN input signal; 1:Yes,HY as RUN signal.
Attention: Because HY signal maybe as Y(C)-axis selection signal, so when P33=1,then P1 in
Axis&Other parameter only set as 0.

34,HA as Halt Key(0:No, 1:Yes)

It sets if make HA input point, PIN10_CN11 plug as external key for STOP signal. 0:No, HY
don’t as Halt input signal; 1:Yes,HA as Halt signal.
Attention:Because HA signal maybe as A-axis selection signal, so when P33=1,then P1 in Axis&Other
parameter only set as 0.

35,Soft-Limit is Valid when no homing(0:No, 1:Yes)

It sets if soft-limit is valid when not homing. 1:Yes,valid, 0:No,invalid.
Attention:the set of this parameter is related to operation habits.

36,Time(Year-Month-Day-Hour-Minute)
It sets time and date of system. After set well,system will take this setting time as
basic,according to inner timer count time and shows in displayer.
Example:13:33, 16th, March, 2021; set P36=2021-03-16-13-33, & Enter.

37,Rate of RS232
It sets rate of communication with RS232. Different value corresponding to different
rate:[0=7200;1=9600;2=14400;3=19200;4=38400;5=57600; 6=115200].
Attention:The Rate of both CNC & PC must keep same.

37-1,OPC Function_Modbus_Station
It sets Station number of Series port with OPC modbus function, Odd parity: 10000+station
number; Even parity: 20000+Station number; No parity:30000+station number; +100000:Series
Port 1 as OPC.

38,Latched for Rapid Key(8:Yes)

It sets if latched for "Rapid" key on panel. 8:Yes. Reciprocating control.

- 171 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

41,Backup Current Parameters

It is for backup current parameters as ex-factory set. It is used for backup parameters after
debugging is finished well, easy to maintain.
Attention: select this parameter,press "Enter" key twice,finish backups.

42,Recovery Backup Parameters.

It is for recovery current parameters to ex-factory set. It is normally used for recovery to
ex-factory set when parameters set wrong.
Attention: after finish this operation,last parameters will be occupied.

50,Run from middle Program ask going last line point[8:Yes,0:No]

It sets whether CNC moves to end point of last block when start from middle line,8:Yes, 0:No.

51,Return Safe Point firstly when starting from break point(+4:Z,+8:X,+16:Feed Hold)
It sets whether CNC go to safe point firstly when P50=8.+4:Z-axis go to safe point; +8:X-axis;
+16: feed hold.

52,Machine Coordinate_Safe Point

It sets machine coordinate value of safe point after set of P51.

120,Direction of Manual Feeding Key

It sets feeding direction of manual feeding key of each axis on panel.
Value Function
+4 Direction of Z_Manual Feeding is opposite;
+8 Direction of C(Y)_Manual Feeding is opposite;
+16 Direction of X_Manual Feeding is opposite;
+32 Direction of A_Manual Feeding is opposite;

140,M77:Machine Coordinate VS Reference point 1(1001/2001/3001/4001:X/Y/Z/A)

It sets whether M77 is valid after compare axis machine coordinate value & coordinate value
of 1st reference point, 1001: compare axis is X-axis, 2001:Y-axis,3001:Z-axis, 4001:A-axis. For
example: P140=1001, if machine coordinate value is less than P150(X_reference point_1),X-axis
value of 1st reference point , M77 is valid.

141,M78:Machine Coordinate VS Reference point 2(1002/2002/3002/4002:X/Y/Z/A)

It sets whether M78 is valid after compare axis machine coordinate value & coordinate value
of 2 reference point, 1002: compare axis is X-axis, 2002:Y-axis,3002:Z-axis, 4002:A-axis. When
nd

machine coordinate value is less than coordinate value of 2nd reference point,M78 is valid.

150,X_Reference Point_1(mm) 151,Y_Reference Point_1(mm)

152,Z_Reference Point_1(mm) 153,A_Reference Point_1(mm)
These are XYZA coordinate value for 1st reference point
160,X_Reference Point_2(mm) 161,Y_Reference Point_2(mm)
162,Z_Reference Point_2(mm) 163,A_Reference Point_2(mm)
These are XYZA coordinate value for 2nd reference point
- 172 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

501,Shift Color Display of Screen(1:No, 8:Yes)

It sets if shift color display of screen, 1: No shift; 8:Yes,shift to black color.

601,Define Parameters for Step

It sets current parameters to ex-factory set for step system when machine tool is configured
with stepper motor&driver.The operation is done before debugging.

602,Define Parameters for Servo

It sets current parameters to ex-factory set for servo system when machine tool is configured
with servo motor&driver.The operation is done before debugging.

900,Display User-define Dialog Box[1:No, 4:Some, 8:All]

It sets if display user-define dialog box. 1: No display; +4:Yes,display some.4108: Enter with
page, +256: US0~54 are user coordinate, +8192: Shift between Coolant key & Rapid key

901,Homing Sequence of Axis(5bits)

It sets homing sequence of each axis.Value is 5bits.D0 bit is 0. 1:X, 2:C(Y), 3:Z, 4:A. Eg.:
P901=31240, Homing sequence is Z->X->Y->A.

910,High-Speed Input of M18/M22/M24/M28 for G31/G311(0:No, 1:Yes)

It sets if inputs of M18/M22/M24/M28 are high-speed input for G31/G311 command; 0:No,
don’t as input for G31/G311; 1:Yes.
911,Use M18_Teach-in, M28_Record(0:No, 1:Yes)
It set if use M18 as Teach-in function, M24: record middle point, M28 as Set function of
Teach-in.

912,"Reset"key reset Outputs(0:No, 1:Yes)

It sets if "Reset"key reset output points. 0:No reset outputs; 1: Yes, reset.

- 173 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

6.6 Workpiece Coordinate Parameter

CNC system supports multiple coordinate system function, also 6 workpiece coordinate
system(G54-G59), plus 10 workpiece coordinate system(G54.1-G54.10) and a machine
coordinate system G53. A machining program can set a workpiece coordinate system can also be
set up multiple workpiece coordinate system, the workpiece coordinate system can be changed to
move its origin. That is the value of the parameter in the coordinates of its own coordinate origin
(zero) coordinate value in the machine coordinate system.
In Lathe System,normally user only need one coordinate system(G53 coordinate system),
also Machine Coordinate System.
G54 to G59 can be set with 6 workpiece coordinate systems, the coordinate system settings
interface can be modified 6 origin of the workpiece coordinate system coordinate value in the
machine coordinate system.
P Coordinate Parameter Ex-Value
1-0 Current Workpiece Coordinate Set [G54-G59] 54
1-1 X_Workpiece Coordinate (G54-G59) 0.000
1-2 Y(C)_Workpiece Coordinate (G54-G59) 0.000
1-3 Z_Workpiece Coordinate (G54-G59) 0.000
1-4 A_Workpiece Coordinate (G54-G59) 0.000
2-0 Current Workpiece Coordinate Set [G54.1-G54.10] 1
2-1 X_Workpiece Coordinate (G54.1-G54.10) 0.000
2-2 Y(C)_Workpiece Coordinate (G54.1-G54.10) 0.000
2-3 Z_Workpiece Coordinate (G54.1-G54.10) 0.000
2-4 A_Workpiece Coordinate (G54.1-G54.10) 0.000
1 X_Workpiece Coordinate of G54 0.000
2 Y(C)_Workpiece Coordinate of G54 0.000
3 Z_Workpiece Coordinate of G54 0.000
4 A_Workpiece Coordinate of G54 0.000
6 X_Workpiece Coordinate of G55 0.000
7 Y(C)_Workpiece Coordinate of G55 0.000
8 Z_Workpiece Coordinate of G55 0.000
9 A_Workpiece Coordinate of G55 0.000
11 X_Workpiece Coordinate of G56 0.000
12 Y(C)_Workpiece Coordinate of G56 0.000
13 Z_Workpiece Coordinate of G56 0.000
14 A_Workpiece Coordinate of G56 0.000
16 X_Workpiece Coordinate of G57 0.000
17 Y(C)_Workpiece Coordinate of G57 0.000
18 Z_Workpiece Coordinate of G57 0.000
19 A_Workpiece Coordinate of G57 0.000
21 X_Workpiece Coordinate of G58 0.000
22 Y(C)_Workpiece Coordinate of G58 0.000
23 Z_Workpiece Coordinate of G58 0.000
24 A_Workpiece Coordinate of G58 0.000
26 X_Workpiece Coordinate of G59 0.000
27 Y(C)_Workpiece Coordinate of G59 0.000
28 Z_Workpiece Coordinate of G59 0.000
29 A_Workpiece Coordinate of G59 0.000
......
Note:
1. When CNC controller is with related axes,which has related functions for feeding axes.

- 174 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

2. Input "E" to clear coordinate value.

3. Value Set for parameter of workpiece coordinate system is with increment type.
3. Each alone G54.1-G54.10 workpiece coordinate set just don’t display on user manual.

Explanation about Workpiece Coordinate System:

1-0,Current Workpiece Coordinate Set [G54-G59]
It is for select current workpiece coordinate from G54 to G59.

1-1 X_Workpiece Coordinate (G54-G59)

1-2 Y(C)_Workpiece Coordinate (G54-G59)
1-3 Z_Workpiece Coordinate (G54-G59)
1-4 A_Workpiece Coordinate (G54-G59)
It sets value of related axis on workpiece coordinate system, which is set by P1-0. The value is
set with Increment type.

2-0 Current Workpiece Coordinate Set [G54.1-G54.10]

It is for select current workpiece coordinate from G54.1 to G54.10

2-1 X_Workpiece Coordinate (G54.1-G54.10)

2-2 Y(C)_Workpiece Coordinate (G54.1-G54.10)
2-3 Z_Workpiece Coordinate (G54.1-G54.10)
2-4 A_Workpiece Coordinate (G54.1-G54.10)
It sets value of related axis on workpiece coordinate system, which is set by P2-0. The value is
set with Increment type.

6.6.1 How to set up the workpiece coordinate system?

We set up the workpiece coordinate in the condition of Manual,the steps are following:
a).Press "F5-MDI"key or press “F8-ChoCo” key, select related workpiece coordinate system
(G54-G59),Example,select G55 coordinate,input G55 ,Press “Enter” key,selected G54 Coordinate.
b).Move machine to suitable position that easy to measure in manual,and measured the related
coordinate value between this point (zero point in the workpiece)to Home of G53 coordinate
system(also machine coordinate system).
c).Press"F7-SetCo",press "X"key and ‘Enter’,‘insert the measured value’,and ‘Enter’.
d).Press "F7-SetCo",press "Z"key and ‘Enter’,‘insert the measured value’,and ‘Enter’
e).Press"F7-SetCo",press "Y"key and ‘Enter’,‘insert the measured value’,and ‘Enter’.
f).Press "F7-SetCo",press "A"key and ‘Enter’,‘insert the measured value’,and ‘Enter’
g).Press "F7-SetCo",press "B"key and ‘Enter’,‘insert the measured value’,and ‘Enter’
Done well now.Enter different workpiece coordinate system,it will show related value,which
also is offset value between workpiece coordinate system and machine coordinate system(G53).

6.6.2 How to adjust the offset value after set well?

If set up workpiece coordinate system well,when it needs to adjust the offset value,it could be
set by enter the workpiece coordinate parameter,steps is as follow:
In the coordinate parameter screen,selected the parameter,press "Enter",and pop up
dialog,input the offset value(also Increments,example:offset 10mm in negative direction,also input
-10),press "Enter".It is okay.
Explanation:1.when the parameter is altered well,the coordinate main screen will refresh the
corresponding coordinate value soon.
2.brackets in these parameters,it means the sum ,which is offset or adjust every time.It is suitable to look
for the offset every time.

- 175 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

6.7 Password
The password is order to avoid modified accidentally and ensure the system work in normal
condition.The system adopt three permissions, "CNC Factory", "Machine Factory" and "User".
The original condition is "CNC factory" is set, "Machine factory" and "User" isn’t set.
After set new password(set new password ,it need original password),please remember the
new password ,and the original password wasn’t work.
Attention:the password must be 6 bit data,the data could be number and letter.
password setting include:
1,Is enable CNC Co.’s password ?
It is for inner parameter,it couldn’t be operated.
2,Is enable Machine Co.’s password ?
Display and set the parameter that is related to machine’s configuration.
3,Is enable User’s password ?
It is for whether display and set the parameter that is related to processing.
4,Modify CNC Co.’s password:
5,Modify Machine Co.’s password:
6,Modify User’s password:
7,curry word time: (days)
8,Version of Operational Software.
Ex-factory Data

Note:please must remember new password after alter password.

- 176 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

6.8 Redeem
Press "Redeem" key to enter interface of redeem in any condition.
Remark Function
F1-Radius Press "F1" key to enter Radius Compensation Interface
F2-Length Press "F2" key to enter Length Compensation Interface
F3-ACLEA Press "F3" key to clear all compensation value.
F4-CLEAR Press "F4" key to clear current compensation value.
F5-SetTool Press "F5" key to set tool {same to Setup key on panel}
F6-ToolPoit Press "F6" key to enter list of Tool-Posit
F7-Set Press "F7" key to set total tool number
F8-CANCEL Press "F8" key to return back main interface

6.8.1 Radius Compensation

Press "F1" key to entering radius compensation interface on Redeem.

Fig6.8.1 Radius Compensation Interface

Setting Steps: Press "↑ ↓" key to move cursor to related tool and press "Enter" key to popup a
dialog box "Input T# tool radius compensate R:", input radius value of corresponding tool, press
"Enter" at last.
Note: Value input is with absolute type.

- 177 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

6.8.2 Length of redeem

Press "F2" to enter Length compensation interface on Redeem.

Fig6.8.2 Length Compensation Interface

Steps of modifying length compensation:
Press "↑ ↓" key to move cursor to the corresponding tool number and press "Enter" to popup a
dialog box, import the modifying axis into the dialog box and import the modifying value(import
0.05 to plus 0.05, import -0.05 to reduce 0.05), press "Enter" to confirm. The system calculates
current value of redeem after finishing setting.
Method of Automatically Tool Set
1)Move machine tool to a position where is easy to measure coordinate of tools
2)Press "↑ ↓" to move cursor to corresponding tool number
3)Press "F5-Set tool" key to popup a dialog box, "input axis name:[X,Z]"
4)Press X/Z key, "Input Coordinate Axis(mm): X/Z", input coordinate value
4)Press "Enter" to confirm.compensation of corresponding axis is set well.
The system refresh current value of redeem after finishing setting automatically.
Method of initializing the length compensation value of tool:
Press "F3" or "F4" to initialize length compensation of all or current tool.
Note: Value input is with increment type.

- 178 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

6.8.3 Tool Sets List

Press "F6" to enter posit tool interface in redeem. The parameter is used to set type of tool
sets when adopting radius compensation of tool.

Fig6.8.3 Tool Posit Interface

Step of setting: Press "↑ ↓" to move cursor to corresponding tool number and press "Enter" to
popup a dialog box, input the code of corresponding tool’s types and press "Enter" to confirm.
Press "F1" key to initialize all the kinds of tool point to 0.
6.8.4 Set quantity
Press "F7" key to popup a dialog box On Redeem interface to set total tools.

Including sum tools of electrical tools , linear tools and toolpost.

The CNC system supports 99 pieces tools max.

- 179 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

6.9 Screw Compensation

Press "Parameter" three times to enter screw compensation interface.

Fig6.9.1 Screw compensation interface

Screw compensation is used for automatic compensating the error of screw pitch, which due
to the error of screw pitch to affect accuracy of machine. The system adopts built-in screw
compensation: Take machine’s home position, also datum point as the starting point when
debugging, measured the error curve of screw, studied out the correctional curve according to the
error curve, import the value of correctional curve into the correctional parameter and system is
going to compensate according to the parameter in automatic running.
Screw compensation by the axis as the unit to set storage, set X/Z/C/A/B axis separately, by
pressing "F1" "F2" "F3" "F4" "F5" to switch; Every axis of screw compensation interface has tow
areas(basic parameter and set the compensation), by pressing "→ ←"to move the cursor to realize.
Storage of screw compensation curve is with each axis, set screw compensation of X Y Z A B
axis separately, by pressing "F1" "F2" "F3" "F4" "F5" to switch; Every axis of screw compensation
interface has two areas(basic parameter and set the compensation), which switch is through
pressing "→ ←"to move the cursor .
A) Basic parameter:
Press "↑ ↓" to select current basic parameter to set in basic parameter, press "Enter" to popup a
dialog box to import the error compensation of every axis and import the basic information of

- 180 -
 -Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

screw compensation.
Basic parameter of every axis’ error compensation of screw pitch includes as follows:
1. Reserve.
2. Backward checking points.
It is set for points number of compensation in negative direction.
3. Forward checking points.
It is set for points number of compensation in positive direction.
4. Multiple.
It is set for rate of compensation, also actual value=set value * multiple .
5. Distance (um).
It is set for the distance between two compensate points.
Note: Number of compensation points can be set freely, max points of each axis is 300.

B) Set compensation value (No. Coor(mm) Value(um) ):

In the area of setting compensation value, it will shows the value of compensation and every
axis’ error compensation point of screw pitch. Press "↑ ↓ PgDn PgUp" to select current
compensation point and press "Enter" to popup a dialog box to import the value of current
compensation point.
Test program generation automatically
Automatically generate a program of laser interferometer to check the screw compensation.
Enter the screw compensation screen and set basic parameters well, press "B" key to check
program" to detect program to popup a dialog box and press "Enter" to generate corresponding
checking program of screw compensation.
System calculates the distance of compensation points automatically according to basic
parameter. Distance is uniform, which could be set according to different axis, and user can set
compensation value of each point (System requires input absolute value, relating to value of datum
point).
Example1: Linear axis: when length of travel is -400mm~+800mm, distance is 50mm:
Basic parameters set as follows:
1)Backward checking points: 8
2)Forward checking points: 16
3)Multiple: 1
4)Distance(um): 50000
Corresponding compensation point and value:
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 . 25
Value +2 +1 +1 -2 0 -1 0 -1 +2 +1 0 -1 -1 -2 0 +1 +2 +1
The contrasted chart of compensation points and value as follows:

- 181 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Note: Zero point is reference point,don’t account into checking point.

Example 2: Rotary axis: when movement per revolution is 360°,interval of points 45°,Basic
parameters set as follows:
1) Backward checking points: 0
2) Forward checking points: 8
3) Multiple: 1
4) Distance(um): 45000

Output compensation value at corresponding point:

NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
VALUE +1 -2 +1 +3 -1 -1 -3 +2 +1
Compensation point and value contrast:

Note: 1. In the system, when axis is rotary axis, the coordinate value is 0~360. 0 and 360 are at same position:
Example: When input A0 & A360 , both will rotate to zero position.
2.Zero point is reference point,don’t account into checking point.

- 182 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Chapter 7 Installation & Connection

7.1 System installation and connection
At first, users should check whether the hardware is complete, unwound and compatible, such
as: cnc system, driving power, servo motor, photoelectric encoder, electric tool carrier.
The installation of cnc system must be fastened tightly, with some spaces around to ensure the
ventilation of air. Panel should be put in a place where it is not only convenient to operate and but
also able to avoid hurt of heating by scrap iron.
Intense current, week current must be put separately, cnc system and driver should be possibly
away from the machine intense current. In order to reduce interference, all signal cables should be
kept away from AC contactor. Photoelectric encoder, limit, basic point signal are advisably not to
be connected directly to cnc system through intense current box. All power cords must be earthing.
7.2 System installation dimension
This system has two parts of cnc controller, host controller & operational panel

Fig3.1 Dimension of Host Controller

Fig7.2 Dimension of A type & B type Operational Panel

- 183 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Fig7.3 Dimension of C type & E type Operational Panel

7.3 System Rear View

Attention: switching power supply L, N must be connected to AC 220V, current 1.0A through isolation
transformer or noise filter.

- 184 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

7.4 Interface Connection Graph

7.4.1 CN4 Turret Socket (Female/DB15)

CN4 Turret signal with Female socket DB15

Signal Pin I/O function Valid
0V 10 OUT 0V 0V
+24V 11,15 OUT +24V +24V
+T 12 OUT Control CW Rotation of Turret 0V
-T 13 OUT Control CW Rotation of Turret 0V
T1 1 IN T1 Position Input Signal 0V
T2 2 IN T2 Position Input Signal 0V
T3 3 IN T3 Position Input Signal 0V
T4 4 IN T4 Position Input Signal 0V
T5 5 IN T5 Position Input Signal 0V
T6 6 IN T6 Position Input Signal 0V
T7 7 IN T7 Position Input Signal 0V
T8 8 IN T8 Position Input Signal 0V
TOK 9 IN Detect Lock signal of Turret 0V
System can control 1-99 tools. Press “F7”key to set total tools number in Redeem interface,
Starting number of linear tool is set in Tool parameter. Please check Tool parameter on chapter 6.4.
When lathe is with coding turret,we can take these as normal input points & outputs point,
which is controlled by ProgramTool,and it can be edited by press “N” in Diagnosis screen.
Wiring Diagram for +T/-T with Relay(Output) Wiring Diagram for T01~T08 with NPN sensor (Input)

Attention: 1. All the inputs & outputs are based on CNC system,Valid level of all inputs & outputs is 0V.
2. When choosing the electrical appliance plate, +T and –T control single contact middle relay, user
should install two AC contactors of +T and –T.it must plus a reverse diode in order to cancel reverse
current.Suggest select SZGH IO relay board.
- 185 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

7.4.2 CN9 Spindle Encoder Socket (Female/DB9)

CN9 SP_Encoder signal with Female socket DB9

Signal Pin I/O Function Valid
0V 4 OUT 0V 0V
+5V 1 OUT +5V +5V
PA+ 5 IN A Phase Positive signal
5V
PA- 7 IN A Phase Negative signal
PB+ 3 IN B Phase Positive signal
5V
PB- 6 IN B Phase Negative signal
PC+ 2 IN Z Phase Positive signal
5V
PC- 8 IN Z Phase Negative signal
Attention:
1. The output signal of encoder adopt the output way is line output, the power supply is +5V.
2. The signal line must adopt shielded twisted pair cable, the length is 20m at most.
The input signal of encoder PA PB PC:

Pay attention:
When machine is configured with inverter+ac motor and customer want to do threading cycle
processing,like G92, it needs to fix an encoder to spindle motor.
Configuration of encoder:
P9 on Axis parameter: Whether Detecting spindle encoder
P10 on Axis parameter: Resolution of spindle encoder
P412 on Axis parameter: number of spindle teeth
P413 on Axis parameter, number of encoder teeth
When transmission ratio of spindle and encoder not as 1:1, please modify P412&P413 in Axis parameter
when teeth of spindle is not more than teeth of encoder;
If teeth of spindle is more than teeth of encoder, it needs to select adapter plate of SZGH;
Note: it must be integer multiple relationship about teeth between spindle & encoder.

- 186 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

7.4.3 CN3 IO1 Control Socket (Female/DB25)

CN3 I/O1 signal with Female Socket of DB25

signal pin I/O function Valid
0V 1 OUT 0V 0V
+24V 14 OUT +24V +24V
M36/Y0 2 IN M36/Zero Point of Y-axis 0V
X0 3 IN Zero Point of X-axis 0V
Z0 17 IN Zero Point of Z-axis 0V
-L 15 IN Positive limit 0V
+L 16 IN Negative limit 0V
M34/A0 4 IN M34/Zero Point of A-axis 0V
ALM1 5 IN Alarm1 of Spindle 0V
HALT 6 IN Pause 0V
RUN 18 IN Run 0V
M03 19 OUT Clockwise Rotation of Spindle 0V
M04 7 OUT Counter clockwise Rotation of Spindle 0V
M05 20 OUT Stop of Spindle 0V
M08 8 OUT Coolant 0V
M10 21 OUT Chuck 0V
M32 9 OUT Lubrication 0V
M79 22 OUT Thumbstall/Tailstock 0V
S01 10 OUT Spindle first gear 0V
S02 23 OUT Spindle second gear 0V
S03 11 OUT Spindle third gear 0V
S04 24 OUT Spindle fourth gear 0V
M75 12 OUT Shift Control mode for C-axis 0V
+10V 25 OUT Analog Output Signal of 1st spindle 0～10V
0V 13 OUT Ground of frequency conversion 0V
Note: 1.when your CNC system isn’t configured with Y(C)-axis & A-axis,M36/Y0 & M34/A0, could be used
as normal input points,controlled by M36/M34 code.
2.Valid level of inputs & outputs are 0V.
3. P36 on Speed parameter is set max speed of 1st spindle, also corresponding to +10V analog voltage of
1st spindle.
4.+24V & 0V of CN3 are from power supply directly in the rear of CNC controller.

- 187 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

7.4.4 CN10 IO2 Socket (Female/DB25)

CN10 I/O2 signal with Female Socket of DB25

Signal Pin I/O Function Valid
0V 1 OUT Ground of the power supply 0V
+24V 14 OUT 24V power supply +24V
ALM2 2 IN Alarm2 of Machine Tool 0V
M24 3 IN User-defined input 7 0V
M22 5 IN M01 Quasi-stop Input 0V
M59 6 OUT Huff Output 0V
M61 19 OUT User-defined output1 0V
M63 7 OUT User-defined output2 0V
M65 20 OUT User-defined output3 0V
M67 8 OUT User-defined output4 0V
M69 21 OUT User-defined output5 0V
M71 9 OUT User-defined output6 0V
M73 22 OUT User-defined output7 0V
M18 10 IN User-defined input1 0V
M28 23 IN User-defined input2 0V
M12 11 IN User-defined input3 0V
M14 24 IN User-defined input4 0V
M16 12 IN User-defined input5 0V
+10V 25 OUT Analog Voltage Output of 2nd Spindle 0～10V
0V 13 OUT Ground of frequency conversion 0V
Note: 1.when your CNC system isn’t configured with B-axis,M24/B0 could be used as normal input
points,controlled by M36/M34 code.
2.Valid level of inputs & outputs are 0V.
3. P40 on Speed parameter is set max speed of 2nd channel analog voltage output for 2nd spindle, also
corresponding to +10V analog voltage of 2nd spindle.
4.+24V & 0V of CN10 are from power supply directly in the rear of CNC controller.

- 188 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

7.4.5 CN16 IO3 Socket (Female/DB26)

CN16 I/O3 signal with Female Socket of DB25

Signal Pin I/O Function Valid
0V 20 , 21 OUT 0V 0V
+24V 10 , 19 OUT +24V +24V
X40 1 IN Alternate input 0 0V
X41 2 IN Alternate input 1 0V
X42 3 IN Alternate input 2 0V
X43 4 IN Alternate input 3 0V
X44 5 IN Alternate input 4 0V
X45 6 IN Alternate input 5 0V
X46 7 IN Alternate input 6 0V
X47 8 IN Alternate input 7 0V
Y24 11 OUT Alternate output 0 0V
Y25 12 OUT Alternate output 1 0V
Y26 13 OUT Alternate output 2 0V
Y27 14 OUT Alternate output 3 0V
Y28 15 OUT Alternate output 4 0V
Y29 16 OUT Alternate output 5 0V
Y30 17 OUT Alternate output 6 0V
Y31 18 OUT Alternate output 7 0V
RUN 24 IN External Input for Run 0V
HALT 23 IN External Input for Halt 0V
Note: 1.Y24 is controlled by K1 key on operational panel.
2.Y25 is controlled by K2 key on operational panel.
3.Y26 is controlled by K3 key on operational panel.

- 189 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

7.4.6 CN5 XYZ Drive Socket (Male/DB25)

CN5 XYZ Driver with Male Socket of DB25

Signal Pin I/O Function Valid
XCP+ 6 OUT Positive Pulse signal of X-axis
5V
XCP- 18 OUT Negative Pulse signal of X-axis
XDIR+ 7 OUT Positive Direction signal of X-axis
5V
XDIR- 19 OUT Negative Direction signal of X-axis
YCP+ 8 OUT Positive Pulse signal of Y-axis
5V
YCP- 20 OUT Negative Pulse signal of Y-axis
YDIR+ 9 OUT Positive Pulse signal of Y-axis
5V
YDIR- 21 OUT Negative Pulse signal of Y-axis
XZO+ 5 IN Positive Zero position signal of X-axis
5V
XZO- 17 IN Negative Zero position signal of X-axis
ZCP+ 3 OUT Positive Pulse signal of Z-axis
5V
ZCP- 15 OUT Negative Pulse signal of Z-axis
ZDIR+ 4 OUT Positive Direction signal of Z-axis
5V
ZDIR- 16 OUT Negative Direction signal of Z-axis
ZZO+ 2 IN Positive Zero Position signal of Z-axis
5V
ZZO- 14 IN Negative Zero Position signal of Z-axis
YZ0+ 24 IN Positive Zero Position signal of Y-axis
5V
YZ0- 25 IN Negative Zero Position signal of Y-axis
0V 13 , 23 OUT 0V
5V
ALM 12 IN Alarm signal of Servo driver
+24V 11 OUT +24V of Power Supply 0V
INTH 10 OUT Reset alarm signal 0V

Note: 1. The signal cables must adopt shielded twisted pair cable, the length is 20m at most.
2. Whether the alarm signal ALM is normal open or normal close is set by P17 in Other parameter.
3. Control signals for Y-axis also is same to control signals for C axis.
4. When system take C axis to as rotate axis, M800 instruction is for backing to zero position of encoder,
Output M75 signal to select position control mode of spindle servo, M03/M04 is to close M75 signal, spindle
servo shift to speed control mode.

- 190 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

7.4.7 CN6 AB Drive Socket (Male/DB15)

CN6 AB Driver with Male Socket of DB15

Signal Pin I/O Function Valid
ACP+ 1 OUT Positive Pulse signal of A-axis
5V
ACP- 9 OUT Negative Pulse signal of A-axis
ADIR+ 2 OUT Positive Direction signal of A-axis
5V
ADIR- 10 OUT Negative Direction signal of A-axis
BCP+ 4 OUT Positive Pulse signal of B-axis
5V
BCP- 12 OUT Negative Pulse signal of B-axis
BDIR+ 5 OUT Positive Pulse signal of B-axis
5V
BDIR- 13 OUT Negative Pulse signal of B-axis
AZO+ 3 IN Positive Zero position signal of A-axis
5V
AZO- 11 IN Negative Zero position signal of A-axis
BZO+ 6 IN Positive Zero position signal of B-axis
5V
BZO- 14 IN Negative Zero position signal of B-axis
0V 8 OUT 0V 0V
ALM 7 IN Alarm signal of Servo driver 0V
+24V 15 OUT +24V of Power Supply 24V
Example: Wiring Diagram[CNC Controller with dual servo drive(SZGH-302)]

- 191 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

7.4.8 CN11 MPG/Handhold Box Socket (Male/DB15)

CN11 Handwheel Signal with Male Socket of DB15

signal pin I/O function Availability
0V 13 OUT 0V 0V
+5V 6 OUT +5V +5V
PA+ 8 IN A signal +
5V
PA- 15 IN A signal -
PB+ 7 IN B signal +
5V
PB- 14 IN B signal -
STOP 5 IN emergency stop 0V
OFF/VDK0 12 IN Off/ feed amending 0 0V
X100/VDK1 4 IN *100/ feed amending 1 0V
X10/VDK2 11 IN *10/ feed amending 2 0V
X1/VDK3 3 IN *1/ feed amending 3 0V
A/VDS0/HALT 10 IN A/SP amending 0/halt stop 0V
Z/VDS1 2 IN Z/SP amending 1 0V
Y/VDS2/RUN 9 IN Y/SP amending 2/run 0V
X/VDS3 1 IN X/SP amending 3 0V

7.4.8.1 Electrical handwheel (Manual pulse generator)

Handwheel contact diagrammatic as:

When user connect our Handhold box to CN11 Plug, P1 in Other parameter needs to set 1,

- 192 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

and cannot use band switch to adjust SP_Rate, Feed_Rate & External Run/Pause, and P1&P2 in
Axis parameter only could be "0". X Y Z A X1 X10 X100 inputs are for axis-selection & rate,
P33&P34 in Other parameter only could set to 0.
PA+ PB- PA+ PA- are corresponding input signal of handwheel pulse A B.
The input signal of handwheel:

Attention:
1. The output signal of handwheel adopts line output, the power supply is +5V.
2. Just connect PA+ PB+ if adopt voltage output.
3. Manual pulse generator needn’t switch button for Enter ON/OFF handwheel, if there is a switch for
Enter, it is okay that use short connection of switch.
7.4.8.2 Using for Band Switch
When P1 & P2 in Axis parameter is set to "1", VDK0/VDK1/VDK2/VDK3 &
VDS0/VDS1/VDS2/VDS3 are working, which can’t as inputs for external Run/Halt button, P1 in
Other parameter is 0; P33&P34 in Other parameter only set to be 0.
VDS0(A) VDS1(Z) VDS2(Y) VDS3(X) are the input signal of adjust rate of spindle, total 16
gears. VDK0(OFF) VDK1(X100) VDK2(X10) VDK3(X1) are inputs signal of adjust Rate of
Feeding speed, total 16 gears.
7.4.8.3 External Switch for Run/Halt
When P33 in Other parameter is "1", PIN9 of CN11 plug can be as input for external Run ,
which running program automatically; When P34 in Other parameter is set to "1", PIN10 of CN11
plug can be as input for external Halt, which pause processing program.
7.4.8.4 Using for External Emergency Stop
STOP signal is the input signal of external emergency button, P27 in Other parameter is set for
type of switch of emergency stop button. 0: NO type, 1: NC type.

- 193 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

7.5 SZGH-CNC-IO-12 IO Relay Board

SZGH-CNC-IO-12 is newest version I/O Relay board with 12 pieces of relays, which is used
for connecting all inputs & outputs on CN3/CN4/CN10 plugs of CNC controller to external
switches & loads easily.

Fig1 Practical Picture of SZGH-CNC-IO-12

Fig2 Design Sketch of SZGH-CNC-IO-12

CN3 socket is corresponding to CN3 plug of CNC Controller one by one;
CN10 socket is corresponding to CN10 plug of CNC Controller one by one;
Note: Pin4&Pin15-Pin18 on CN10 are null.
CN4 socket is corresponding to CN4 plug of CNC Controller one by one
Note:Pin14 on CN4 plug is null.
Update Point 1:

T01-T08 & TOK can support NPN & PNP input.

- 194 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

NPN INPUT PNP INPUT

When short-circuit cap is at side of NPN, also COM is connected to +24V, valid level of
T01-T08 & Tok inputs are 0V (also NPN),also input 0V to these inputs,which will activate valid of
input points.
When short-circuit cap is at side of PNP, also COM is connected to 0V, valid level of T01-T08 &
Tok inputs are +24V (also PNP),also input +24V to input these points,which will activate valid of
inputs.
Update Point 2:
INPUT

OUTPUT

There are more reasonable layout,which can let user to make wiring more easily.
1 Ports on upper side of SZGH-CNC-IO-12 IO relay board are includes all IOs (includes
HALT/RUN/TOK/M05) of CN3 &CN4 &CN10 plugs,except output pins for relays. And there are
more common ports, such as +24V, 0V, PE. And also it is more easily to expand connections of
external relays.
2 Strong and Weak electricity are separated, avoid wrong connections,which will damage
CNC controller easily. Weak electricity are at upper side of SZGH IO relay board , Strong
electricity are at output ports of relays,which is for ON/OFF loads directly.

Update Point 3:

There are 12 pieces of relays output with Omron brand relays.All outputs of relays are with
NC output/NO output & COM port.
Default control signals for 12pieces of relays as following table:
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C
Output BRK M8 M10 M32 M79 M65 M67 M69 M71 M73 +T -T
- 195 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

1/BRK relay is for control brake on servo motor.Brake control input port is at BRK on upper
side.If we don’t need to control brake,we want to use this relay for M3, connect M3 to BRK,also
make short circuit between BRK & M3.
There are short-circuit caps/LED indicator/reverse diode on control side of relays. Short
circuit cap: we can renew define function of relays by short-circuit cap. Example: We don’t need to
use 3/M10 for spindle chuck,and want to use it for M4 relay control output, remove
short-circuit,there are two pins, pin in the left side is control pin of relay, pin in the right side is
M10 output of CNC, so we connect M4 to pin in the left side of 3/M10 relay.
We can define M65/M67/M69 outputs for Yellow/Red/Green indicators by P28 & P29 to 1 on
Other parameter.
Note:Outputs ports of relays can suffer 10A, 250VAC/30VDC
Note:
1．HAL, also HALT, Pin6_CN3 plug , AL1 ,also ALM1, Pin5_CN3 plug,AL2,also ALM2, Pin2_CN10
plug.
2．When output points is with relay, user can use them to control loads directly; when output points is
output from CNC controller directly without relay, it cannot control external devices directly, otherwise it will
damage CNC controller.
3．When power of controlling devices is over 250VAC/10A, please add contactors.
4．Valid level of all inputs & outputs of SZGH CNC controller is 0V.
5．When without Y-axis/C-axis, Y0 is input point of M36 command.
6．M79 is for tailstock on Lathe system, user-defined output on Milling system.
7．Above output ports(M3/M4/M5/M75/M41/M42/M43/M44/M59/M61/M63) are output from ports of
CNC directly,without controls relays,which output drive current of these outputs are about 50mA, cannot
control loads directly,otherwise it will damage these output points & CNC controller.
8．NC, also Normal Close ; NO,also Normal Open; CM,also Common port.

7.6 Daily Maintenance and Repair

In order to plenty use CNC system’s function and promote efficiency,the most important work
is correctly using system ， and notice system’s daily maintenance work ， promote Mean Time
Between Failures MTBF.Now this system’s maintenance method is introduced as follows：
7.6.1 Maintain
System’s using must be under the good circumstance.
Operator,programmer and repairer must be familiar with NC machining technology, and
according the require of user book correctly use，do one’s best to avoid improper operation.
Everyday operator should clean the system’s box and panel in case for corrupt thing and
sundries to indemnify it.
When CNC system’s using time is over three month,operator should open the system box and
clean inside.
If not using system for long time,should boot the system one time every week.
7.6.2 Ordinary Problem
7.6.2.1 System can’t boot
1） check if input power is normal.
2） check if power switch is turn on.
3） check insurance.

- 196 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

7.6.2.2 No display as boot

1） Boot again or reset.
2） Check if switch power’s ＋5V、＋12V、－12V、-24V are normal.
3） Check if transformer is bad.
4） Check if LCD’s bright adjust and connection are normal.
5） Check if main board is normal.
7.6.2.3 System’s control disorganize
1） Wrong operations.
2） Anti-jamming ability of power supply is descend.
3） Working circumstance of CNC system is too bad.
7.6.2.4 Lose of user program
The DC battery on system main board can insure user’s program and parameter don’t
lose.When system isn’t used for half year or system has been used for over two years，the battery
maybe invalidate,therefore, should exchange battery.
7.6.2.5 Machining precision is bad
1） CNC Machine needs to revise backlash after using some time.
2） Best to revise base point before machining in order to insure the start point’s precision.
3） Machining speed and cutting depth is improper.
4） Machine connector’s prick melt falls off.
5） Tool isn’t tightened.
6） Piece clamp isn’t good.
7） Tool’s giving up isn’t equality because piece’s dimension isn’t uniformity.
8） Problems of machine Tool
Attention: Because of many kinds of reasons this Manual book may have some mistakes. Our company will
provide the high quality service and the technical support for every customer.

- 197 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Appendix I Wiring Diagram of CN4 Turret

- 198 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Appendix II Wiring Diagram of CN3 Plug

- 199 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Appendix III Wiring Diagram of CN10 Plug

- 200 -
-Shenzhen Guanhong Automation Co.,Ltd.- SZGH-CNC1000TDb Series

Appendix IV Operational Panel

A Type Operational Panel

B Type Operational Panel(Default Configuration)

C Type Operational Panel

E Type Operational Panel

Note:SZGH-CNC1000TDb series cnc controller can be configured with any one type operational panel.

- 201 -